Home

M300 Reference Guide - Science Engineering Associates, Inc.

1. means Triggers Name Description Type Acquisition Buffer type Life Buffer life Address Board address Formula Formula reference Frequency Frequency value Triggers Trigger names types Name Type Trigger Always 3 Never 2 Ignore 1 Sync 0 2D Image 5 Trigger Names M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 20 Trigger Name Type Trigger 2G Image 20 Serial ASCII 37 Serial TEEE 38 Serial Integer 39 FALCON 41 SDSMT HVPS Image 52 SPEC HVPS Image 53 GPS Novatel 54 Serial Port 65 2G Advanced 66 NRC Parallel Transfer 70 CIP Image 78 Ballard 708 80 Tamdar 81 AIMMS 82 Network POSAV 83 Network ASCII 84 Network Binary 85 CIPGS Image 87 Serial Binary 89 Network Binary Buffered 90 Piraq I Q amp P 100 Command 251 Error 252 Sec Acq 254 Tables 255 Trigger Names Continued M300 Miscellaneous Reference 21 SEA Model 300 Trigger SEA Model 300 Trigger Type Value Key Description 3 Always Always trigger 2 Never Never trigger 1 Ignore Ignore type use other properties 20 Trigger on type
2. Data Field SELECT Byte Count 0 Sum of Transit 1 Sum of Particles 2 Fifo Full 3 Reset Flag 4 Forward Overflow 5 Backward Overflow 6 Dynamic Pressure hd 0 10 Static Pressure hd 1 11 Ambient Temperature hd 2 12 Forward Heat Sink Temp hd 3 13 Backward Heat Sink Temp hd 4 14 Forward Block Temp hd 5 15 Back Block Temp hd 6 16 CAS Data SELECT Options Function Reference 221 CASData CAS Data Access SEA Model 300 Data Field SELECT Photodiode 1 hd 7 17 Photodiode 2 hd 8 18 Photodiode 3 hd 9 19 Photodiode 4 hd 10 20 Qualifier TEC Temp hd 11 21 Forward TEC Temp hd 12 30 Backward TEC Temp hd 13 23 Qualifier Heat Sink Temp hd 14 24 Qualifier High Gain Vol hd 15 25 Qualifier Mid Gain Vol hd 16 26 Qualifier Low Gain Vol hd 17 27 Forward High Gain Vol hd 18 28 Forward Mid Gain Vol hd 19 29 Forward Low Gain Vol hd 20 30 Backward High Gain Vol hd 21 31 Backward Mid Gain Vol hd 22 32 Backward Low Gain Vol hd 23 33 Internal Temp hd 24 34 Spare Analog 1 hd 25 35 Spage Analog 2 hd 26 36 LWC Hot Wire Signal hd 27 37 LWC Slave Monitor hd 28 38 Laser Current Monitor hd 29 39 Laser Power Monitor hd 30 40 CAS Data SELECT Options Continued Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Function Reference O 222 CASData CAS Data Ac
3. Operation Operator Function Description Syntax Page Add Adds last two numbers AB 440 Subtract Subtracts last two numbers AB 44 Multiply il Multiplies last two numbers AB 442 Divide Divides last two numbers AB 443 Modulus Returns the remainder of the last two numbers AB 444 Increment Increments last number by one B 445 Decrement Decrement last number by one B 446 Boolean AND amp Bitwise AND operation on the last two numbers AB amp 447 Boolean OR Bitwise OR operation on the last two numbers AB 448 Boolean XOR A Bitwise Exclusive OR operation on the last two numbers A B 449 Boolean NOT Bitwise inversion of the last number B 450 Shift Left lt lt Shifts next to last number left by last number bits AB lt lt 451 Shift Right gt gt Shifts next to last number right by last number bits AB gt gt 452 Absolute Value Abs Absolute value of last number B abs 453 Arc Cosine Acos Inverse cosine of last number B acos 454 Hyperbolic Arc Cosine Acosh Inverse hyperbolic cosine of last number B acosh 455 Arc Sine Asin Inverse sine of last number B asin 456 Math Functions Math Function Reference 437 Math Function Reference SEA Model 300 Operation Operator Function Description Syntax Page Hyperbolic Arc Sine Asinh In
4. Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page Range REFLAT REFLON LAT LON 364 Ref1 D A 365 RHToDewPoint RH TEMP 366 Scale X A B 367 Scale2 X A B C 368 Scale3 X A B C D 369 ScaleArray X A B 370 ScaleArray2 X A B C 371 ScaleArray3 X A B C D 372 Seconds A0 373 SerialASCII A INDEX DELIMITER COUNT MODE 374 SerialDADS A INDEX IDENTIFIER 375 SeriallEEE A INDEX COUNT 376 SerialInteger A INDEX COUNT 377 SrNmea F IDSTR INDEX COUNT MODE 392 SrNmea F IDSTR INDEX COUNT MODE HEX Serial VAX A INDEX COUNT 378 Set INIT 379 Set INIT INC Set INIT INC COUNT Sizes PROBE RANGE 380 Skip VALUE SKIPTO 381 Slope KNOWNYS KNOWNXS STATE 382 SpData A SELECT 383 Spp100Data A SELECT 385 SrASCIT A INDEX DELIMITER COUNT MODE 387 SrDADS A INDEX IDENTIFIER 388 SrData TAG OFFSET COUNT MODE SWAP 389 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 197 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page SrIEEE A INDEX COUNT 390 SrInteger A INDEX COUNT 391 SrVAX A INDEX COUNT 394 StDev X STATE 395 STemp TTEMP PPRES SPRES RECOVERY 396 StrCat STRING1 STRING2 397 StrCat STRING1 STRING2 LENGTH StrCmp STRING1 STRING2 398 StrCmp STRING1 STRING2 LENGTH StrCpy STRING 399 StrCpy STRING LENGTH St
5. Data Field SELECT a 5 15 a 6 16 a 7 17 a 8 18 a 9 19 a 10 20 a 11 21 a 12 22 a 13 23 a 14 24 a 15 25 CIPGS Data SELECT Options Con Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations LaserTemp not F2100 F 1 CIPGSData Aq CIPGSData tinued Function Reference O 229 SEA Model 300 10 CIPGSInfo CIPGS Info Data Access SEA Model 300 CIPGSInfo CIPGS Info Data Access Synopsis CIPGSInfo A SELECT A Acquisition tag for CIPGS data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 2 Description This function allows access to individual items of the CIPGS info data block The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different CIPGS info data fields The function will returns the value of a user specified item from a CIPGS info buffer Please check the CIPGS manual for further information The CIPGS setup reply data is provided via this function This data changes for the first 10 seconds following the setup command Then these values never change after this unless the setup command is re sent to the probe Data Field SELECT Minimum Current 0 Maximum Current 1 Current 2 CIPGS Info Data SELECT Options Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations MinimumCurrent F2500 F 64 CIPGSInfo Aq CIPInfo 0
6. Function Name Function Description Page Accumulate Accumulates array elements 200 Add Add two arrays of formulas or individual elements 201 AIMMSData Access AIMMS data 202 Alarm Timer alarm function 208 AltP Inverse Pressure Altitude function 209 Areas Sums to areas array 210 Arinc4290O ut ARINC 429 data output 211 Arinc708Data ARINC 708 data access function 212 Array Set up a value in an array 214 AsyncData Extract data from an asynchronous buffer 215 Average Average a value for a period of time 216 Avg Compute an average from an array of values 217 Bearing Calculates aircraft bearing 218 BufferTime Return buffer time 219 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Function Reference 181 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page CArray Extract an element from a character string array 220 CasData CAS data access function 2321 CASPBPData CAS PBP Particle by Particle data access function 224 CIndex Character Index function 225 CIP Data CIP data access function 226 CIPGS Data CIPGS data access function 228 CIPGSInfo CIPGS info data access function 230 Cmd1D Command from 1D data 231 ColDCmd Control 1D Command Function 232 Co2DTAS Control 2D Probe function 233 Co2GCmd Control 2G Probe Command 234 Co2GTAS Control 2G Probe TAS 235 CoATDAQI41XDA Co
7. Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Arinc Label 0 255 2 Arinc Receiver 0 1 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires 32 bits of data Four bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format This acquisition event stores the 24 bits of ARINC raw data followed by 8 bits of an update count The ARINC interface drops the ARINC label from the data and replaces that byte with an update count The update counter is set to zero at power up and it increments each time a label is received Byte Offset Value 0 ARINC LSB 1 ARINC 2 ARINC MSB 3 update counter Data Format Type Synchronous event Acquisition Reference O 63 Type 16 INS Arinc Serial SEA Model 300 Comments This adapter can be used to acquire either binary or BCD serial streams Two adapters can be used to acquire both streams If the update counter does not change between acquisitions then the data returned was not updated by the INS during the time between the two acquisitions If the update counter changes by more than one between acquisitions then some data was updated more than once between acquisitions After reaching 255 the update counter rolls to 0 and continues counting Acquisition Reference O 64 Type 17 INS Synchro SEA Model 300 Type 17 INS Synchro Description This acquisition type is used to acquire angular position from a synchro channel in the INS adapter This adapter supports up t
8. Command Prototype Page asc onloff 496 asc from to onloff asc from to close asc from to create asc name create filename asc from to fire back 506 broadcast on off 503 clear error 506 cmd1d board command 492 cmd1d board auto cmd2g board command and or 493 cmd2g board auto cmdaimms board purge Time 495 cmdaimms board purge cmdaimms board heatontemp temp end 499 file on off 500 file close read file open filename file create filename Command Quick Reference Command Manager Reference O 487 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Prototype Page fml formula auto fml formula hold fml formula index value auto fml formula value auto fml formula value auto fml formula value auto fml formula value auto fml formula AND value auto fml formula 8Z value auto fml formula OR value auto fml formula value auto fml formula XOR value auto fml formula value auto 501 front 506 fwa new 502 Ibl from to onloff 504 Ist from to onloff Ist from to clear 505 mam from to max max mam from to rings rings mam from to set 508 minimize 506 next 499 open current 506 pause cancel pause hh m ss 499 Command Quick Reference Continued Command Manager Reference O 488 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Prototype Page
9. para 3 is the aimms id ID F1999 L 1 DirData A1000 7 individual id flags for each id trigger IDO F1098 L 1 Eq F1999 O 1 0 TDI F1198 L 1 Eq F1999 1 1 0 ID2 F1298 L 1 Eq F1999 2 1 0 Id 0 Standard Meteorology Packet Trigger AIMMS 10 Aimms20 F1098 Ignore Never None Time F1000 S 12 AimmsData A1000 0 Temp gc F1001 F 1 AimmsData A1000 1 RH1 3 F1002 F 1 AimmsData A1000 2 BaroPress pa F1003 F 1 AimmsData A1000 3 WindFlowNS m s F1004 F 1 AimmsData A1000 4 WindFlowEW m s F1005 F 1 AimmsData A1000 5 WindSpeed m s F1006 F 1 AimmsData A1000 6 WindDir deg F1007 F 1 AimmsData A1000 7 WindSolutionFlag F1008 I 1 AimmsData A1000 8 BaroPress mbar F1053 F 1 Units F1003 mbar pa WindSpeed knots F1056 F 1 Units F1006 knots m s WindDir rad F1057 F 1 Units F1007 rad deg WindSolutionFlag F1058 S 10 EvtStr F1008 0 Invalid Altitude ft F1093 F 1 PAl1t F1053 TDOAimms20Count F1099 L 1 F1099 Id 1 Aircraft State Data Packet Trigger AIMMS 10 Aimms20 F1198 Ignore Never None Time F1100 S 12 AimmsData A1000 0 Latitude deg F1101 F 1 AimmsData A1000 1 Longitude deg F1102 F 1 AimmsData A1000 2 Altitude m F1103 F 1 AimmsData A1000 3 VelocityNS m s F1104 F 1 AimmsData A1000 4 VelocityEW m s F1105 F 1 AimmsData A1000 5 VelocityUD m s F110
10. Parameter Usage Limits 1 stx 0 255 2 etx 0 255 3 type 0x02 Parameters Parameter 1 is used for start of text stx usually equal 0x02 Parameter 2 is used for end of text etx usually equal to 0x03 Parameter 3 is used by the M300 to document the sentence type Type 0x02 data is supported Data Size The data size is 27 bytes per sample This matches the specification for Tamdar data Check the Tamdar specification for more information Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the Tamdar specification Use the TamdarData function to retrieve individual data elements from the data block Use the correct trigger prior to the Tamdar data function Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference 155 Type 82 Serial Port AIMMS Data SEA Model 300 Type 82 Serial Port AIMMS Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the AAMMS20 AIMMS10 and ADP With version 1 11 08 of the M300 this acquisition type was must be used with AIMMS board Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 type 0 1 2 samples 1 255 3 id 0 1 2 4 5 11 12 22 28 29 Parameters Parameter 1 is the data type 0 for AIMMS20 ADP and 1 for AIMMS10 Parameter 2 is the number of desired samples since the number of samples in the acquisition entry must be 1 For normal AIMMS20 data parameter 2 is a 1 one sample per buffer For the AIMMS20 ID22 we can acquire fro
11. MGV Magnetic Var deg F 1 GPRMC STC Satellite Count F 1 GPGGA ALTM Altitude m F 1 GPGGA ALT Altitude fi F 1 PGRMZ ROLL Roll deg F 1 SBG01 PITCH Pitch deg F 1 SBG01 Table 8 SELSTR and IDSTR values Function Reference 333 A Nmea NMEA Sentence SEA Model 300 SELECTOR Type Return Type SENTENCEID YAW Yaw deg F 1 SBGO1 Table 8 SELSTR and IDSTR values Note Data for this function must be in serial NMEA format You cannot use this function to unpack data for the SEA GPS Interface You must use the traditional way for SEA GPS interface data The data can come from ANY available serial port in the system Result Type Space D n F n L n ln Iln ila C n c n S n Example Name Units Latitude rad Number Result F1000 D 1 Computations Nmea F205 GPGLL uw F LAT Function Reference O 334 OdCmd 1D Command OdCmd 1D Command Synopsis OdCmd PROBE A PROBE Probe name number probe A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag Description This function retrieves and returns the command byte from 1D data Result Type Space I 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FSSPRange fear F100 IT i OdCmd Pr fssp Aq fssp Function Reference O 335 SEA Model 300 OdIVar LD Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio SEA Model 300 OdIVar 1D Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio Synopsis OdIV
12. FREQUENCY f FREQUENCY Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations TASClockOut MHz F101 F 1 PrTasClockOut Pr 2dc F200 Function Reference O 358 PTas Pressure Airspeed SEA Model 300 PTas Pressure Airspeed Synopsis PTAS STEMP PPRES SPRES STEMP 7 Static temperature in C m21 PPRES p Pitot pressure in mb p21 SPRES y Static pressure in mb 721 Description This function computes pressure true air speed in meters second from static temperature pitot pressure and static pressure Function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computation Po A PPRES i 9285867 fii 2009 STEMP i 273 15 1 SERESI 1 m s fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example Name Units Number Result Computations PressureTAS m s F200 F 1 PTas F100 F101 F102 Function Reference O 359 RaConstant Radar Constant SEA Model 300 RaConstant Radar Constant Synopsis RaConstant RADAR WAVEGUIDELOSS K2 RADAR Radar entry radar WAVEGUIDELOSS 1 Waveguide loss value in db K2 1 K2 value Description This function computes and returns the radar constant based on the parameters WAVEGUDELOSS K2 and data stored in the radar entry specified by RADAR The data used from the radar entry are the following waveguide loss in db wavelength in meters receiver gain in db transmit power
13. Bip Last operand p gt 1 Note For long integer types use Lrotl See lrotr Long Rotate Right Description This function rotates the number A by B bits to the right This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations RotateRight we F101 IT 1 F105 4 rotr Math Function Reference 475 SEA Model 300 sin Sine sin Sine Synopsis B sin B 7 Last operand n gt 1 KFP Note Values in B of large magnitude may yield a result with little or no significance Description This function computes the sine of B s i sin B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Sine reat F1104 F 2 F300 sin Math Function Reference 476 sinh Hyperbolic Sine SEA Model 300 sinh Hyperbolic Sine Synopsis B sinh E B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note If any values in B are too large a range error will occur Description This function computes the hyperbolic sine of B s i sinh B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations HypSine n F201 F 5 F200 sinh Math Function Reference O 477 sqrt Square Root SEA Model 300 sqrt Square Root Synopsis B sqrt E B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note If any values in B are negative a domain error will occur Description This function c
14. CoFile Control File SEA Model 300 CoFile Control File Synopsis CoFile STATE STATE 1 State option on off integer 0 or 1 Description This function is used to automatically turn M300 recording on off A one in the STATE argument forces the M300 into record mode while a zero forces the M300 to stop recording Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations RecordControl dE F200 F 1 CoFile F100 Function Reference O 242 Color Color SEA Model 300 Color Color Synopsis Color COLORNAME COLORNAME z Valid color name 7 gt 0 string Description This function is used to return the M300 color value based on the string passed Each M300 color listed in Color System has an associated long integer value This function allows the user to reference colors based on their names rather than their long integer values If COLORNAME does not match any M300 color strings the M300 will assume the closest string matched Result Type Space L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations AlarmColor F201 L 1 Color red Function Reference O 243 Comb Combine Arrays SEA Model 300 Comb Combine Arrays Synopsis Comb A AINDEX AELEMENTS B BINDEX BELEMENTS Al m Formula of an array of values m21 AINDEX 1 First element of A to be combined integer AELEMENTS 1 Number of elements in A to be combined integer Bip Formula of an array of values p21 BIND
15. Ox or OX may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits If BASE is not specified it is assumed to be 10 decimal The function returns the converted value If the value exceeds the usable range the maximum or minimum range value depending on the sign in the string is returned If BASE is out or range zero is returned Result Type Space EH Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations StringToULong Mall F100 LI 1 StrToUL F105 0 10 Function Reference O 406 StrXmlProtect String XML Protect SEA Model 300 StrXmlProtect String XML Protect Synopsis StrXmlProtect STRING STRING x String for compare 721 string Description This function replaces all the lt gt and characters from XML type data with spaces This simplifies clarifies and provides an alternate way to handle the XML type data Result Type Space S n Example Name Units Number Result Computations StrXmlProt ee F1000 S 1024 StrXmlProtect F2000 Function Reference O 407 Sub Subtract Arrays SEA Model 300 Sub Subtract Arrays Synopsis Sub A B A m Formula of an array of values m21 Bip Formula of an array of values p21 KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Sub Description This function returns an array of values representing the subtraction of the two given arrays element by element This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The fo
16. from the display This leaves the particles in the same position regardless of whether or not the time bars are shown Scale The user can scale the CIPGS Image particles by a desired value The default scale value is 1 The larger the scale value the larger the particles will appear on the display Larger particles may mean less particles per display window AgeLimit The ageLimit is used to hash out an old display Once the current CIPGS Image display is older than the specified ageLimit then the display gets hashed out as an indication of old data This parameter is specified in seconds The window must have the secondary trigger set to expire once per second on the synchronous buffer Probe This is the probe name from the probe table prb 300 This is used to associate a probe table entry with a CIPGS Image display entry see also Probe on page 528 Example Version 1 7 cgs 300 7 name number window colorMin colorMid colorMax board timebars scale ageLimit probe CIPGS 0 CIPGS red blue green 0x7300 1 1 60 cipgs Setup Table Reference O 561 Cloud Image Probe Display Table cip 300 SEA Model 300 Cloud Image Probe Display Table cip 300 Overview This display is used to display particle image data of CIP Image type The user can select a color for the images This display has the capability of hashing out old images via a user selectable age limit The image data is identified via the board address for the CIP Im
17. 3 See data format for an explanation Data Format This acquisition event stores the I Q and P data for every gate The I Q and P are converted from C40 float format to IEFE float format 4 bytes and stored as the IEEE float format The I and Q data represent the real and imaginary components of the average return in vector form They are also known as the coherent power The P data represents the incoherent power summed over the gate width and number of hits The following table helps visualizing the actual data stored by the M300 The top row and left column are not part of the data Gates n I Q P 0 Lo Qo Po n 1 Iz Q 1 Pp Data format structure Acquisition Reference 166 Type 100 PIRAQ I Q and P SEA Model 300 Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 167 Type 101 PIRAQ Config Type 101 PIRAQ Config Description SEA Model 300 This acquisition type is used to acquire configuration data from the PIRAQ interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size 324 bytes Data Format This acquisition event stores the Piraq configuration data The following C structure is used to specify the data Please refer to the SEA data types section for information on the different data types used typedef struct PqConfig lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword
18. A F3 cmd2g9 2dg 0x04 AND F4 cmd2g 2dg auto A F6 tas2g 2dg 3 5 A F5 tas2g 2dg auto Command Manager Reference O 493 2D Mono Commands SEA Model 300 2D Mono Commands Synopsis tas2d board frequency tas2d board auto board 2D board name string frequency Frequency to be sent float Description This command can be used to change the 2D probe true air speed frequency The value specified will override the control function from formula table frequency The frequency must be specified in MHz board The board name specifies a unique 2D interface card as defined in the board table auto Restore control of the 2D probe true air speed frequency to the control functions Example A F1 tas2d 2dc 2 5 A F5 tas2d 2dc auto Command Manager Reference O 494 AIMMS Commands SEA Model 300 AIMMS Commands Synopsis cmdaimms board purgeTime on offlauto cmdaimms board purge on offlauto cmdaimms board heatontemp temp board AIMMS or ADP board name board purgeTime Purge time to be sent ms integer 10 65535 on Turn on all purge ports off Turn off all purge ports auto Let AIMMS or ADP perform the purge sequence temp Temperature in C float Description AIMM ADP commands Perform the purge cycle for the specified AIMMS board or ADP The purgeTime is in ms It has to be larger than 10 ms The M300 send the command for the purge for each port with the specified purge time port 1 port 2 po
19. COUNT 1 Size of array required long integer Description This function is used to insert or search a sorted array for a particular value If the KEY is already present in the array the index position within the array is returned If the KEY value is not already present it will be inserted into the array based on how it compares with the other values already in the array It s new index will then be returned Note that the index is zero based meaning the first value in the array as an index position of zero The COUNT value is to be used only when creating the array for the first time initialization After that COUNT will be ignored Not also that if COUNT is omitted during initialization a default value of 1024 will be used Result Type Space L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DropID wy F200 L 1 KeyIndex F1001 512 Function Reference O 306 LArray Long Array Element Access SEA Model 300 LArray Long Array Element Access Synopsis LArray F INDEX F 7 Formula for an array of long integers 721 INDEX 1 Index of desired long integer in array integer gt 0 KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See LIndex Long Element Access Description This function is used to access individual elements in a long integer array f F INDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations LongArray n F300 LI 1 LArray F100 25 Function Reference
20. EVENT 1 Acquisition tag for event tag BIT 1 Bit number of event bit integer 0 31 STATE 1 State option integer 0 or 1 Description This function provides the ability to obtain the value 0 or 1 of an event bit The resulting state can be toggled if the STATE value is a zero The returned integer value 1 or 0 contains the value of the event bit given by BIT Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations EventValue mn F300 L 1 EvtVal A100 4 1 Function Reference O 272 FalconData Falcon Data SEA Model 300 FalconData Falcon Data Synopsis FalconData A TITLE A Acquisition tag for Falcon data tag TITLE 1 Title indicating which falcon data field to retrieve string Description This function is used to allow access to individual elements of the falcon data buffer The data returned is dependent on the source specified by the TITLE and the information entered in the falcon data table These values can then be used by different tables for further computations and display Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FalconData wn F100 IT 1 FalconData A100 RAD TEMP Function Reference O 273 FalconDay Falcon Day SEA Model 300 FalconDay Falcon Day Synopsis FalconDay A OFFSET A Acquisition tag for Falcon data tag OFFSET 1 Offset for the time data in the falcon buffer block integer Description This function is
21. Function Reference O 337 OdRef 1D Reference Voltage SEA Model 300 OdRef 1D Reference Voltage Synopsis OdRef A A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag Description This function retrieves the reference voltage from 1D data and converts it to volts This function can be used with 1D data CAMAC 1D data SPP100 SPP200 and SPP300 data types Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations 1DReferenceVoltage my F100 F 1 OdRef A100 Function Reference O 338 OdSums 1D Sums SEA Model 300 OdSums 1D Sums Synopsis OdSums A FIRST FREQUENCY OdSums A INTERVAL STATE FIRST A 1D acquisition tag number tag FIRST 1 Use first bin or skip integer 0 or 1 FREQUENCY 1 Frequency of summation INTERVAL 1 Interval of summation in display cycles integer STATE 1 Function control variable integer Description This function sums up all 1D samples i e FSSP ASASP from a data buffer This summation is accrued for the specified frequency At the end of the time interval the sums are returned through the result space and the internal summation values are cleared for the next summation period The STATE control variable is used to control the function operation mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the summation is done every interval If the STATE control variable is a 1 then the sums are accumulated If the STATE control variable is a 2 this causes the last s
22. LB i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Floor mM F101 IT 1 F105 floor Math Function Reference 466 A LP hypot Hypotenuse SEA Model 300 hypot Hypotenuse Synopsis AB hypot A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Note Some computations may result in an overflow Description This function computes the hypotenuse of a right triangle whose sides are A and B adjacent to that right angle This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations sli JA i B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Hypotenuse reat F101 I 5 F106 F107 hypot Math Function Reference 467 SEA Model 300 InQ Natural Logarithm In Natural Logarithm Synopsis Bln B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note If any values in B are negative or zero a domain or range will occur respectively Ly 34 ES SP y Description This function computes the natural log of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i log B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations NaturalLog ee F11 F 5 F10 Ln Math Function Reference 468 log Logarithm SEA Model 300 log Logarithm Synopsis B log a B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note If any values in B
23. LENGTH 1 Number of characters to be used from string2 integer Description This function concatenates two string together The STRINGI is copied first and followed by STRING2 The LENGTH parameter can be used to select the number of characters from STRING2 to use a limit Result Type Space S n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations StringConcatenate wn F1000 S 32 StrCat F1810 F1820 Function Reference O 397 StrCmp String Compare SEA Model 300 StrCmp String Compare Synopsis StrCmp STRING1 STRING2 StrCmp STRING1 STRING2 LENGTH STRING1 7 String for compare m21 string STRING2 p String for compare p21 string LENGTH 1 Number of characters to be compared integer Description This function compares the two strings passed in the parameters and returns zero if the strings are not equal Otherwise if the strings are the same this function return one The number of characters compared is determined by the number of characters in the second string parameter If the LENGTH argument is given this will determine the number of character to be compared For example if a function compares ABCD and ABC without the LENGTH argument it will return false However if a value of 3 is given for LENGTH the function will return true The compare is case sensitive Result Type Space 111 Example Name Units Number Result Computations StringCompare ne F100 IT 1 StrCmp A65532 fml 24
24. MaximumCurrent F2501 F 64 CIPGSInfo Aq CIPInfo 1 Current ald F2502 F 64 CIPGSInfo Aq CIPInfo 2 Function Reference O 230 Cmd1D Q Command 1D SEA Model 300 Cmd1D Command 1D Synopsis Cmd1D A A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag cP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See OdCmd 1D Command Description This function retrieves and returns the command byte from 1D data Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Cmd1D vo F100 TILI Cmd1D Ag fssp Function Reference 231 Co1DCmd Control 1D Command SEA Model 300 ColDCmd Control 1D Command Synopsis Co1DCmd BOARD COMMAND BOARD Board name for of 1D Interface board board COMMAND 1 1D command byte to be sent to board integer Description This function sets up the command byte for the specified 1D type board For example this is used to change FSSP range or the PCASP pump on off This function supports 1D 1D256 CAMAC1D CAMAC1D256 SPP board type CDP doesnt allow for range change so it s not supported Result Type Space I 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FSSPRangeControl m4 F200 I 1 Co1DCmd Bd FSSP 0x01 Function Reference 232 Co2DTAS Control 2D TAS SEA Model 300 Co2DTAS Control 2D TAS Synopsis Co2DTAS BOARD FREQUENCY BOARD Board name for 2D Mono Interface board FREQUENCY 1 Board frequency in MHz Description Control 2D TAS This con
25. Piraq2 Address State NonAcgState DSP TimingMode 0x4700 OxFFOO 1 0 tcp 192 9 200 200 pos primary T 0x0340 1 0 10 Ox0D0000 test piraq piraq dsp of 5 200 400 64000 oo on 0o00nuon29 0 OXE0O00 I 0 m300 stagger dsp 2 Setup Table Reference O 549 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd CoarseDelay FineDelay Gates Hits GateWidth PulseWidth PulseRepetitionTime Watchdog FirstGate PhaseCorrect ClutterFilter TimeSeries TimeSeriesGate ScanRate PulseRate IndexOfRefraction AFCGain AFCHigh AFCLow LockTime VelocitySign PulseRepetitionTime2 Trigger TestPulseWidth TestPulseDelay TestPulse Frequency RadioFrequencyTrigger RadioFrequencySwitch Stagger Sync Transmit PulseDelay PMF Address 0xE300 State 1 NonAcgState 0 RTI802 Address State NonAcgState 7 SBUS Address State NonAcgState SEADA Address State NonAcgState Serial 12 512 500 7680 GS OoONnFrR OHH OS le 007 9381 4 0x0340 i 0 Ox4F00 J 0 0x4300 1 0 Setup Table Reference 550 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd Address State NonAcgState Baud Data Stop Parity SerialPort Port State Baud Data Stop Parity SPP Address State NonAcgState Port Baud Data Stop Parity Type TriggerThreshold TransitReject Channels DOFRejection Range AvgTransitRejection AvgTransitTimeAccept
26. See pow Power Function Description This function is used to compute A raised to the B power element by element The number of values returned and type are dependent on the formula s result type space This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations fli Ati fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Power meat F300 F 15 Power F100 F200 Function Reference O 345 PqConfig Piraq Configuration Data SEA Model 300 PqConfig Piraq Configuration Data Synopsis PqConfig A SELECT A Piraq acquisition tag number tag SELECT 1 Selector value integer Description This function allows access to the Piraq configuration data The configuration data is specified in the board table for the Piraq board entry The M300 stores this data under the Piraq Config acquisition type SELECT Data Description SELECT Data Description 0 Timing Mode 9 Delay 1 Gates 10 Hits 2 Gate Width 11 Pulsed Width 3 Pulse Repetition Time 12 Watchdog 4 First Gate Mode 13 Phase Correct Mode 5 Clutter Filter Mode 14 Time Series Mode 6 Time Series Gate 15 Scan Rate 7 Pulse Rate 16 Index of Refraction 8 Beam Width 17 ISP file SELECTOR Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations Gates yet F2101 I fi P
27. Swap 2 bytes for last number B swap2 479 Swap 4 Bytes Swap4 Swap 4 bytes for last number B swap4 480 Swap 8 Bytes Swap8 Swap 4 bytes for last number B swap8 481 Tangent Tan Tangent of last number B tan 483 Hyperbolic Tangent Tanh Hyperbolic tangent of last number B tanh 482 Math Functions Math Function Reference 438 Math Function Reference SEA Model 300 Operation Operator Function Description Syntax Page Exchange Xchg Exchange last with next to last A B xchg 484 Math Functions Math Function Reference O 439 Add SEA Model 300 Add Synopsis AB Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing the addition of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations s i Ali B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Add ren F101 F 10 F10 Fil Math Function Reference 440 Sub SEA Model 300 Sub Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing the difference of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula su
28. Volts Synopsis Volts A SEA Model 300 A Acquisition tag tag Description This function uses all the information for the acquisition type and converts the raw counts into volts The function pays attention to acquisition type and gain settings Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Volts mea F100 F 10 Computations Volts A100 Function Reference O 435 Volts Volts SEA Model 300 Function Reference O 436 Math Function Reference SEA Model 300 Math Function Reference Math operations operate directly on the floating point stack and work with floating values The result of these operations is placed in the floating point stack so that other operations may be per formed on them When the formula is completely evaluated the final result is placed in the formula result space The formula result space is then available for example to text displays strip charts etc There are a few points of consideration to note when using M300 Mathematical Functions The M300 formula tables use reverse polish notation rpn to represent mathematical evaluations If you are unfamiliar with rpn this may be a good time to review our rpn basic concept section or find a more comprehensive resource Reverse Polish Notation Basic Concepts The following is a list of the math operations implemented B is the last element and A is the next to last element on the stack
29. 12 287 50 312 50 300 00 25 000 0 03621 7 069e 004 1 414e 007 49 372 13 312 50 337 50 325 00 25 000 0 03342 8 296e 004 1 797e 007 49 420 14 337 50 362 50 350 00 25 000 0 03103 9 621e 004 2 245e 007 49 467 15 362 50 387 50 375 00 25 000 0 02896 1 104e 005 2 761e 007 49 515 16 387 50 412 50 400 00 25 000 0 02715 1 257e 005 3 351e 007 49 562 Setup Table Reference 612 Project Table prj 300 SEA Model 300 Project Table prj 300 Overview The Project table is used to store the additional project data information that the user enters into the M300 Project display tab This information is also placed at the beginning of any acquisition file is the store tables option is checked Note that this is for informational purposes only and does not affect the way and data is recorded or handled Parameters Project Name The name of the project as assigned by the user Note that this does not have to be the same as the project folder name in fact this is the field project name as opposed to the M300 project name Can be any string up to 256 characters in length Flight ID A flight identification assigned by the user Aircraft Type The aircraft type being used if applicable Aircraft ID An aircraft identification assigned by the user Operator Name Name of the person s operating the M300 for the acquisition Comments Any additional information can be added here Data Prefix This is the prefix to use with the M300 data files for
30. 2 3 4 5 DELIMITER 1 ASCII byte value used as data delimiter between ASCII data integer COUNT 1 Number of values to be returned starting from this index integer MODE 1 Mode option for data type integer O or 1 Description This function gets the data at the index specified in the ASCII data block The MODE parameter is used to specify decimal zero or hexadecimal one data for integer and long types Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SerialASCII wean F100 I 5 SrASCII A100 10 44 5 O Function Reference O 387 SrDADS Serial DADS SEA Model 300 SrDADS Serial DADS Synopsis SrDADS A INDEX IDENTIFIER A Acquisition tag for Serial DC 8 DADS ASCII data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer IDENTIFIER 1 ASCII byte value for identifier between ASCII data blocks integer Description This function is used to retrieve specific data fields from a block of DC 8 DADS ASCII data Different data fields are separated with spaces The IDENTIFIER for each block needs to be specified in order to retrieve data from the appropriate data block Result Type Space D n n starting at INDEX until the byte value IDENTIFIER is reached Example Name Units Number Result Computations SrDADS ey F100 F 5 SrDADS A100 10 65 Function Reference O 388 SrData Serial Data Function SEA Model 300 SrData Serial Data Function Synopsi
31. Comments None Acquisition Reference O 161 Type 87 CIPGS Image Data SEA Model 300 Type 87 CIPGS Image Data Description This acquisition type acquires the Cloud Imaging Probe Grey Scale CIPGS image The SEA CAPS interface is used to communicate with the CIPGS Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size for the CIPGS image acquisition event must be 4098 bytes 4096 for image plus 2 for check sum Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the compressed image data from the CIPGS probe check the CIPGS manual Use the cgs 300 file to display the CIPGS image data Type Asynchronous master event This acquisition event is the only event of a CIPGA asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Comments The CIPGS setup parameters are controlled through the Board Table You must have an entry in the Board Table for CAPS and CIPGS The true air speed is controlled by the request data command for the synchronous CIPGS serial data In order to acquire the CIPGS image properly you must also have an entry in the acquisition table for the CIPGS serial data There also must be an entry in the control table to control the TAS to the CIPGS probe Acquisition Reference 162 Type 88 CIPGS Info Data SEA Model 300 Type 88 CIPGS Info Dat
32. DMA 7 Port 0x0309 1 0 1 0x7300 22 test cas cas30 def 0x7300 OxFOO1 1 0 5 dev serl 57600 8 ROOrROrROFR 255 Setup Table Reference 547 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd Baud 57600 Data 8 Stop 1 Parity 0 TASSource 1 DepthofFieldReject ParticleSizeMeasurement RecoveryCoefficient 255 MinimumThreshold MiddleThreshold MaximumThreshold LevelHistogram LevelImage 0 7 CYCTM Address 0x310 State 1 NonAcgState 0 CYDDA Address State NonAcgState CYDIO24 Address State NonAcgState PortA PortB PortC 7 CYPDISO Address State NonAcgState DT2817 Address State NonAcgState Porto Portl Port2 Port3 GPIBPCIT Address State NonAcgState DeviceAddress InFile OutFile LogFile 1 0x0320 T 0 0x0228 Ookoso 0x228 0x0228 GS OoOrRFO OR Ox2E1 1 0 dl filter cap filter eee Setup Table Reference O 548 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd 7 GPS Address State NonAcgState Baud Data stop Parity NETWORK Address State NonAcgState Protocol IP Port Direction PCIDAC Address 0xE200 State 1 NonAcgState 0 Piraq Address State NonAcgState IRQ Memory DSP TimingMode Delay Gates Hits GateWidth PulseWidth PulseRepetitionTime Watchdog FirstGate PhaseCorrect ClutterFilter TimeSeries TimeSeriesGate Scankate PulseRate IndexOfRefraction
33. Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired represents a VOR bearing in the range of zero to 360 degrees The actual data ranges from 0 to 4096 To convert from raw data to degrees just multiply the raw value by 360 degrees and divide by 4096 counts Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 108 Type 46 1D256 Spare 0 SEA Model 300 Type 46 1D256 Spare 0 Description This acquisition type is for the first of two spare 16 bit counter channels on the 1D256 interface also known as 1D Advanced The maximum counting rate is 7 MHZ It can be used independently of the probe sizing functions Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Mode low byte 0x00 OxFF 2 Mode high byte 0x00 OxFF 3 Parameters The values for parameter one and two are used to program the mode register for the counter chip For the regular count mode use 0x28 for parameter one and 0x03 for parameter two For other count modes consult with SEA for the appropriate values for these parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 109 Type 47 1D256 Spare 1 SEA Model 300 Type 47 1D256 Spare 1 Description This acqui
34. DivisorFlag CountMethod FileName System Address State NonAcgState IRQ Frequency 0x5700 dev serl 1 19200 8 we 0 OxFO03 1 0 dev ser3 57600 8 T 0 0 10 1 30 ne 0 5 95 0 0 m300 chan30 def 0x0300 1 0 3 100 Setup Table Reference 551 SEA Model 300 Button Table btn 300 SEA Model 300 Button Table btn 300 Overview The Button table allows for the placement of buttons in any window The buttons can be used to control as well as to monitor The user can select from a few different button types Buttons can be grouped together so that only one is selected from the group Indicator buttons can be used to monitor results For indicator buttons to work the user must turn on the status type and provide an indicator formula Not all features are available with all button types This table has a set of basic parameters used There are some parameters which can be optional Check the example at the end of this section for the current information on the different valid input lines Trigger lines are allowed in Button table to select different triggers Parameters Name The identifier for the Button entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Buttons they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that th
35. If no interval channels are desired use a value of 255 for parameter three Use parameter three to control the strobe interval frequency The lower nibble for parameter two is used to store the probe command value The upper nibble for parameter two is used as the 1D interface card number Valid values for 1D interface cards are between zero and seven This number must be unique and it is assigned in one of the parameter fields of the acquisition table The lower nibble for parameter three is used as the source frequency for the strobe interval counter The range of frequency values to be selected are follows Parameter 3 Frequency 0 4 0 MHz Parameter 3 Acquisition Reference O 129 Type 64 1D256 Ballard Counts SEA Model 300 Parameter 3 Frequency 1 400 KHz 2 40 KHz 3 4 KHz 4 4 Hz Parameter 3 Continued The upper nibble for parameter three is used as the divide factor for the strobe interval counter A value of zero divides the selected frequency by 16 while all other values divide the frequency by the actual values specified Use a value of 255 for parameter three to skip acquisition of interval data Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of size channels times four plus the number of interval channels times four Data Format The data acquired consists of one or two blocks of 32 bit integer data The first block a
36. If the user has multiple ASCII outputs they can assign different and or the same integers to each output based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the output type only they are not global to the M300 State The state can be used to turn on off an ASCII entry see also State on page 538 Setup Table Reference O 538 ASCII Output Table asc 300 SEA Model 300 Type The type parameter is used to select the different auto time options please see the following table Type Description Output 0 no time 1 time hh mm ss hhhhh 2 seconds s hhhhh 3 seconds since midnight sssss hhhhh UseASCIIRecord A T will allow this entry to be controlled by the ASCII record state button A 0 will ignore the ASCII record state button This allows selected ASCII entries to output regardless of ASCII record state Serial output and network output most of the time dont need be control the ASCII record state Delimiter Termination The delimiter termination parameter has an upper part for the delimiter and a lower part for the terminator The delimiter termination is optional The delimiter parameter can be used to in the asc 300 file for the valid count output feature When the delimiter is a zero this is identical to not asking for a delimiter character The typical values for the delimiter are 0x20 for a space character and 0x2C for a comma character The term
37. KFP Note B must be within the range 1 1 or a domain error will occur Description This function computes the inverse hyperbolic tangent of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i atanh B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations ArcTanHyp mN F101 F 1 F125 atanh Math Function Reference O 460 ceil Ceiling SEA Model 300 ceil Ceiling Synopsis B ceil B r last operand 7 gt 1 Description This function computes the smallest integer that is not less than B Ceiling The following formula summarizes the calculations s i B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Ceiling m F101 ERII 10 45 ceil Math Function Reference O 461 chs Change Sign SEA Model 300 chs Change Sign Synopsis B chs B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function changes the sign of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Invert m F101 I 1 F105 chs Math Function Reference O 462 cos Cosine SEA Model 300 cos Cosine Synopsis B cos B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note Any values in B with large magnitude may yield a result with little or no significance Description This function computes the cosine of B The following formula summari
38. Mode X Y 330 MoSums PROBE A MODE FREQUENCY 331 MoSums A ELAPSED MODE PROBE INTERVAL Mul A B 332 Nmea F IDSTR SELSTR 333 OdCmd PROBE A 335 OdIVar A STROBEINDEX TOTALSTROBEINDEX CFAC INTERVAL 336 OdIVarAdv STROBETAG TOTALSTROBETAG CFAC INTERVAL 337 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 195 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page OdRef A 338 OdSums A FIRST FREQUENCY 339 OdSums A INTERVAL STATE FIRST PAlt SPRES 340 Plas PPRES 341 Poly X Ay Aj Aj 342 PosAvData A SELECT 343 Power A B 345 PqConfig A SELECT 346 PqPower A GATEWIDTH HITS SCALE OFFSET MODE 347 PqRange GATEWIDTH GATES 348 PqRange GATEWIDTH GATES CLOCK PqRaw A SELECT 349 PqReflectivity POWER RANGE RCON 350 PgStatus A SELECT 351 PrData PROBE SELECT 332 ProbeData PROBE RANGE SELECT 353 PromoBins AMP TTIME AMPBINS POINTS TTIMEMIN TTIMEMAX 354 PromoBins T TIME TTIMEBINS POINTS TTIMEMIN TTIMEMAX PromoData A SELECT 307 Protect A B 356 PrTasClockIn A 227 PrTasClockOut PROBE TAS 358 PTas STEMP PPRES SPRES 399 RaConstant RADAR WAVEGUIDELOSS K2 360 Rand SELECT 361 RandData SCALE OFFSET MINIMUM MAXIMUM 362 RandSeed SEED 363 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 196
39. Parameters Parameter one is the trigger character for the Sonic anemometer Use U 0x55 for the CSAT3 Sonic and T 0x54 for the ATI Sonic Parameter two is the control byte used to setup the communication protocol for the port The serial control byte should be set to have a value that will be compatible with the protocol of the data being received Parameter three low nibble is the ACL port number The port parameter is used to specify the communications port used to receive the data Parameter three upper nibble is the RAM segment for the ACL board The meaning of the control byte is as follows Bit Usage Bo Lowest bit for baud rate control nibble B Next to lowest B Next to highest B3 Highest bit for baud rate control nibble B4 Parity odd 0 parity even 1 B5 2 stop bits 1 1 stop bit 0 Table 3 Control Byte Values Acquisition Reference 98 Type 40 Sonic Wind System Bit Usage Be Parity on 1 parity off 0 B 8 data bits 1 7 data bits 0 Table 3 Control Byte Values Continued The baud rates supported are as follows Nibble Value Baud Rate 1100 19200 1011 9600 1010 4800 1001 2400 1000 2000 0111 1800 0110 1200 0101 600 0100 300 0011 150 0010 135 0001 110 0000 75 Table 4 Baud Rates SEA Model 300 The RAM segment specifies the high nibble for the dual RAM for the ACL
40. Synopsis SumsHVPS A PROBE INTERVAL A Acquisition tag for HVPS data tag tag PROBE Probe number name probe INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Note Deprecated M300 Function replacement See HvSums High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums Description This function builds up an approximation of the HVPS spectrum using the image data and the time information Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSSums en F100 F 64 SumsHVPS A100 P3 1 Function Reference O 418 System System Data Access SEA Model 300 System System Data Access Synopsis System SELECT SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 Description This function allows access to individual items of the M300 system The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different M300 data fields Data Field SELECT Result M300 Operational Mode 0 1 1 M300 System Select Description Value NONE 0 ACQUISTION 1 PLAYBACK 2 UDP 3 M300 Operational Mode Result Type Space See M300 System Select table above Example Name Units Number Result Computations M300Mode Het F1020 I i System 0 Function Reference O 419 TamdarData Tamdar Data Access SEA Model 300 TamdarData Tamdar Data Access Synopsis TamdarData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for Tamdar data tag SELECT 1 Selector f
41. The 2D Mono display allows the user to pick whatever color he desires for the images see also Color on page 528 Address The address selects the 2D Mono data The user doesn t need to know the tag number for the 2D Mono data just the address of the board where the 2D Mono data is coming from Valid addresses are 0x1700 0x1B00 and 0x1F00 other addresses possible When the user changes the address the primary trigger for the window also gets changed This allows the display to run only when there is 2D Mono data available see also Address on page 528 Setup Table Reference O 533 2D Mono Probe Display Table 2dm 300 SEA Model 300 Timebars Along with each 2D Mono particle there are also two slices containing the timing data for the particle The 2D Mono display can display these in the same color as the particle use a 1 or as the background use a 0 When the time bars are shown with the background color they are not removed from the display This leaves the particles in the same position regardless of whether or not the time bars are shown Scale The user can scale the 2D Mono particles by a desired value The default scale value is 1 The larger the scale value the larger the particles will appear on the display Larger particles may mean less particles per display window AgeLimit The ageLimit is used to hash out an old display Once the current 2D Mono display is older than the specified ageLimit then the d
42. The data can come from ANY available serial port in the system Result Type Space D n F n Lia I n I n iln C n cla S n Example Name Units PIXSE SPEED East m s North m s Vertical m s Number Result Computations F3150 F3160 F3161 F3162 D 3 SrNmea F3000 D 1 DIndex F3150 D 1 DIndex F3150 D 1 DIndex F3150 SPIXSE 1 3 9 0 1 2 Function Reference O 393 SrVAX Serial VAX SEA Model 300 SrVAX Serial VAX Synopsis SrVAX A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for Serial VAX data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Description This function is used to retrieve specific IEEE data values from a block of VAX float data The data stored is unchanged however the data displayed is swapped and the exponent is decremented by two in order to obtain the desired value Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SrVAx M F100 F 5 SrVax A100 10 5 Function Reference O 394 StDev Standard Deviation SEA Model 300 StDev Standard Deviation Synopsis StDev X STATE X n X values STATE 1 Function control variable integer Description This function returns the standard deviation through the given data points The STATE control variable is used to control the function operation mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the f
43. a 16 bit minimum pixel field a 16 bit middle pixel field a 16 bit maximum pixel field and a 64 bit reserved field The forward link represent the image size plus the header size All other fields in the header block are as described for the regular 2D Grey acquisition types The following diagram should illustrate the header format Each row represents an image slice 16 bytes With version 2 50 and above the reserved fields are set to zero Forward Link Reserved Elapsed Time Elapsed Time Slice Count Multiply TAS 2 bytes 2 bytes SOI SOB 2 bytes Factor 4 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes Divide TAS Minimum Middle Pixels Maximum Reserved Reserved Factor Pixels 2 bytes Pixels 4 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes Header Format Type Asynchronous master event This acquisition event is the only event of a 2D Grey asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Comments The first slice contains a repeated 16 bit particle count value This value is shifted so that it corresponds with the low byte high byte convention of the Intel data format For each image slice the first bit shifted in is stored in the lowest bit of the 128 bit slice and the last bit shifted in is stored in the highest bit of the 128 bit slice This cause an order inversion of the shadow bit pairs 00 clear 10 minim
44. atanh Inverse Hyperbolic anterio ii nasa Nad acter Ae ae A clase area ain See ae Cada E EN See eke eed chs Ue Change A eee ce a Adee Ese e Leone oe es OSU Cosine eA a Rae A A SN cosh Hyperbolic Cosine o wheat ae Peed eee Ve eek dS ee A A ee ee o A nett kan alk au alent ac Guam aati ee fooro HOOP ok rs bach ben oes VAR iaa MA eee he hypotO Hypotenuse A aces al ary Goll a gi ae ati re a ae ee el ee MO Natural Logarithmi Sd chee beeen BA te ee ine eae ee ee Inet Lora aora ile uM dee ee ean at idas des log20 Binary Logarithm 22 A y ise lrotl Long Rotrate Lets tacita io ido dt Vir ira da lr tr0 Long Rotate A eet ope Watt aia le date eva eer a are pow Power PURCHOM e BONE TAs ns de E POUL Rotate Letra 4 le OM a ei e e A AN Oat eth AT ea 3 torr Rotate Richt sass SI ewe wen eae viet oa wu eG Aue eee Table of Contents viti M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 SO A tite A See AS A A A gil Sone ead Bh small Hyperbole Sine series a si Pdo il tea Seti aee see sarto Square Root tallada swap2 0 Swap 2D td ei di di A ds it swapaQs Swap LD a sd AA o A AAA a ee swap8 Swap 8 Bytes ci pads A eee ade eae tank Hyperbolic Tangent 2 series te da Sat edo sad end tan Pangan einige dane as AA aus A ele wi Reta aa aden es EA Rea ana ead elie ial xchange n O A a he Command Manager Reference Command Manager Prototype Quick Reference 1 1 0 0 eee eee eee ID Commands td o Le e e Mc et hat e ee wot aa a BE A O aelene ee A Rt E
45. center and right Border A value that controls the size of the border the Label displays A value of O suppresses the border otherwise it is displayed using the specified size Margin A value that controls the size of the margin the Label displays A value of O suppresses the margin otherwise it is displayed using the specified size Index Selects a particular value from a formula array For instance a formula value of 1000 and an index value of 7 would select element 7 of formula 1000 Note that this value cannot exceed the number of elements in the formula value given Formula Used with data types Type 1 displays the value of the formula onto the Label display Setup Table Reference 588 Label Table 1b1 300 SEA Model 300 Format Formats the output of the data from a formula For more information on this topic see Format in Text Display Table txt 300 on page 624 and see Format in Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files on page 529 Example Version 1 7 161 300 Trigger typel frequencyl board1 type2 frequency2 board2 name number window 0 x y name number window 0 state font color colorFill horizontalAlign border margin x yw h name number window 1 x y formula format name number window 1 state font color colorFI11 horizontalAlign border margin x y index formula format name number window 1 state font color colorFI11 horizontalAlign border margin x y w h index
46. multiply them together and put the result back on the stack The stack now contains just the final answer the number 40 Why does M300 use RPN The left to right precedence of RPN is very compatible with the sequential nature of operations in a computing device LIFO Last In First Out algorithms and sequential stacks are common place in compilers and computer languages It is because of this connection RPN is a very efficient way for chip logic to perform calculations In a short period of time a technical user can familiarize themselves with the structure of RPN and be able to perform more complicated calculations with fewer keystrokes and represent those calculations in a more straight forward manner M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 32 Color System SEA Model 300 Color System The basics The M300 color system is a system wide color recognition system The user can enter a color name anywhere color values are used and the M300 will recognize it and use the appropriate numeric color value internally This also works in the other direction That is if a user puts a numeric color in any M300 table the M300 will attempt to match it to the appropriate color name and ifa match is found it will replace the numeric value with the color name for convenience purposes This feature is also available when using the Command Manager prompt M300 Colors The table below shows the names of the colors that the M300 recognizes as well as their he
47. p21 RADARCONST 1 Radar constant Description This function computes Piraq reflectivity in dBz from power range and the radar constant The following formula summarizes the computation fli POWER i 20 log RANGET i RADARCONST fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n min m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Reflectivity dbz F2030 F 200 PgReflectivity F2020 F2000 38 0 Function Reference O 350 PqStatus Piraq Status SEA Model 300 PgStatus Piraq Status Synopsis PgStatus A SELECT A Acquisition tag for Piraq status data tag SELECT 1 Data select integer 0 18 Description This function allows access to the Piraq status data This data is read from the Piraq board dual port RAM and stored in the M300 via the Piraq status acquisition type The following table shows which data 15 are retrieved based on the SELECT value SELECT Data Type SELECT Data Type 0 New buffer 10 Denominator discriminator 1 Gates 11 First gate inverse magnitude 2 Hits 12 Spare 1 3 Gate width 13 Spare 2 4 First gate mode 14 Spare 3 5 Phase correct mode 15 Spare 4 6 Clutter filter mode 16 Status 7 Time series mode 17 Pulse width 8 Time series gate 18 Data format 9 Numerator discriminator SELECT Result Type Space I n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations GateWidth n F2203 I 1 PqStatus A2002 3
48. place the result on the stack The result from the stack will be copied to F1200 result space The main purpose of this example is to setup two formulas One with latitude in degrees and the other with latitude in radians If we didn t need latitude in degrees we could have just used the following formula entry instead Latitude rad F1200 F 1 Ins429Bin A1000 20 180 0 F5 In this case the result from the Ins429Bin function goes on the stack The value from F5 gets pushed on the stack The multiply is done and the result goes on the stack Finally the result from the stack gets copied to the F1200 result space If you are not familiar with the use of Triggers in the M300 system or have not read the section explaining their use we highly recommend reviewing our Trigger before continuing with this section Next we will be explaining how the Trigger affects computations in the formula manager with some examples Setup Table Reference O 570 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Trigger Sync Once None Never Never None DegToRad F5 F 1 0 011745329252 RadToDeg F6 F 1 57 29577951 This is a basic trigger used to setup formulas that should be initialized once The primary trigger uses the Sync buffer Once The address is None which will cause the address to be ignored The secondary trigger is not used since we pick Never for the trigger type We don t even have to look any further at the tri
49. pos from to auto value pos from to center to clat clat to clear all pos from to pos from to pos from to clon clon pos from to ewmiles ewmiles pos from to freq freq pos from to freq auto to nsmiles nsmiles to onloff to set to wbarb on off to pos from pos from pos from pos from pos from zoom ZOOM SS SS SS Ss SS SS SS SS SS SS ss Ss e pos from to zoom in out 509 quit 503 restart delay 499 restore 506 rewind 499 run command amp 503 scn console scn up scn down scn left scn right scn prev scn next scn home scn end scn last 511 shutdown 503 skt from to clear 513 start 499 stop 499 Command Quick Reference Continued Command Manager Reference O 489 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Prototype Page stp from to onloff stp from to color stp group name group stp from to base base stp from to lim min max stp from to max max stp from to min min stp from to offset offset stp from to range range 514 tas2d board frequency tas2d board auto 494 tas2g board frequency tas2g board auto 493 tascip board frequency tascip board auto 497 tascipgs board frequency tascipgs board auto 498 time cancel time hh mm ss 499 txt from to onloff
50. see also Format on page 529 On very common mistake is to have a formula of float type and then specify the string format option s This can sometimes cause the system to crash depending on the actual data that is in memory from where the string output will occur Delimiter This parameter is can be used to change whether or not a delimiter character is necessary for the output data so it acts as a state for the delimiter This parameter is optional the default is O for no delimiter If the user specifies a 1 then the delimiter character is used allow the data value to generate the desired output Example ASCII Configuration Files 7 Fase Name Type Index Formula Format Date CA 1 F1 os Time CA i FO rl FPsspSum RA F8020 30 0 OapSum RA i F9020 3 30 0 Fssplwc RA i F8051 30 3 OapLwc RA a F9051 WO 3 E FsspMvd RA 1 F8060 WTO LEW OapMvd RA 1 F9060 30 1 FsspMd RA i F8061 30 1 OapMd RA F9061 30 1 LwcFsp RA 1 F8052 0 2 LwcOap RA 1 F9052 50 2 Lwcdnw RA i F52305 30 26 LwceRmt RA i F53007 C0222 LwcNevL RA i F53121 30 2f LwcNevT RA 1 F53131 0 2 Lwekng RA So F53207 50 2 RmtRaw RA F53001 30 4f PSP VAC RA 1 F8033 30 3 FSP RNG RA I F8002 31d CR CA F65533 rgo LF CA 1 F65532 gor Setup Table Reference 541 Board Table brd 300 SEA Model 300 Board Table brd 300 Overview
51. this can be changed but we need to recompile the software The use of square brackets and regular brackets affects how the data is copied from the floating point stack to the result space for the formula Sample match When brackets are used for the result space the system uses the number of elements in the result space to figure out how many elements to copy from the floating point stack The number of elements in the floating point stack and the number of elements in the result space is used to do linear interpolation when copying the results link to linear interpolation here For example if there are 10 elements for a formula in the result space and only 5 elements for an item on the stack the formula manager would fill the 10 elements in the result space Since there are only 5 elements on the stack the formula manager would use the same value twice for each element on the stack R 0 S 0 R 1 S 0 R 2 S 1 R 3 S 1 R 4 S 2 R 5 S 2 R 6 S 3 R 7 S 3 R 8 S 4 R 9 S 4 Regular copy Setup Table Reference O 567 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 When square brackets are used for the result space the system uses the minimum number of elements from the stack size and the formula result Then it copies this number of elements from the floating point stack to the result space Using the same example from above in this case only 5 elements would be copied from the stack to the resul
52. txt from E o color 516 wnd from to wnd from to wnd from to front wnd from to wnd from to minimize wnd from to open wnd from to restore wnd from to print wnd from to bmp file wnd from to jpg file wnd from to tif file wnd move wnd next wnd prev wnd from to lock unlock wnd from to pause unpause wnd on off 317 Command Quick Reference Continued Command Manager Reference O 490 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Prototype Page xvy from to onloff 519 xvy from to color xvy from to clear xvy group name group xvy from to xbase base xvy from to xlim min max xvy from to xmax max xvy from to xmin min xvy from to xoffset offset xvy from to xrange range xvy from to ybase base xvy from to ylim min max xvy from to ymax max xvy from to ymin min xvy from to yoffset offset xvy from to yrange range Command Quick Reference Continued Command Manager Reference O 491 1D Commands SEA Model 300 1D Commands Synopsis cmd1d board command cmd1d board auto board 1D Board name board command Command to be sent integer Description Changes the command byte for the specified 1D board The board is the name defined in the M300 setup for the 1D card to be changed The possible values for the command is 0 255 although most of the time the values go from 0 3 This command is normally
53. 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function shifts the bits that comprise the value of A to the right by B bit positions For each bit position shifted the Least Significant Bit LSB right most bit is dropped off and a 0 is appended to the Most Significant Bit MSB left most bit This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations ShiftRight rent F101 I i F105 2 gt gt Math Function Reference 452 abs Absolute Value SEA Model 300 abs Absolute Value Synopsis B abs B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function returns a value or an array of values representing the absolute value of B The following formula summarizes the calculations fli IB i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Abs wn F101 IT 1 F105 abs Math Function Reference 453 acos Inverse Cosine SEA Model 300 acos Inverse Cosine Synopsis B acos iP B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note B must be in the range 1 1 or a domain error will occur Description This function computes the inverse cosine in the range 0 7 for the given elements in B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i acos B i for i 0 n 1 Result Type Space Diax Example Name Units Number Result Computations ArcCosine ad F302 F 5 F105
54. 20 Optional Temp 2 a 11 21 Optional Temp 3 a 12 22 Ambient Temp a 13 23 Laser Current a 14 24 Spare a 15 25 CIP Data SELECT Options Continued Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations CipData HoN F300 F 1 CipData Aq CipData Function Reference 227 SEA Model 300 CIPGSData CIPGS Data Access SEA Model 300 CIPGSData CIPGS Data Access Synopsis CIPGSData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for CIPGS data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 25 Description This function allows access to individual items of the CIPGS data block including house data The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different CIPGS data fields The function will returns the value of a user specified item from a CIPGS buffer Please check the CIPGS manual for further information To get the size spectrum for the CIPGS probe use OdSums 1D Sums Data fields with the notation a m indicate analog data where is its position in the analog data array Data Field SELECT Byte Count 0 Oversize Reject Count 1 DOF Reject Count 2 End Reject Count 3 Particle Counter 4 Seconds Milliseconds 5 Hours Minutes 6 Host Sync Counter 7 Reset Flag 8 a 0 10 all 11 a 2 12 a 3 13 a 4 14 CIPGS Data SELECT Options Function Reference O 228 CIPGSData CIPGS Data Access
55. 4 2 Math Function Reference O 443 Modulus SEA Model 300 Modulus Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function performs the modulus operation on A with respect to B The result is the remainder when A is divided by B This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations s i Remainder 5 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Mod teu F101 I 1 F105 2 Math Function Reference 444 Increment SEA Model 300 Increment Synopsis B B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function increments the last operand by one The following formula summarizes the calculations s i B i 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Ingo EN F101 I 25 F109 Math Function Reference 445 Decrement SEA Model 300 Decrement Synopsis B Bl r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function decrements the last operand by one The following formula summarizes the calculations s i B i 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Dec mn F101 I 25 F109 Math Function Reference O 446 ex Boolean AND SEA Model 300 amp Boolean AND Synopsis AB amp A m Next to l
56. Acquisition tag argument AO is no longer used It is still needed to maintain backward compatibility with the M200 Description This function converts the date time M300 buffer time into an ASCII string for display purposes The string is in the form of YY YY MM DD HH MM SS where YYYY is the year MM is the month DD is the days HH is the hours MM is the minutes and SS is the seconds Function will return a character array of size n containing the characters that make up the date and time string that was retrieved from the data The size of n is dependant on how many characters are required to represent that particular date and time Usually this size is 18 or 20 Result Type Space S n n 18 or 20 Example Name Units Number Result DateTime yee F1 S 20 Computations DateTime A0 Function Reference O 258 DayOfYear Day of Year SEA Model 300 DayOfYear Day of Year Synopsis DayOfYear A0 DayOfYear YEAR MONTH DAY AO Acquisition tag for date time data tag YEAR 1 Year integer MONTH Month integer DAY 1 Day integer Description This function is used to return day of year There are two formats used for this function If you specify a tag number the system uses the time from the buffer to compute day of year The other option to computing day of year is to pass YEAR MONTH and DAY as parameters to the function Result Type Space L 1 101 111 i 1 Example Name Units Num
57. Be Dac waka a a glance i Beats 256 ate Date See a ae pics le Ae cag AG 257 Date Timet Date Time String opti e AR AR e A a 258 Dayo fY ear Dato Er DS a 259 Pelay Delay ra o A DA a 260 Weta e A A A A a hae adh aes uatouri cant te 8 Sua E 261 DewPointToRH Dew Point to Relative Humidity 0 0 c ee eee eee ee 262 Dfault Default ate rin Bole Oe eon ee es ad ae BH e tc 263 DIndex Double Element Access oa oe qe ea add a OO 264 DirData Directory Diao Cah le ae ah a a 265 DO Divide enla e ld a eaa Di a ee aes 266 DF RO Doubleto Plot tia eo o tres 267 Fals Equal sacs tates End SA EAS EA Net oe DA oe eee 268 EsiQ Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Ice aos 244 cad s toed Sate esas es Se 269 Esw Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Water 0 2 eee eee eee 270 EvtStrO Event Stringa E ARs Paces A cara ad ahi esa RAIS 271 Evt Val Event Valle ns tcc A e that tot yet DAA 272 FalconData Falcon Data a a AAA a a o ogi HR 273 Falcon Day Falcon Day e edo 274 Falcon lume Falcon Tine ta ad e rs ad 275 FArray Float Array Element Access 2 3 7 awh tas acids tad aan wees Oamae a a widen os 276 Table of Contents iv M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 FIndex Float Blement Access s v 24 a A Sued chee OS E Ii EN 277 Gef Greater Than Equal a uiti snakes oats lt tt as 278 GetDatal Gee Data ails wr GA Shana Uiseice Does a e BRAN bers 279 ENREDO 280 Gres uit 21 GTI A IS A A See Ge Bt ORS 282 CH Gre
58. DASHED 0x00000400 BOTH 0x00001000 FIRST 0x00002000 LAST 0x00004000 LEFT 0x10000000 RIGHT 0x20000000 UP 0x40000000 Type Setup Table Reference O 630 SEA Model 300 Window Table Configuration File wnd SEA Model 300 Name Type DOWN 0x80000000 Type Continued SOLID DOTTED and DASHED are used to pick the grid line type and therefore either a horizontal or vertical line grid BOTH FIRST and LAST are used to pick the grid placement BOTH picks tick marks on the left and right sides or top and bottom FIRST picks tick marks on the right side or top LAST picks tick marks on the left side or bottom XGridMinor XGridMajor YGridMinor YGridMajor X axis and y axis minor and major grid frequency XLabel YLabel X axis and y axis grid label frequency XMinimum XMaximum YMinimum YMaximum Minimum and maximum limits for x axis and y axis XRange YRange Range value for x axis and y axis Color0 Color15 Each window has a 16 color pallet see also Color on page 528 Mode Determines the behavior of the X vs Y plot If mode is zero the X vs Y plot will be refreshed as normal If mode is one the plot history will remain on the screen any new data points will accumulate To perform a sounding mode must be set to one Example Text wnd Type type Trigger Triggerl Frequencyl Board1 Trigger2 Frequency2 Board2 Trigger Sync 1 Never Never Never None Area 499 5 58
59. Function Reference 351 PrData Probe Data SEA Model 300 PrData Probe Data Synopsis PrData PROBE SELECT PrData PROBE RANGE SELECT PROBE Probe from probe table probe SELECT 1 Probe field select integer 0 7 RANGE 1 Range for probe integer 0 15 Description This function is used to retrieve certain probe data from the probe channel files This data may be used during run time for computations or displays The user does not have to specify the range The range value is retrieved from the probe entry and the selector value determines which type of probe data will be returned See Probe Table prb 300 and See Probe Channel File prb SELECT Probe Data 0 min 1 max 2 middle 3 dD 4 dlogD 5 area 6 volume 7 Sample Area 8 Pixel Size SELECT Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry PROBE Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumSize A F105 F 15 PrData Pr Fssp 1 Function Reference O 352 ProbeData Probe Data SEA Model 300 ProbeData Probe Data Synopsis ProbeData PROBE RANGE SELECT PROBE Probe name from probe table probe RANGE 1 Probe range integer SELECT 1 Probe field select integer 0 7 A KFP Note Deprecated M300 Function replacement See PrData Probe Data Description This function is used to retrieve certain probe data from the probe channel files This data
60. Integration interval integer Description This function builds up an approximation of the 2D spectrum using the image data and the time slice mask These images are summed up using either the slice count or the slice width and normalized using the elapsed time value The output of the function is a sums array and may be processed like the sums array from 1D data The end of a particle is detected by finding one or more blank slices all ones OxFFFFFFFF In addition the upper byte ofthe MASK parameter 16 bit integer can be used to control the following options MODE Description XXXXXXX 1 XXXXXXXX Add zero area particles to first bin XXXXXXXOXXXXXXXX Don t add zero area particles to first bin XXXXXX 1XXXXXXXXX Use x dimension method across slice XXXXXX OXXXXXXXXX Use y dimension method TAS dependent MODE Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry PROBE Example Name Units Number Result Computations MoSums ner F100 F 64 MoSums Pr 2dc A100 0x100 1 0 Function Reference 331 Mul Multiply SEA Model 300 Mul Multiply Synopsis Mul A B A m Formula of an array of values 21 Bip Formula of an array of values p21 KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Multiply Description This function returns an array of values representing the multiplication of the two given arrays element by element This function uses interpolation See Inte
61. It also needs the secondary trigger to fire for the 2D Image for the 2dc board The secondary trigger in this case sets a maximum of 10 hz in other words a maximum of 10 buffers per second will be analyzed by the MoSums function Trigger 2D Image 1 2dc Never Never None 2DC Tas Factors F1002 1 1 Aq 2DCTasFactors q Setup Table Reference O 572 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 2DC Elapsed Time F1003 1 1 Aq 2DCElapsedTime 2DC Elapsed Tas F1004 1 1 Aq 2DCElapsedTas 2DC Elapsed Shadow Or F1005 i 1 Aq 2DCElapsedShadowOr 2DC Tas Mul Fac F1100 i 1 F1002 2DC Tas Div Fac F1101 i 1 F1002 16 gt gt 2DC Tas Clock In MHZ F1102 F 1 PrTasClockIn Aq 2DCTasFactors 2DC Elapsed Time s F1103 F 1 F1003 40000 2DC Elapsed Tas s F1104 F 1 F1004 100 F1102 1 0e 6 This block of formulas gets data from the 2D buffer for the slave events In this case we only need to set the primary trigger to fire at 1 hz for the 2D Image data type for the 2de board The secondary trigger is not necessary Y Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None Total Shadow Or F1006 i 1 Ag 2DCShadowOr House Data F1007 i 8 Aq 2DCHouseData Tas Clock Out MHZ F1110 F 1 PrTasClockOut Pr 2dc Fo TAS 2DC Tas Control F1111 D 1 Co2DTas Bd 2dc F1110 Example Version 1 m1 300 Setup Table Reference O 573 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Trigger Tri
62. It then uses the same index to return the corresponding value from the X array This function is typically used to return the smallest particle size found using the sizes data as the X array and the sums data as the Y array Mode 1 In this mode the function uses the Y array to search for the smallest value Then it returns the corresponding value from the X array Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations MinnimumSi ze me F300 F 1 MinSiz F100 F200 Function Reference O 327 MinTim Minimum Time SEA Model 300 MinTim Minimum Time Synopsis MinTim F STATE F 7 Formula of an array of values single value 121 STATE 1 State option variable integer 0 or 1 Description This function returns the time string for which the minimum value of a formula occurred The STATE variable is used to control the function operation If the STATE is zero the return value is unchanged If the state changes from zero to one rising edge the last time is cleared and a new minimum time is started If the STATE is one the time will change when the current value is a minimum The return string is in the form of HH MM SS HH is the hours MM is the minutes and SS is the seconds Result Type Space S 10 Example Name Units Number Result Computations MinimumTime aM F200 S 10 MinTim F100 F151 Function Reference O 328 MinValQ Minimum Value SEA Model 300 MinVal Minimum Value Synopsis MinVal
63. M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 CIPGSInfoO CIPGS Info Data Access a O ie chee OS AA A 230 A AAA A A AA 231 ColDEmdO Control 1D Command es hae eee baa Buk 232 Co2DTAS0 Control 2D TAS a2 p24 tue Ae ers eis ween GeO os ee ee ees 233 Co2GCmd0 Control 2D Grey Command a A Nas NS Se 234 Go2GTAS Control 2D Grey TAS A athe apo bees Meee beet 235 Gon TDAOI41 XO Control ATDAQ141X av kia Dd AA ew eA 236 CoCIPGSTASO Control CIPGS TAS cf bo ett ta ated le dt le 237 CoCIBFASO Control CIP TAS sirio da os 238 COCXDDAD Control CADDA di a a a dan DOS O a 239 CoDo Control Digital Outputg 24 esa a a A a e Ge tn 240 CoDT2817 0 Getto TIT DB dns 241 Cotile Control Flete ge bee heehee bu oe EG a OO 242 COLO Colore heen dk A A SR atte 243 Combl res Combine ATrays saas ae EWC er or ae nS oe We er ee 244 Concs Concentrations 2 0 cee eee eee eee eee eee e ene 245 CoPCIDACDAO Control PCIDAC DIA Voltages Mia e tak do 247 CoPMEDAO Control PMF D A Voltages 0022 cen edged a ei erase kee Aa a 248 Copy os Sao danas hepa aN rsh aaah a org es llr a Paral dha So pial Leela a 249 COQUEO Control iia A eee tata Ad 250 CoRTISO20 Control RT W028 a4 oo odie A di hea ee 251 CoseaDAO Control Sea Voltige cas epa tt 252 CoShutdown Control Shutdown 4 scc08 6 esac dede be ras 253 Count ay Count a A sare Raat nd AA Le aay a 254 CountEdges Count Edges lt 4 oe eee a AS awe bees eae ieee 255 Cumulative Cumulative cca acy aoc se a Ae pected asker
64. Name Units Number Result Computations PressurelAS ke F200 F 1 Plas F100 Function Reference O 341 Poly Polynomial SEA Model 300 Poly Polynomial Synopsis Poly X Ag Aj Aj X m Formula for X value m21 Adlp First order coefficient p21 Ajlr Second order coefficient 721 A Is nth order coefficient s gt 1 cP Note The Poly function can accept a variable number of parameters However the function needs at least 3 parameters to work correctly Specifically it needs the X parameter and at least two coefficient parameters as specified above For example Poly F100 F200 F300 Description This function is used to evaluate an mth order polynomial The function can only compute polynomials of the first or higher order The polynomial computations are done via factorization for better efficiency The following formula summarizes the computation 0 fl 5 AX Result Type Space D n n is based on interpolation of the number of elements for each parameter used in the function The interpolation is done on the size of each parameter used in the factorization process Example Name Units Number Result Computations RosTempTotal F300 F 15 Poly F2430 51 0738 20 64947 0 0637105 Function Reference O 342 PosAvData POSAV Data Access SEA Model 300 PosAvData POSAV Data Access Synopsis PosAvData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for POSAV data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data
65. Note that this opens the Main Window only If the current string is included in the command the M300 will be open in the current console with the same x and y offset KP Note That these commands affect the M300 Main Window only To control data displays See Display Window Commands Example F5 front F6 back Fl restore F11 minimize A F10 move FS open Command Manager Reference O 506 Main Window Commands SEA Model 300 F6 open current Y clear error Command Manager Reference O 507 Moving Air Mass Display Commands SEA Model 300 Moving Air Mass Display Commands Synopsis mam name set mam name max value mam name rings value name Moving Air Mass display name string action Action to be carried out string value Value argument integer Description set sets the center latitude and longitude values to be the current attitude and longitude values This essentially marks the moving air mass rings sets the number of rings to display on the Moving Air Mass display as specified by the value argument max this will set the maximum range of the Moving Air Mass display as specified by the value argument Example A Fl mam cloudPointer set A F2 mam cloudPointer rings 10 mam cloudPointer rings 5 Command Manager Reference O 508 Position Display Commands SEA Model 300 Position Display Commands Synopsis pos from to operation value pos from to clear all
66. O 307 LatStr Latitude String SEA Model 300 LatStr Latitude String Synopsis LatStr LATITUDE LATITUDE 1 Formula for latitude value in radians Description This function converts the latitude in radians value to an ASCII latitude string for display purposes The return string is in the form of N DD MM HH where N stands for north south DD stands for degrees MM stands for minutes and HH for fraction of minutes Result Type Space S 12 Example Name Units Number Result Computations LatString mA F300 S 12 LatStr F100 Function Reference O 308 Le Less Than Equal Le Less Than Equal Synopsis Le A B FTRUE FFALSE A 1 First value used in comparison B 1 Second value used in comparison FTRUE m Formula for true value m 1 FFALSE p Formula for false value p21 Description SEA Model 300 This function compares two values and it returns the value of true formula FTRUE if the first value A is less than or equal to the second value B otherwise the value of false formula FFALSE is returned This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation if A lt B then f i FTRUE i else fli FFALSE i Result Type Space D n if A lt B n m else n p Example Name Units Number Result Computations LessThanEqual ma F300 F 1 Le F100 F102 F200 Function Reference O 309 F100 Limit Limit Value SEA Model 300 Limit Limit Value Synopsis Limit F LOW HIGH
67. Off 0 6 2DGPDOF 0 580 180 60 18 F 1 F7141 cmd2g 2DGP 0x60 and 0 2DGPDOFMid 7 2DGPtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 Mid 1 6 2DGPDOF 1 580 205 60 18 F 1 F7141 cmd2g 2DGP 0x40 and cmd2g 2DGP 0x20 or 1 2DGPDOFMax 8 2DGPtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 Max 3 6 2DGPDOF 0 580 230 60 18 F 1 F7141 cmd2g 2DGP 0x60 or 3 00 U29 29 uoung 00 PPOW VAS Buffer Table buf 300 SEA Model 300 Buffer Table buf 300 Overview The Buffer table is used to configure the parameters for each buffer entry as well as the acquisition events that go with each buffer In the M200 system there was no buffer table This is a new concept to the M300 system In the M200 system the user specified the buffer number for each acquisition entry in the Acquisition table and System table In the M300 system the buffer table is used to specify which acquisition events belong to each buffer and the order of acquisition for all the events For synchronous buffers higher frequency events should must be placed first For asynchronous buffers the master event has to be first followed by the slave events The Buffer Table has two different types of entries the buffer entry and the acquisition event entry The first entry must be a buffer entry for buffer 0 followed by the synchronous acquisition events from the acquisition table The order of the events is the same order that will be used when acquiring the data A
68. PIRAQ 2 Interface PMF PMF Interface PMS1058B PMS 1058B Interface RTI802 RTI802 Interface SBUS SEA BUS Interface SEADA SEA D A Interface SERIAL SEA SERIAL Interface SERIALPORT Serial Port Board Types Continued Type Description SPP SPP SYSTEM SEA SYSTEM Interface VAX SEA VAX Interface BoardFile Board Types Continued File name of the board configuration file See Board Table Configuration File brd on page 545 Example Version 7 brd 300 type System Arinc429 Piraq Piraq Piraq Pirag2 CYDIO24 CYDIO24 ar boardFile System brd Arinc429 brd PiraqA brd PiraqB brd PiraqFwd brd Piraq2 brd Cydio_psi brd Cydio_temp brd hou uo ub bu db A i Setup Table Reference 544 Board Table Configuration File brd Board Table Configuration File brd Overview The user can have as many board configuration files as necessary Each file holds the configuration parameters for the specific board type as per the values specified in the M300 Board Setup Dialog Please check the M300 User s Guide Board Setup section Files The following examples list sample settings for the board configuration files Example 1D Address State NonAcgState Command 1D256 Address State NonAcgState Command Range Gain SizeChannels StrobeChannels SourceFrequency DivideFactor 2DGrey Address State NonAcgState DMA IRQ BitShift 2DMono Addres
69. Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 16 bit word is an unsigned integer counting the number times the shadow or when active Type Synchronous event Acquisition Reference O 54 Type 10 2D Mono Total Shadow OR SEA Model 300 Comments This is an synchronous acquisition and should be acquired at regular intervals This gives an approximate value to the number of particles that past through the probe The following equation shows how to arrive at shadow or concentration in number of particles per liter from raw shadow or counts number particles Number Particles Conc AAA TAS 4 s Sample Area SA mm Sample Volume SV m Sample Periad At 1 s SV m3 SA mm 0 001 Loy TAS 4 At 5 mm SV m 10 SA mm TAS 4 S SV D SV m 10 25 m3 SV D 10 10 SA mm TAS 2 S SV D 107 SA mm TAS E S Number Particles Number Particles Cone E s LA i Sy Number Particles Number Particles Cone KS qe mer l 10 SA mm TAS m s Acquisition Reference O 55 Type 11 2D Mono House Data SEA Model 300 Type 11 2D Mono House Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono house data counts from a 2D Mono adapter House data is an array of eight 16 bit words containing counts of a voltage
70. Prediction Synopsis Incloud STDEV STDEVTHRES SPOWER PPOWER POWERTHRES TIME STDEV Standard deviation for power float STDEVTHRES Standard deviation for power threshold float SPOWER Sense power float PPOWER J Predicted power float POWERTHRES Power threshold float TIME 7 Time in seconds integer Description This function is used for in cloud prediction from the WCM 2000 system Result Type Space D1 F 1 LEJ 10 101 411 Example 7 Namne Units Number Result Computations TWCIncloud WW F13204 I 1 Incloud F10110 F11046 F12035 F13102 1 1 30 Function Reference O 295 Ins429Bin INS 429 Data SEA Model 300 Ins429Bin INS 429 Data Synopsis Ins429Bin A BITS RANGE A Acquisition tag for INS 429 BIN data tag BITS 1 Number of bits to used from data integer 1 21 RANGE 1 Full scale range Description This function unpacks INS 429 BIN data RANGE fli A i 20 BITS PITS fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations INS429BIN wn F100 F 35 Ins429Bin A100 11 0 25 Function Reference O 296 InsBCD INS BCD Data SEA Model 300 InsBCD INS BCD Data Synopsis InsBcd A A Acquisition tag for INS BCD data tag Description This function unpacks INS BCD data and returns a normalized value between 1 0 and 1 0 Result Type Space D n n number of data sam
71. Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 199 Accumulate Accumulate Arrays SEA Model 300 Accumulate Accumulate Arrays Synopsis Accumulate A Al n Formula of an array of values to be accumulated n gt 2 Description The resulting array of values is explained via the following equation faz Apel fli fli 1 A i fori 0 n 1 Result Dia Example Name Units Number Result Computations Accumulate oyl F300 F 15 Accumulate F100 Function Reference O 200 A RF Add Add Arrays SEA Model 300 Add Add Arrays Synopsis Add A B A m Formula of an array of values m21 Bip Formula of an array of values p21 Note Deprecated M300 replacement function See Add Description This function returns an array of values representing the addition of the two given arrays element by element This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli Ali Bi fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Add nN F300 F 15 Add F200 F201 Function Reference O 201 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access SEA Model 300 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access Synopsis AIMMSData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for AIMMS ADP data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 23 Description This function allows access to individual items of the AIMMS ADP data b
72. STRINGCOUNT STRING String to be converted m21 string OFFSET 1 Byte offset into string to start conversion integer BASE 1 Base to convert value to integer 0 2 36 StrToUL 1 Number of characters to use integer 0 for auto length StrToUL 1 Number of samples integer Description This function takes a string of characters given by STRING and converts the string into it s unsigned long integer representation The function recognizes STRING containing an optional white space followed by an optional sign and a sequence of digits and letters alphanumeric For example the user may need to perform a computation on a value that is currently in a string form Prior to this computation the string must be converted into a real numerical data form for the CPU OFFSET is used to skip a certain number of characters in the string If OFFSET is not specified it is assumed to be zero If BASE is zero the first alphanumeric characters encountered in the string determine it s base If the first characters are Ox or OX the digits are treated as hexadecimal If the first character is o or O the digits are treated as octal otherwise the digits will be treated as decimal default If BASE is non zero it must be in the range 2 36 The letters a z and A Z represent the values 10 35 Only those letters whose designated values are less than BASE are permitted If the value of BASE is 16 the characters
73. Wash Gy Pitot Pressfrom TAS e er abba ajo a Cad co AS A 422 TEO A A a T IO 423 AI AAA a A E aa E a aE 424 Timer O Limen ti e dela ete telas 425 TTemp Total Air Temperature 3 4 coat a ee 426 Unfold Unfolding Doppler ob 427 Table of Contents vii M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Units Unit Conversions A A a Ai doped ii AS Wax lime VAX Times ei e a es a ta anh oa ee Steen bee VaxTimeDiff VAX Time Duberence ss xcs hs Da Vectorinele eV ectorAncles a 4 ix chai a oie oe e Ee e e AU Ga Vectoren Vector Lenta wee Gate ete toad Sue E4449 dy a OA ES Wels e ic 3 roo nate edb II addi nu geeed aa en Sots NOS OS e SGA RNa DADS arches RAIA RA Math Function Reference A ON EDI a e ol det Ea a RN de a a al ln AMO dile a 4 INCreMent A A o Decrement ica aan OTRA ac DO A Ea RA OA ad A 62 Boolean ANDE A AS Aes O ae ta eh Boolean OR aei eoe e aE A aa r OE E a E a E Ea a A Boolean Exclusive O Rio ore ent area e e eae Rs Boolean NO Ei EE ET EEO EEE a E EE res LAS hie befe RN RR gt gt Shift Right i carton dba pido deta absUs Absol te Valle a a e a He Aare ada acos Inverse Coses A dened ds 6 hls a acosh Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine besado lol bio te oa an tebe ee dea dz asin LN VERSE S LMC ies asd hs A OA a ad a a ea gmt a a A a TON asinh Inverse Hyperbolic Sine estonio te a atan s Inverse Tangent parar dt y aa ds E hoi a ae be atan2 Inverse Tangent determining quadrant 0 cece eee eee eens
74. a complete list of colors See Color System Board This parameter is the name of the board specified in the board table See Board Table brd 300 In the board table there is an entry for each board as well as a board type Each board is configured via the board configuration file See Board Table Configuration File brd This entry can have a maximum of 31 characters no spaces allowed Board entries in the formula table must be preceded by Bd to indicate a board entry For example if we have defined an arinc board in the board table and we want to use it in the formula table See Formula Table fml 300 then we have to use Bd arinc Board and Address can be used interchangeably as long as they are pointing to the same entity Probe A probe entry from the probe table See Probe Table prb 300 This entry can have a maximum of 31 characters no spaces allowed Probe entries in the formula table must be preceded by Pr to indicate a probe entry For example if we have defined a fssp probe entry in the probe table and we want to use it in the formula table See Formula Table fml 300 then we have to use Pr fssp Tag Acquisition event tag This identifies the data source Valid tag numbers are integers in the range of 0 to 65535 not including the reserved tag See Reserved Tag Numbers Address The address field is commonly used to identify a boar
75. air speed value INTERVAL 1 Summation interval integer Note If the RANGE is not specified it is passed via the probe entry argument PROBE Description This function converts the summed up channel counts and the probe definition table to compute volumes The result is typically used for mean median mode and total volume calculations as well as X vs Y display plots This function should be refreshed at the same time interval as the summation routine generates data so as to eliminate redundant calculations on the same input data The SAREA and VOLUME originate from the user specified channel files via the probe name number The BUFLIFE and SYSFREQ refer to the values entered in the system table The SYSFREQ is associated with the system frequency in the time data This comes from the frequency values in the system board entry The BUFLIFE is associated with the buffer life in the time data In the M300 system the buffer life and system frequency are the same For synchronous buffers The following formula summarizes the computations F i VOLUME i RANGE 1 _ _ _ 4 ee C oun BUFLIFE j INTERVAL CFA SAREA i RANGE TAS er INTERVAL CFAC fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dia n min m probe channels Example Name Units Number Result Computations Vols na F300 F 15 Vols F100 PO 1 F54 F102 1 Function Reference O 434 Volts Volts Volts 0
76. an array of values 320 MaxSiz Returns the maximum size 321 MaxTim Returns the time for the maximum value 322 MaxVal Returns the maximum value from a given period of time 323 Mean Calculates mean X value given X and Y arrays 324 Median Calculates median X value given X and Y arrays 325 Min Returns the minimum value from an array of values 326 MinSiz Returns the minimum size 327 MinTim Returns the time for the minimum value 328 MinVal Returns the minimum value from a given period of time 329 Mode Returns mode X value given X and Y arrays 330 MoSums 2D Mono Sums 331 Mul Returns the product of two arrays of formulas 332 Nmea NMEA Sentence Function 333 OdCmd 1D Command 335 OdIVar Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 336 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference 185 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page OdIVarAdv 1D Advanced Inverse velocity Accept Ratio 337 OdRef 1D Refference voltage 338 OdSums 1D Sums 339 PAIt Calculates pressure altitude 340 Plas Calculates pressure indicated airspeed 341 Poly Polynomial computation 342 PosAvData POSAV data access 343 Power Power x for arrays 345 PqConfig Piraq Config access 346 PqPower Compute Piraw Power 347 PgRange Compute Piraq Range 348 PqRaw Compute Piraq Raw Data 349 PqReflectivity C
77. are negative or zero a domain or range will occur respectively Description This function computes the logarithm base 10 of B s i logy Bi fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D 7 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Logarithm diii F11 F 1 F10 log Math Function Reference O 469 log2 Binary Logarithm SEA Model 300 log2 Binary Logarithm Synopsis B log2 B 7 Last operand n gt 1 K Note If any values in B are negative or zero a domain or range will occur respectively Description This function computes the logarithm base 2 of B s i log B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations BinaryLogarithm men F10 F 5 F9 log2 Math Function Reference O 470 lrotl Long Rotate Left SEA Model 300 lrotl Long Rotate Left Synopsis AB lrotl A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function rotates the number A by B bits to the left This function will handle long integer types 4 bytes and uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations LongRotateLeft oy F101 L 1 F105 4 lrotl Math Function Reference 471 lrotr Long Rotate Right SEA Model 300 lrotr Long Rotate Right Synopsis AB Irotr A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function r
78. asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The number of samples can be one or two One sample is always recorded at the end of the master acquisition A second sample may also be taken at the beginning of the master acquisition Comments None Acquisition Reference O 78 Type 29 2D Grey Probe Byte SEA Model 300 Type 29 2D Grey Probe Byte Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the command word sent out to the 2D Grey scale probe This command word can be useful in post processing to determine the mode the probe was in while taking data Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 Initial Command 0 OxFF 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 16 bit word is stored in low byte to high byte format with the first byte in memory being the lowest byte and the last byte in memory being the highest byte Type Synchronous event Comments This acquisition should be as a synchronous acquisition event and sampled at regular intervals It also can be used as an asynchronous acquisition event and stored in the Grey scale image buffer only the lower 8 bits are used by the 2D Grey probe Acquisition Reference O 79 Type 30 1D Counts SEA Model 300 Type 30 1D Counts Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the 1D spectral data from a 1D interface card This single slo
79. at the specified latitude and longitude The actual text to be displayed follows the latitude and longitude position The text can be placed in one of eight directions at a particular x and y offset xoff and yoff in pixels from the latitude latdeg and longitude longdeg point The font font used is eight pixel by default but it can be changed this parameter is optional If the text has spaces it must be enclosed inside double quotes for example sample text The maximum numbers of characters for the text is 15 characters The M300 supports two text commands The T is the new M300 command for text The font for the text is picked with the font command The t is the M200 command for text T latdeg latmin londeg lonmin xoff yoff text t latdeg latmin londeg lonmin text dir xoff yoff font Dir Direction for the text displayed 0 right to left e right to left 45 degrees up 2 up e3 left to right 45 degrees up e4 left to right eS left to right 45 degrees down 6 down Setup Table Reference O 605 Map File tgt SEA Model 300 7 right to left 45 degrees down Font The font name fontName used can be changed This must be a valid name for a Photon font Once the font is changed it stays in effect until a new font command is issued f fontName Parallels of Latitude Parallels of latitude on a target map can be drawn using a simple one line command The latitude lines will be placed on multi
80. converted into a real numerical data form for the CPU OFFSET is used to skip a certain number of characters in the string If OFFSET is not specified it is assumed to be zero If BASE is zero the first alphanumeric characters encountered in the string determine it s base If the first characters are Ox or OX the digits are treated as hexadecimal If the first character is o or O the digits are treated as octal otherwise the digits will be treated as decimal default If BASE is non zero it must be in the range 2 36 The letters a z and A Z represent the values 10 35 Only those letters whose designated values are less than BASE are permitted If the value of BASE is 16 the characters Ox or OX may optionally precede the sequence of letters and digits If BASE is not specified it is assumed to be 10 decimal The function returns the converted value If the value exceeds the usable range the maximum or minimum range value depending on the sign in the string is returned If BASE is out or range zero is returned Result Type Space L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations StringtoLong rn F100 L 1 StrToL F105 4 16 Function Reference O 405 StrToUL String to Unsigned Long Integer SEA Model 300 StrToUL String to Unsigned Long Integer Synopsis StrToUL STRING StrToUL STRING OFFSET StrToUL STRING OFFSET BASE StrToUL STRING OFFSET BASE STRINGLEN
81. counters and hashing feature In the case of 2D Grey advanced data one entire buffer is displayed per window This would typically mean several particles per window For regular 2D Grey data each M300 data buffer has only one particle The 2D Grey display will buffer the 2D Grey particles buffers into one larger buffer for the display The 2D Grey display will fit as many M300 buffers particles as it can per window or internal buffer When we have a slow data rate for 2D Grey data keep this in mind as to why it takes a little while before the data gets displayed Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the 2D Grey entry For example 2DGC see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 system If the user has multiple 2DG displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a 2DG display does also then a command set up to change the color of the 2DG display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the 2D Grey display table need to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the 2D Grey display will be done The type of the window must be 2D Grey display For example 2dgc see also Window on pag
82. entry This can be useful for necessary commands State The state variable is used to control when a data entry is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 Data for a data entry is always updated even when the display is not visible see also State on page 528 Frequency The data display frequency The data frequency should be set for an optimal value so that the data values are not displayed on top of each other Font The font used to display the data entry It is recommended that a fixed font be used to display data labels Otherwise we run into problems with erasing the previous data value Color The data display allows the user to pick whatever color he desires for the data entry see also Color on page 528 XOffset YOffset The x and y offset for the data entry display in pixels This can be used to offset the data entry of the flight track so as to maximize readability Formula Formula link for data to be shown see also Formula on page 528 Format The format for the data output see also Format on page 529 Marker Entry The marker entry can show different types of markers for a latitude and longitude pair There can zero one or many latitude and longitude pairs The marker formula indicates how many markers are Setup Table Reference 602 Target Position Display Table pos 300 SEA Model 300 passed each time this number will vary all the time Multiple marker entries per position
83. entry are possible Name The identifier for the marker entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique number to identify the marker entry This can be useful for necessary commands State The state variable is used to control when a marker entry is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 Marker entry is always updated even when the display is not visible see also State on page 528 Color The marker display allows the user to pick whatever color he desires for the data entry see also Color on page 528 Type The type of object that will be displayed Since the system can handle a large number of markers on three marker types are available Use 1 for a cross 2 for a point and 3 for a X maker type Entries The number of entries kept in memory for each marker entry If the number of entries is 0 then the marker entry has no memory latFormula lonFormula marFormula Formula link for latitude longitude and marker to be shown see also Formula on page 528 The marker formula type must be a long type Example Version 5 Map1 0 1 FlightTrack 57 111 4 80 80 1 1 oilsand tgt AircraftHdg1 10 1 0 red 0 1 1 1 F1338 F1339 F1318 F 1 F 1 OverallTrack1 20 1 1 green 1 1 1999 0 0166 F1338 F1339 F1318 F1351 F1352 NO 30 0 0 066 cour12b brown 10 10 F10364 3 1f NOy 31 0 0 066 cour12b brown 10 10 F10384 3 1f S02 32 0 0 066 cour12b brown 10 10 F10324 3 1f 93 33 0 0 0
84. formula format 7 name number window 0 x y EMB 1 2dg 0100 45 name number window 0 state font color colorFill horizontalAlign border margin x y wW h ERJ 0 2dg 0 1 courl6b OxFF OxFF left 0 0 10 20 50 20 name number window 1 x y formula format Time 8 analogtxt 1 280 45 FO 2s name number window 1 state font color fIll horAlgn border margin x y index formula format Date 9 2dgtxt 1 1 cour8 0x0 OxFF center L 4 280 70 0 F6304 2s name number window 1 state font color fIll horAlgn border margin x y w h index formula format Date 9 mvdsp 1 1 cour8 0x0 OxXFF center E 4 280 70 10 100 0 F6304 s Setup Table Reference O 589 List Table Ist 300 SEA Model 300 List Table Ist 300 Overview The List display allows for the rapid display of data in one cohesive line of display This data is displayed in the form of an output line which then repeats as new values are read from a file or acquired This display is similar to the ASCII output feature Instead of the data going to a file the data goes to a list widget This widget displays one line at a time New data is placed at the bottom There is a scroll bar to look back at data from a previous time Parameters Name The identifier for the List entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple List displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple List displays they can assign di
85. in Table Reference on page 611 Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry PROBE Example Name Units Number Result Computations Sizes remy F100 F 15 Sizes P0 F99 Function Reference O 380 Skip Skip SEA Model 300 Synopsis Skip VALUE SKIPTO VALUE 1 Conditional formula value integer SKIPTO 1 Formula the M300 will skip to Description This function is used to skip to a formula If VALUE is true nonzero the next formula executed will be the formula given in SKIPTO Note that if the formula does not exists SKIPTO the M300 will ignore this function Also the function only works within a trigger block In other words until the next trigger command If the formula is not found then all formulas are skipped until the next trigger or the end of the formula table It should be noted that the use of the skip function can increase the complexity level of the formula table Please use with care and only when needed The function will return VALUE upon completion Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Skip ve F100 I i Skip F201 F600 Function Reference O 381 Slope Return Slope of a Line SEA Model 300 Slope Return Slope of a Line Synopsis Slope KNOWNYS KNOWNXS STATE KNOWNYS n Known Y values KNOWNXS n Known X values STATE 1 Function control variable integer Description This function returns the slope of a linear regressio
86. in the formula value To set a column you set row to minus one and specify the values to set in the formula value Result Type Space Diz Example Name Units Number Result Computations LookupSet F200 F 10 LookupSet Lo Temp 1 4 F100 Function Reference 315 ErnPos Loran GPS Position SEA Model 300 LrnPos Loran GPS Position Synopsis LrnPos A A Acquisition tag for Loran GPS latitude or longitude data tag Description This function converts Loran GPS latitude or longitude raw data into radians This function upon completion returns an array of size 7 floating point values containing the Loran GPS latitude and longitude data in radians The size of 7 is the number of samples field from the directory referenced by A Acquisition tag name number Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations LoranPosition rad F300 F 15 LrnPos A100 Function Reference O 316 Lt Less Than Lt Less Than Synopsis Lt A B FTRUE FFALSE A 1 First value used in comparison B 1 Second value used in comparison FTRUE m Formula for true value m 1 FFALSE p Formula for false value p21 Description SEA Model 300 This function compares two values and it returns the value of true formula FTRUE if the first value is less than the second value or the value of false formula FFALSE otherwise This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation if
87. integer 0 23 Description This function allows access to individual items of the POSAV data block The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different POSAV data fields The function will returns the value of a user specified item from a POSAV buffer Please check the POSAV manual for further information Data Field SELECT Time 1 s 0 Time 2 s 1 Distance Tag a Time Type 3 Distance Type 4 Latitude deg 5 Longitude deg 6 Altitude m 7 North South Velocity m s 8 East West Velocity m s 9 Up Down Velocity m s 10 Roll deg 11 Pitch deg 12 Heading deg 13 Wander Angle deg 14 Track Angle deg 15 POSAV Data Select Function Reference O 343 PosAvData POSAV Data Access SEA Model 300 Data Field SELECT Speed m s 16 Angular Rate Long deg s 17 Angular Rate Trans deg s 18 Angular Rate Down deg s 19 Long Acceleration deg s s 20 Trans Acceleration deg s s 21 Down Acceleration deg s s 22 Status 23 POSAV Data Select Result Type Space FJ Example Name Units Number Result Computations NVelocity m s F1008 F 1 PosAvData Aq PosPrimary 8 Function Reference 344 Power Power SEA Model 300 Power Power Synopsis Power A B Al m Formula of an array of BASE numbers m gt 0 Bip Formula of an array of exponents p gt 0 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function
88. is found Name Type Point 0 Line 1 Bullet 2 Line with bullet 3 Type Setup Table Reference 581 High Speed Analog Display Table hsa 300 SEA Model 300 Width Line width for the High Speed Analog entry This is normally 1 pixel wide Larger value for line width will require more drawing and slow down the display You should keep this in mind when changing the line width Decimate The decimate is used to control the number of data points to be displayed from the data source A value of one selects every data point A value of five selects every fifth data point A value of n selects every n data point Formula Data source for High Speed Analog display see also Formula on page 528 YMin YMax The minimum and maximum values for the y axis Example Version 2 hsa 300 name number window color type width decimate formula minimum maximum Analog 00 0 hsa 0OxFF0000 1 1 1 F100 10 10 Analog 01 1 hsa 0x00A000 1 1 1 F101 10 10 Analog 02 2 hsa 0x0000FF I 1 1 F102 10 10 Analog 03 3 hsa OxFFOOFF i 1 1 F103 1 0 10 Setup Table Reference 582 Height Time Indicator Display Table hti 300 SEA Model 300 Height Time Indicator Display Table hti 300 Overview The Height Time Indicator display is used to show Reflectivity or Doppler versus Altitude This display support two beams form the current Altitude This way it can display one beam in the up position a and one beam in
89. is used to communicate with the SPP CDP Probe by sending the necessary setup and data request commands Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 1D Interface 0 7 2 Command 0 OxF 3 Parameters Data Size The data size varies with the number of channels acquired The following table shows the appropriate number of bytes to specify for the different number of channels supported In addition the table also show the maximum theoretical sampling rate as well as the maximum suggested sampling rate Channels Bytes Sample Bytes Sample Bytes Sample SPP100 SPP300 CDP SPP200 CDPPBP 19 76 74 1106 20 116 114 1146 30 156 154 1186 40 196 194 1226 Data Size Acquisition Reference O 147 Type 75 SPP CDP Data SEA Model 300 Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary data retrieved by the SPP CDP Probe check the Probe manual Use the SpData function to retrieve individual data elements from the SPP CDP data block Type Synchronous event Comments To determine the maximum allowed sample frequency take the baud rate and divide it by 10 Then divide that by the data size Your sample frequency has to be less that value Acquisition Reference O 148 Type 76 CAS Serial Data SEA Model 300 Type 76 CAS Serial Data Description This acquisition type acquires all the binary serial data from the Cloud Aerosol Spectrometer CAS probe The SEA CAPS Inter
90. is used to retrieve specific data values from a block of integer data This function can be used in a data block from either the serial integer data type or the DRV11 data type Make sure that parameter one in the acquisition table for these types indicates the appropriate integer type 16 bit or 32 bit integer and data swap options Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SerialInteger ne F100 I 5 SerialInteger A100 10 5 Function Reference O 377 Serial VAXO Serial VAX SEA Model 300 Serial VAX Serial VAX Synopsis Serial VAX A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for SerialVax data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Note Deprecated M300 Function replacement See Sr VAX Serial VAX Description This function is used to retrieve specific IEEE data values from a block of VAX float data The data stored is unchanged however the data displayed is swapped and the exponent is decremented by two in order to obtain the desired value Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SerialVAX rent F100 F 5 SerialVax A100 10 5 Function Reference O 378 Set Set SEA Model 300 Set Set Synopsis Set INIT Set INIT INC Set INIT INC COUNT INIT 1 Initialization value INC 1 Increment value to add to previous value COUNT 1 Numb
91. label port 63 Type 17 INS Synchro synchro 65 Type 18 CAMAC INS ARINC Serial slot label 66 Type 19 CAMAC INS Synchro slot synchro 67 Type 20 2D Grey Image interface factors rearm 68 Type 21 2D Grey TAS Factors interface 71 Type 22 2D Grey Elapsed Time interface 72 Type 23 2D Grey Elapsed TAS 256 interface 73 Acquisition Reference Acquisition Reference O 37 Acquisition Reference SEA Model 300 Type Description Parameter Parameter2 Parameter3 Page Type 24 2D Grey Minimum Count interface 74 Type 25 2D Grey Middle Count interface Eye Type 26 2D Grey Maximum Count interface 76 Type 27 2D Grey OR Slice interface dma 77 Type 28 2D Grey Shadow Slice Count interface 78 Type 29 2D Grey Probe Byte interface command 79 Type 30 1D Counts interface command 80 Type 31 Hail Spectrometer counters counters 82 Type 32 Hail Events 84 Type 33 Analog STB TC Analog channel mode gain 86 Type 34 Digital Input port 88 Type 35 SEA Analog to Digital Input id channel gain 89 Type 36 SEA 24 Counter 91 Type 37 Serial ASCII Data block throttle 92 Type 38 Serial IEEE Data swap throttle 94 Type 39 Serial Integer Data data type throttle 96 Type 40 Sonic Wind System trigger control port 98 Type 41 Falcon Data mode divider throttle 101 Type 42 INS Accelerometer counter polarity reset 103 Type 43 1D256 Cou
92. may be used during run time for computations or displays The RANGE value is used to index which channel values will be used The SELECT parameter determines which type of probe data will be returned as seen in the table below SELECT Probe Data 0 min 1 max 2 middle 3 dD 4 dlogD 5 6 7 area volume Sample Area Table 8 SELECT Result Type Space D m n number of channels in Probe entry PROBE Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumSize non F105 F 15 ProbeData 100 0 1 Function Reference O 353 PromoBins Promo Bins SEA Model 300 PromoBins Promo Bins Synopsis PromoBins AMP TTIME AMPBINS POINTS TTIMEMIN TTIMEMAX PromoBins TTIME TTIMEBINS POINTS TTIMEMIN TTIMEMAX AMP POINTS Amplitude data float TTIME POINTS Transit Time data float AMPBINS n Amplitude bin data float TTIMEBINS n Transit Time bin data float POINTS 1 Data points integer TTIMEMIN 1 Transit Time Minimum float TTIMEMAX 1 Transit Time Maximum float Description This function can be used to compute the number of samples by bins for amplitude AMP and transit time I TIME The POINTS are the total number of data samples from the Promo2000 data see PromoData function Result Type Space D n n number of bins for amplitude D m m number of bins for transit time Example Name Units Number Result Computations AmpCounts F1000 F
93. output will occur The following table shows typical format syntaxes with their appropriate data type usage Syntax Description Formula Result Conversion Result s String s 5 SS Hello d Decimal base 10 1 11 100 25d 00100 x X Hexadecimal base 16 I 1 254 02x 02X fe FE f Float single precision F 1 120 322 3 2f 120 32 g Float double precision D 1 210 119191 3 59 210 11919 Format Syntax Example Version 2 fwa 300 name number window index formula format TAS m s 0 fwa0 1 F1 Mach 1 fwal 1 F9 PressureTrans0 2 fwal 1 F110 34 1f PressureTrans2 2 fwa2 1 F111 Time 3 fwa3 1 FO Setup Table Reference O 576 Histogram Display Table his 300 SEA Model 300 Histogram Display Table his 300 Overview A histogram is a bar graph that shows how many data values fall into a certain interval The width of the bar represents the interval while the height indicates the number of data items in that interval The total sum of the data items for the given frequency is represented by the area bar The accumulated sum of the data items is represented by the line bar The area bar is updated at the specified frequency A new area bar is not available until the next frequency cycle has expired The line bar is usually updated every second The line bar reset after the frequency expires and a new area bar is generated The X and Y limits are user specified The user ca
94. recorded Data Size This routine acquires the 4096 byte image block of the 2D Mono probe Each image contains 1024 32 bit slices Allocate 4096 bytes for this acquisition Data Format We keep the native data format from the instrument Slices are 32 bits wide and first bit of each slice is stored in the lowest bit of a four byte slice while the last bit is stored in the highest bit of a four byte slice Type Asynchronous Master event Comments The first bit out of the 2D Mono probe is termed the most significant This acquisition stores this bit as the lowest with each sequential bit being stored one bit higher The bit shift rate should not be confused with the image strobe clock The bit shift rate is the rate at which data is shifted out of the probe into the data system It is constant and is set by the upper nibble of parameter two The strobe clock controls the rate at which image slices are shifted into the probe It varies with true air speed and pixel size The strobe clock is set by the control function Co2DTAS The maximum rate that can be used for the bit shift clock depends on the length of the cable between the probe and the data system A 1 MHz divide factor 4 should be adequate for the majority of installations where the cable length is less than 50 feet If longer cables are used the user should try slower rates The most common symptoms of a too high a bit shift rate are image jitter or missing pixels Acquis
95. representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments There are probes for which the total strobes are internally divided by ten In these cases the total strobes data must be corrected in the data system multiply total strobes by ten The actual total strobes should always be greater than or equal to the total counts Acquisition Reference O 113 Type 51 1D256 Total Counts SEA Model 300 Type 51 1D256 Total Counts Description This acquisition type records 1D probe total count data Total count data is recorded in a 32 bit counter Total count data is the sum of all normal strobes received It should be equal to the total of all size channels from 0 to the maximum specified for the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to four bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 32 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments Total counts represents the total valid particles that the probe could size The total counts should be equal to the sum of all counts from all channels also known as total valid counts Acquisition Reference O 114 Type 52 SDSMT HVPS Image Data SEA Model 300 Type 52 SDSMT HVPS Image Data Description This acquisition type acquires image data from the SDSMT High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer via the HVPS interfa
96. system power up before the M300 runs The data delimiter is configured via the format parameter or a another ASCII entry The termination of each line is user configurable The user can choose which line termination characters to use and where to place them Most often there is an entry in the formula table for carriage return and line feed and then one or more ASCII entries to control line termination The recording of ASCII data files can be turned on off with the recording of the main binary data file link to file properties The ASCII files cannot be used by the M300 system for data playback In order to output create the ASCII data files one must have the raw M300 binary data file The ASCII File Output asc 300 can have a Trigger entry to change the current trigger See Trigger on page 19 The default trigger is one second synchronous buffer The maximum number of characters per line is 8192 The M300 will give the user an error message if this maximum has been reached Special care needs to be given to the first tittle line If a formula with an array of values is output then each title string is output with an index Minimizing the number of character in the name field will help reduce the final line size Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the ASCII entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple ASCII outputs can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300
97. tables Ultimately the M300 will be refined to the point where the setup tables will be completely transparent and there will be no requirement for the user to know about them The setup tables in this reference are described in detail so that a user can configure the system to do exactly what they require There are a couple of important points to remember whenever changing or creating setup tables The setup tables require a strong degree of syntactical correctness but the M300 does not have extensive syntax or error checking because these tables are designed to implement a wide variety of system configurations designed by the user If you are changing your setup tables you should back them up to another place to ensure that you can always go back to the original project Backup individual project files before modifying them For example if you want to make changes to the txt 300 file first make a backup of this file say txt 300 bak Then you can modify the txt 300 file If the changes you made look good you can keep the file If the changes caused unde sired effects or trouble with the normal system operation you can always go back to the last good known file Keep in mind that most features can be easily and quickly added by copying from other project or even copying from the same project Most M300 setup tables will end with the 300 file extension We keep a current set of template tables in the test tables directory of the M30
98. tag SLICETAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey slice count data tag ELAPSEDTAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey elapsed time data tag MINTAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey minimum shadow data tag MIDTAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey middle shadow data tag MAXTAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey maximum shadow data tag MODE 1 Sizing mode value integer PROBE Probe name number probe INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer STATE 1 Function control variable integer YSIZE 1 Pixel dimension Note Deprecated M300 function replacement See GrSums 2D Grey Sums Description This function builds up an approximation of the 2D Grey spectrum using the X and Y dimensions and elapsed time of the 2D Grey scaled images These images are summed up and normalized using the elapsed time value The output of the function is a sums array and may be processed like the sums array from 1D and 2D data MODE low nibble Description 0 X Y 2 1 X TAS independent 2 Y TAS dependant 3 Area no edge reject 4 Area use edge reject 5 X particle reject Table 13 MODE Function Reference O 412 Sums2G 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 MODE low nibble Description 6 Y particle reject 7 X Y 2 Use edge reject Table 13 MODE Continued The user may select different sizing modes for the function by providing different values for the MODE parameter The following
99. that command and subsequently store it into the acquisition data for later playback Note that any string entered will be stored including invalid commands This allows the user to enter comments during an acquisition run Note also that the command acquisition only works for acquisition mode and is not supported by the playback or UDP modes Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size varies depending on the length of the command Commands are terminated with one or two zeroes depending on which number makes the length even Data Format ASCII data terminated by zeroes C style Type Asynchronous event Not used in the acquisition table Comments This acquisition type describes the command data format This cannot be used in the acquisition table To turn command storage on or off turn the command buffer buffer 251 on or off respectively Acquisition Reference O 174 Type 252 Error Data SEA Model 300 Type 252 Error Data Description This acquisition type is reserved for storing error information messages into the acquired data Once the error occurs the M300 will sequence the error information into the data being acquired at the time For most errors M300 generates an error message Certain errors might have a high frequency of occurrence and the system keeps an error count and will generate that error message only once per second If there are error messages the
100. the auto name feature Example Version 1 prj 300 ProjectName Experiment FlightId APEO3 AircraftType Boeing 707 AircraftId OperatorName Operator Comments None DataPrefix hur Setup Table Reference O 613 Radar Table rdr 300 SEA Model 300 Radar Table rdr 300 Overview The Radar Table is used to define parameters for different Radar entries The Radar data is then usable in the Formula Table fml 300 and possibly other tables For example the RaConstant function needs to have a Radar entry specified The Radar table also defines color schemes used with the Radar entries Parameters Version Shows which version of the M300 this setup table was created by Radar Name Number Frequency TransmitPower NoisePower NoiseFigure ReceiverGain Saturation Power AntennaGain HorizontalBeam Width VerticalBeam Width TransmitPulseWidth ScanRate PulseRate ColorSheme Name Number ANoiseLevel BNoiseLevel AMinimumRange BMinimumRange AMaximumRange BMaximumRange Range Level 1 16 Color State Minimum Maximum Setup Table Reference 614 Radar Table rdr 300 Example Version 1 rdr 300 RadarCPR Name CPR Number 0 Frequency 3 486e 010 TransmitPower 8000 NoisePower 2 5 NoiseFigure Tab ReceiverGain 45 SaturationPower 11 AntennaGain 50 HorizontalBeamWidth 4 6 VerticalBeamWidth 0 5 TransmitPulseWidth 1 1e 007 ScanRate 28 PulseRate 118 5 ColorSchemeAugie Name Aug
101. the down position b or left right if so desired If used on the ground then we can use the beam in the up position a and set the altitude to zero or provide no altitude The minimum and maximum altitudes are stored in the YMinimum and YMaximum fields for the window configuration file Parameters Name The identifier for the Height Time Indicator entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple HTI displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a HTI display does also then a command set up to change the color of the HTI display will not affect the HVPS display Window Link to window where Height Time Indicator display will be performed This must be a window with a Height Time Indicator window type see also Window on page 527 Scheme Name of the Radar Scheme to use This is a link to the Scheme name from the Radar Table See Radar Table rdr 300 on page 614 aPowerFormula aRefFormula aRangeFormula Data sources for beam in the up direction This includes Power Reflectivity and angle see also Formula on page 528 bPowerFormula bRefFormula bRangeFormula Data sources for beam in the down d
102. to acquire one byte of digital data from the digital inputloutput card This works with the DT2817 CYPDISO CYDIO24 PCIDAC PMF and ATDAQ141X Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Input Port 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 8 bit byte Two bytes of data should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data format represents the state of the digital input port The state is usually 1 for on and 0 for off Most of the boards have 8 input lines represented by the corresponding bits in the data word The majority of the board use only the lower byte leaving the upper byte at 0 In the case of the PMF board it uses all 16 bits since the board has 16 digital lines Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 88 Type 35 SEA Analog to Digital Input SEA Model 300 Type 35 SEA Analog to Digital Input Description This acquisition type is used to acquire two bytes of data from the sea analog to digital input board The PMF PowerDAQ Multi Function board can also be used with this acquisition event leave box id parameter set to 0 In differential input mode the PMF board uses channels 0 7 16 23 32 39 and 48 55 Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Box ID 0 255 2 Channel 0 63 3 Gain 0 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires two 8 bit bytes Two bytes of data should be allocated for each sample Data Format
103. use the Data No Units and Table No Units entry types Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the Text entry For example Temperature see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple Text displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Text displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Text display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Text display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the Text display table needs to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the text display will be done The type of the window must be Text window For example txt see also Window on page 527 Type The type of the text entry There several types of text entries see table bellow Different text entry types are provided to facilitate the textual display process The Label entry is used to place any kind of text on the window The Data entry is used to place a textual data value representing the current value of a particular formula The Table entry is basically the same as the Data entry It has the added capability of displaying all the elements of
104. visible but active 0 see also State on page 528 Group X vs Y entries can be placed in groups This field is a string with the X vs Y group name When running the M300 the user can easily select different groups of X vs Y entries for display Entries The number of entries kept in memory for each X Y pair If the number of entries is 0 then the X vs Y plot has no memory xFormula yFormula Data sources for X vs Y plot The x data source will be used to pick a point along the x axis while the y data source will be used to pick a point along the y axis xMin xMax These specifies the minimum and maximum limits for the x axis yMin yMax These specifies the minimum and maximum limits for the y axis Example Version 3 i Xvy 300 Name Number Window Color Type Width State Group Entries xFml yFml xMin xMax yMin yMax Amb RHz 0 mainxvy Red 1 1 1 neag 0 F3402 F3417 0 100 0 20000 Dewpoint 1 mainxvy Green 1 1 1 dii 0 F3409 F3417 30 20 0 20000 Setup Table Reference O 634
105. wnd 2 3 minimize F3 wnd prev F4 wnd next Command Manager Reference O 518 X vs Y Display Commands SEA Model 300 X vs Y Display Commands Synopsis xvy from to onloff xvy from to color xvy from to clear xvy group name group xvy from to xbase base xvy from to xlim minimum maximum xvy from to xmax maximum xvy from to xmin minimum xvy from to xoffset offset xvy from to xrange range xvy from to ybase base xvy from to ylim minimum maximum xvy from to ymax maximum xvy from to ymin minimum xvy from to yoffset offset xvy from to yrange range from First X vs Y entry to perform operation on to Last X vs Y entry to perform operation on optional color Color to changes X vs Y entry to string group name Group name string minimum Minimum to changes X vs Y entry to float maximum Maximum to changes X vs Y entry to float range Range to changes X vs Y entry to float base Base to changes X vs Y entry to float offset Offset to changes X vs Y entry to float Description This command performs various operations on the M300 X vs Y display The M300 will perform the operation on all of the X vs Y displays in the entry list that lie between and including from and to on off turns the X vs Y entries to the on or off state respectively color changes the color of the X vs Y entries based on the color string passed See Color System
106. your probe SELECT SPP 100 Data Item 0 7 Analog channels 0 7 raw counts 0x80 0x87 Analog channels 0 7 volts 8 Reject depth of field 9 Reject average transit 10 Average transit 11 FIFO Full 12 Reset Flag 13 ADC Overflow 14 Samples 15 Sync Error A 16 Sync Error B 17 Sync Error C 18 Time of First Detected Particle SELECT Function Reference O 383 SpData SPP CDP Data SEA Model 300 SELECT SPP100 Data Item 19 ADC Counts 20 Timing 21 Inter Particle Time IPT SELECT For a description of these data items check the SPP CDP manual The house keeping data analog channels varies form probe to probe The best source for information on these is again the probe manual Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry Example Name Units Number Result Computations AverageTransit F100 F 10 SPData A100 10 Function Reference O 384 SPP100Data SPP100 Data Retrieve SEA Model 300 SPP100Data SPP100 Data Retrieve Synopsis SPP100Data A SELECT A Acquisition tag for SPP100 data tag SELECT 1 Data select integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See SpData SPP CDP Data Description This function is used to retrieve all samples for the selected data item from the SPP100 data structure Only one data item may be returned at a time into a particular formula number Specify the number of desired sa
107. 0 0x00 Arinc429 0 Roll 1005 1 1 4 16 OxD5 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 Altitude 1006 1 T 4 T6 OxF1 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 FwdAntAz 1500 2 Bl 4 16 0x00 0x01 0x00 Arinc429 0 FwdAntTilt 1501 2 1 4 16 0x01 0x01 0x00 Arinc429 0 T and Q A 2000 1 1 2400 100 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiraqgA 0 Config A 2001 2 1 324 101 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiraqA 0 Status A 2002 2 1 76 102 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiragA 0 T and Q B 3000 1 1 2400 100 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiragqB 0 Config B 3001 2 1 324 101 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiraqB 0 Status B 3002 2 1 76 102 0x00 0x00 0x00 PiragB 0 Setup Table Reference O 537 ASCII Output Table asc 300 SEA Model 300 ASCII Output Table asc 300 Overview This table can be used to create ASCII text data files from the data system during real time and or playback from a raw binary file The text files can be used in another system to run data analysis software There must be some formulas defined in the formula table so that we can output the data from these output source The ASCII file output can be configured to output to the printer or serial port To output to the printer port the user must specify the printer port name for example dev par1 To output to the serial port the user must specify the serial port name for example dev ser1 The serial port parameters can be controlled via a serial port entry in the board table The stty command can also be used to configure the serial port parameters This needs to be done at least once per
108. 0 system These tables are ASCII text tables that can be viewed with any basic editor In addition to the template tables mentioned above we also keep several other different project setups under the test directory These can be used to test the instruments and interface cards These projects are simple and can be used standalone without the complexity of larger research project setups Another benefit for these projects is that they can also be used as a starting point to add a particular instrument to the an existing M300 project For example check the test seaadc to see a project which shows all the analog voltages from the SEA Analog System or the test 1d0 project to see a project which shows bin counts reference voltage and other variables from a 1D type probe WARNING After making changes to the tables the user must always test for correctness in the data displays The following is a list of the setup tables used by the M300 File Name Config File Other Files Setup Table Page 2dg 300 n a n a 2D Grey Particle Display Table 531 2dm 300 n a n a 2D Mono Particle Display Table 533 acq 300 n a n a Acquisition Event Table 535 M300 Setup Tables Setup Table Reference O 523 Setup Table Reference SEA Model 300 File Name Config File Other Files Setup Table Page asc 300 asc csv Ascii text File Output Table 538
109. 00 system appends a wnd to this name to lookup the specific window configuration file The filename should not contain any spaces in fact it s recommended to use only letter and numbers Number An integer identifying the window to the M300 This is needed in order to identify windows during command manager operations For instance if a command is set up to alter the display of a strip chart an integer is used to identify all strip chart displays to be updated by that command Type This parameter is used to specify the window type There are several different kinds of window displays supported under the M300 system The M300 has some new displays which didn t exist in the M200 system This include the Skew T display and displays for Radar data Height Time Indicator and Plan Position Indicator Type Window Table 0 2D Grey 2dg 300 1 2D Mono 2dm 300 2 Height Time Indicator hti 300 Window Types Setup Table Reference O 626 Window Table wnd 300 SEA Model 300 Type Window Table 3 High Speed Analog hsa 300 4 Histogram his 300 5 HVPS hvp 300 6 Moving Position Indicator mpi 300 7 Multi Text mlt 300 8 Plan Position Indicator ppi 300 9 Position pos 300 10 Probe Distribution pdi 300 11 Strip Chart stp 300 12 String str 3001 13 Text txt 300 14 Time vs Y tvy 300 15 Vector vec 300 16 X vs Y xvy 300 17 Cloud Imaging Prob
110. 01 CAS INT 2 wnd24 Ox0000FF OxFF0000 0 2 F1002 CIP 2 wnd25 OXOOOOFF OxFF0000 0 2 F2000 Setup Table Reference 578 Hodograph Display Table hod 300 SEA Model 300 Hodograph Display Table hod 300 Overview The Hodograph shows wind speed and direction as a function of height over time Parameters Name The identifier for the Hodograph entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Hodograph displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Hodograph display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Hodograph display will not affect the HVPS display Window The window where the Hodograph display will be performed This must be a Hodograph type window see also Window on page 527 Color The color for the Hodograph display see also Color on page 528 Rings The number of rings to be displayed in the Hodograph display Range The speed limit value Entries Total number of display entries points to keep in memory AltFormula SpdFormula DirFormula Data sources for altitude wind speed knots and wind direction radians see also Formula on page 528 Setup T
111. 03 F 1 F1003 40000 2DC Elapsed Tas ist F1104 F 1 F1004 100 F1102 1 0e 6 This block of formulas gets data from the 2D buffer for the slave events In this case we only need to set the primary trigger to fire at 1 Hz for the 2D Image data type for the 2de board The secondary trigger is not necessary Low speed 1Hz trigger Trigger Sync20 1 None Never Ignore None Heading Heading deg F2000 F 20 A2000 0 00549316 Heading deg F2001 F 20 F2000 360 Heading deg F2000 F 20 Lt F2000 0 F2001 F2000 Heading rad F2002 F 20 Units F2000 rad deg This is an example of a 1 Hz trigger for a sync buffer with a trigger life of 20 No secondary trigger High speed 20Hz trigger Trigger Syncl 20 None Never Ignore None Time T O S 12 Time A0 Date UL S 14 Date A0 GPS SysTimeSel F23 I 1 F23 1 GPS SysTimeSel F23 I 1 Limit F23 0 100 XmitParamTime F5405 S 9 Le F23 50 F5105 FO XmitParamDate F5406 S 14 Le F23 50 F5106 F1 The example shows a 20 Hz trigger for the fast sync buffer with a trigger life of 1 No secondary trigger Skewt data for drop 1 Trigger Serial ASCII 100 blueheatseriall F5401 Never Ignore None 7 AirPress mb F8105 F 1 Ge F6105 9998 F8105 F6105 M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 28 Trigger SEA Model 300 AirTemp non F8106 F 1 Ge F6106 98 F8106 F6106 RH ng F8107 F 1 Ge F6107 998 F8107 F610
112. 1 Board frequency in MHz Description Control CIPGS TAS This control function computes and updates the frequency used by digital frequency space generator on the CIPGS interface this control is necessary to keep the CIPGS images from being distorted This frequency generates the TAS clock that strobes the CIPGS data Upon successful completion this function returns the board frequency specified in the function otherwise it will return zero Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations CIPGSProbeTAS MHz F101 F 1 CoCIPGSTAS Bd cipgs 0 800 Function Reference O 237 CoCIPTAS Control CIP TAS SEA Model 300 CoCIPTAS Control CIP TAS Synopsis CoCIPTAS BOARD FREQUENCY BOARD Board name for CIP Interface board FREQUENCY 1 Board frequency in MHz Description Control CIP TAS This control function computes and updates the frequency used by digital frequency space generator on the CIP interface this control is necessary to keep the CIP images from being distorted This frequency generates the TAS clock that strobes the CIP data Upon successful completion this function returns the board frequency specified in the function otherwise it will return zero Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations CIPProbeTAS MHz F101 F i CoCIPTAS Bd cip 0 800 Function Reference O 238 CoCYDDA Control CVDDA SEA Model 300 CoCYDDA Control CYDDA Synopsis CoCYDD
113. 5 Ins429Bin Fxtracts INS 429 BIN data 296 InsBCD INS BCD data to 1 1 297 InsBin INS BIN data to 1 1 298 InsBin2 P3 INS BIN data to 1 1 299 InsPos Converts INS BCD lattitude and longitude to radians 300 IntegerData Gets integer data 301 Intercept Calculates the point at which a line intersects the y axis 302 RO In Range check 303 IVar1DO Calculates inverse velocity acceptance ratio 1D 304 Ivar1 DAdv Calculates inverse velocity acceptance ratio 1D advanced 305 KeylIndex Manages a sorted array of values 306 LArray Extracts data from an long integer 4 bytes type array 307 LatStr Creates a string containing latitude 308 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference O 184 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page Le Boolean comparison for less than or equal to 309 Limit Limit data value 310 LIndex Extracts data from a long type array 311 LonStr Creates a string containing longittude 312 Lookup Returns the lookup interpolation value 313 LookupGet Get values from lookup entry 314 LookupSet Set values from lookup entry 313 LrnPos Converts LORAN GPS latitude and longitiude to radians 316 Lt Boolean comparison for less than 317 LIoF Converts long integer data to float type 318 Masses Compute masses 319 Max Finds the maximum value from
114. 51 PromoBins F20100 F20101 F20010 F20102 O 100 Function Reference 354 PromoData Promo Data SEA Model 300 PromoData Promo Data Synopsis PromoData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for promo data tag SELECT 1 Promo data field select integer 0 2 Description This function is used to get the Promo2000 data from the recorded data tag A The following table shows the valid SELECT values for the Promo2000 data SELECT Name Result 0 Amplitude p gt data points 1 Transit Time p gt data points 2 Data Points 1 Table 9 SELECT Result Type Space D z F n L n l n I n iln 2 see select table above Example Name Units Number Result Computations AmplitudeData F1000 F 7000 PromoData Aq Promo2000Data 0 Function Reference O 355 Protect Protect Values SEA Model 300 Protect Protect Values Synopsis Protect A B Aln Formula of an array of values 721 B 7 Comparison value Description This function is intended to protect the value of a formula from going near zero so that the formula can be used as the denominator in divisions The A z parameter represents the values to be protected The B parameter is the value near zero for the comparison this is typically 1 0e 6 Any values in the formula A that are bellow B will be set to B Result Type Space D n F n Ln ln I n ifn Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Protect n
115. 564 Command Table cmd 300 SEA Model 300 command argg arg arg The commands can contain from 0 to m additional arguments that will then be used in the command execution where m is the maximum number of arguments accepted for a particular function See Commands Some arguments are optional while others are required See the function specification for details For each defined function definition more than one command block may be defined The pound sign is used to delimit one command block from another The command blocks are executed based on the number of times the defined function keys have been pressed The first time the function keys are pressed the first command block will execute the second time it is pressed the second command block will execute and so forth Again the command blocks may rang from 0 to n where 7 is limited only by memory constraints When the defined function key s is are pressed n 1 times the first command block will execute and the cycle will start over All function calls are not case sensitive The syntax for the command blocks is as follows C A S functionKey command block command block command block Commands For a list of valid command manager commands See Command Manager Reference Example Version 1 7 cmd 300 C F2 cmdid fssp 1 cmdid fssp 2 Fl scn HOME F2 scn 0 scn 1 sen 2 scn 0 F10 stop F11 start Setup Ta
116. 6 LArray Long Array Element Access sl ods ce ee o Meee eee eres 307 Lacstrl Latitude String esol sed cane E AS 308 LeQ Less Than Equal coria rider ii tit 309 Limito Tim Valor Sr A ia gaa ack 310 Lindex Long Element Access dr ad a RS edhe IRA ay 311 On Str Considero deis aoe bake a 312 Lookup Lookup Interpolation 4 0 a ere tA Coe oe Rak Bie ot A 313 LookupGet Lookup Entry Get Value 29 2061 laica 314 LookupSet Lookup Set Entry Valles oia oo a shee e 315 ErnPos Coran GPS Position de 316 Etos Less AA 2 weal esa A A N ty 317 TORO Lene to Meat iosa seann g cat oe ed Ga oe eee ls Be a E E as Be oS 318 Miass s Mass ua a a de a Ban dies 319 Max Maximum e 068 a a bd oR a OS o a a EO A 320 MaxSiz Maximum SlZe eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eens 321 MaxTim Maximum Time 1 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee eee eens 322 Max Vall Maximum Vallenar liada bos alee ohh teks eee deb eg Geld ae 323 Mean Men A AS E i RA 324 Mediana Mediate st es ra de nd 325 Table of Contents v M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 MIO MAI A Seed oh es Ae AA A A A A de 326 MinSiz Minimum Size 327 MinTim Minimum Time dios o See se 328 MinVal Minimum Val A a et a ia 329 Mode Modo a do o BG ar ld e E et 330 MoSums 2D Mono UNAS e Eon 331 Mul Multiply 2 ao Sos aceite SE di TI Sn REA 332 Nmea NMEA Sentence 2 0 0 ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee eee e eens 333 OdCmd 0 HOG Omar ia bod cat ee thse Che Oke wate ened eat 335 OdIV
117. 6 589 Split Sad l Closed 0 Minimized 0 GridState 1 XScale 0x00000009 Background OXFFFFFF Grid 0x606060 Text 0x000000 XMode 0x00000000 XTypeMinor 0x00000200 Setup Table Reference 631 Window Table Configuration File wnd XTypeMajor XGridMinor XGridMajor XLabel XMinimum XMaximum XRange YScale YMode YTypeMinor YTypeMajor YGridMinor YGridMajor YLabel YMinimum YMaximum YRange Coloro Colorl Color2 Color3 Color4 Color5 Color6 Color Colors Color9 Color10 Color11 Color12 Color13 Colorl14 Color15 Mode 0x00000200 OGOGO 0O G 0x00000009 0x00000000 0x00000200 0x00000200 O OGG G OG Ox00FFOO Ox66CC66 O0x00A000 0x008070 OXOOFFFF Ox0099FF Ox0000FF 0Ox0000A0 OXFFFF7F OXFFFFOO OxFE8001 OxFE5555 OxFF0000 OXFFOOFF 0x8500B6 0x000000 0 Setup Table Reference O 632 SEA Model 300 X vs Y Display Table xvy 300 SEA Model 300 X vs Y Display Table xvy 300 Overview This display consists of the typical X vs Y plot where two values are used to pick a display point The X vs Y display has the capability to connect all the points together including from one time period to the next This could be used to construct a sounding Other uses for the X vs Y display include spectrum plots of particles and scatter plots of various variables Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the X vs Y entry For example 2DC Conc Number A unique intege
118. 6 F 1 AimmsData A1000 6 Function Reference 205 Valid AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access SEA Model 300 Rol1 deg F1107 F 1 AimmsData A1000 7 Pitch deg F1108 F 1 AimmsData A1000 8 Yaw deg F1109 F 1 AimmsData A1000 9 TAS m s F1110 F 1 AimmsData A1000 10 VerticalWind m s F1111 F 1 AimmsData A1000 11 Sideslip deg F1112 F 1 AimmsData A1000 12 AOAPressDiff F1113 F 1 AimmsData A1000 13 SideslipDiff F1114 F 1 AimmsData A1000 14 Latitude rad F1151 F 1 Units F1101 rad deg Longitude rad F1152 F 1 Units F1102 rad deg Altitude ft F1153 F 1 Units F1103 ft m 7 LatitudeStr F1191 S 12 LatStr F1151 LongitudeStr F1192 S 12 LonStr F1152 TD1Aimms20Count F1199 L 1 F1099 7 Id 2 GPS Navigation Packet Trigger AIMMS 10 Aimms20 F1298 Ignore Never None Time h F1200 F 1 AimmsData A1000 0 Latitude rad F1201 D 1 AimmsData A1000 1 Longitude rad F1202 D 1 AimmsData A1000 2 Altitude m F1203 F 1 AimmsData A1000 3 GroundSpeed m s F1204 F 1 AimmsData A1000 4 GroundTrack rad F1205 F 1 AimmsData A1000 5 HFOM m F1206 F 1 AimmsData A1000 6 VFOM m F1207 F 1 AimmsData A1000 7 NavigationMode F1208 L 1 AimmsData A1000 8 Satellites F1209 F 1 AimmsData A1000 9 DatumNumber F1210 F 1 AimmsData A1000 10 Latitude deg F1251 D 1 Units F1201 deg rad Longi
119. 66 cour12b 0x777777 10 10 F10304 3 1f Setup Table Reference O 603 Map File tgt SEA Model 300 Map File tgt Overview Target area files contain information for rendering maps on a window Aircraft position and track can be displayed on top of these maps Target files contain a set of commands that let the system know where to draw lines circles place text or markers It should be noted that depending on the window size and the actual area of interest in the map as well as the display pitch for the screen in question that some shapes may not look as desired For example a square may look like a rectangle or vice versa The following pages contain a description of the valid commands and parameters associated with these Commands Parameters Comment A comment is started with a in any line of the target map file Circle A circle command places a circle on a target area display The user must specify the latitude and longitude in degrees and minutes as well as the diameter in nautical miles c latdeg latmin londeg lonmin diameter Color This command specifies the color bit map to be used while drawing objects Once this command is read the color is changed The color can be a standard RGB hexadecimal value or one of the following predefined values WHITE RED GREEN BLUE BLACK DGRAY MGRAY GRAY YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN DGREEN DCYAN DBLUE BROWN PURPLE b color Point A point command places one pixel p
120. 6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFFO000 2 2 6 FsspERRange 0 480 104 60 18 F 1 F4052 cmdid FsspER 2 2 Range3 3 FSSPERtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxXFF0O000 3 3 6 FsspERRange 0 480 126 60 18 F 1 F4052 cmdid FsspER 3 3 1 Auto 4 FSSPERtxt 0 7 name number window type state font color onColor offColor onLabel offLabel style group flag x y w h formula indFormula onValue offValue PumpControl 4 PCASPtxt 1 1 Courier16b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 ON OFF 6 1 460 60 60 60 F 1 F2052 cmdid Pcasp 0 cmdid Pcasp 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x0000FF 0x0000FF Auto Auto 0 1 480 148 60 18 F 1 F 1 cmdid FsspER auto fml 4054 0 auto 0 7 2DGCEdgeReject 5 2DGCtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFFO000 ON OFF 6 1 580 80 60 60 F 1 F6140 cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 or cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 and 2DGCDOFOff 6 2DGCtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0O000 Off 0 6 2DGCDOF 0 580 180 60 18 F 1 F6141 cmd2g 2DGC 0x60 and 0 2DGCDOFMid 7 2DGCtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 Mid 1 6 2DGCDOF 1 580 205 60 18 F 1 F6141 cmd2g 2DGC 0x40 and cmd2g 2DGC 0x20 or 1 2DGCDOFMax 8 2DGCtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 Max 3 6 2DGCDOF 0 580 230 60 18 F 1 F6141 cmd2g 2DGC 0x60 or 3 7 2DGPEdgeReject 5 2DGPtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFFO000 ON OFF 6 1 580 80 60 60 F 1 F7140 cmd2g 2DGP 0x01 or cmd2g 2DGP 0x01 and 2DGPDOFOff 6 2DGPtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0O000
121. 7 WindDir deg F8108 F 1 Ge F6108 998 F8108 F6108 WindSpeed m s F8109 F 1 Ge F6109 998 F8109 F6109 DewPoint Oon F8150 F 1 RHToDewPoint F8107 F8106 WindDir rad F8151 F 1 Units F8108 rad deg WindSpeed knots F8152 F 1 Units F8109 knots m s No secondary trigger The primary trigger is based on the Serial ASCII data type with a maximum frequency of 100 Hz for the blueheatseriall board The interesting part is that this trigger uses F5401 as the trigger formula Finally a trigger entry from the header of the drop 1Ist wnd file This trigger shows a Serial ASCII data type trigger at a maximum frequency of 100 Hz for the blueheatserial1 card with F5311 as the formula trigger 7 dropilst wnd Trigger Serial ASCII 100 blueheatserial1l F5311 Never Ignore None Area 0 0 625 475 Trigger operation If the primary trigger doesn t fire then the secondary trigger is checked It the primary trigger fires then the secondary trigger is ignored So the system first checks for the primary trigger and then it moves to the secondary trigger if necessary If the trigger type is set to never 2 we are done If the trigger type is set to ignore 1 skip type check If the trigger type doesn t match the buffer type we are done Do trigger on buffer life if necessary If the address is set to ignore 1 we skip address checking If the address doesn t match the buffer addres
122. 87 HvpsMask A 288 HvpsTiming A TASFACTORTAG 289 HvSums A PROBE MODE FREQUENCY 290 HvSums A PROBE INTERVAL HvTiming A TASFACTORTAG 201 TArray K INDEX a2 lasP LAS 293 IIndex F INDEX 294 Incloud STDEV STDEVTHRES SPOWER PPOWER POWERTHRES TIME 295 Ins429Bin A BITS RANGE 296 InsBCD A 297 InsBin A 298 InsBin2 A 299 InsPos A 300 IntegerData A INDEX SCALE OFFSET SWAP 301 Intercept KNOWYS NKOWNXS STATE 302 IR E LOW HIGH 303 IVar1D A STRINDEX TOTSTRINDEX CFAC INTERVAL 304 IVar1 DAdv STROBE TOTSTROBES CFAC INTERVAL 305 KeyIndex KEY 306 KeyIndex KEY COUNT LArray F INDEX 307 LatStr LATITUDE 308 Le A B FTRUE FFALSE 309 Limit F LOW HIGH 310 LIndex E INDEX 311 LonStr LONGITUDE 312 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 194 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page Lookup amp LOOKUP 313 LookupGet LOOKUP ROW COLUMN 314 LookupSet LOOKUP ROW COLUMN F sike LrnPos A 316 Lt A B FTRUE FFALSE 317 LToF A 318 Masses F PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL LINEAR EXP 319 Masses PROBE E CFAC TAS FREQUENCY LINEAR EXP Max F 320 MaxSiz X Y 321 MaxSiz X Y MODE MaxTim E STATE EPA MaxVal F STATE 323 Mean X Y 324 Median X Y 325 Median X Y MODE Min F 326 MinSiz X Y 327 MinSiz X Y MODE MinTim F STATE 328 MinVal F STATE 329
123. 98FB98 palegreen 808080 darkgray D3D3D3 lgray AFEEEE paleturquoise 006400 darkgreen 90EE90 lgreen DB7093 palevioletred BDB76B darkkhaki ADD8E6 lightblue FFEFDS papayawhip 8B008B darkmagenta F08080 lightcoral FFDAB9 peachpuff 556B2F darkolivegreen EOFFFF lightcyan CD853F peru FF8C00 darkorange FAFAD2 lightgoldenrodyellow FFCOCB pink 9932CC darkorchid D3D3D3 lightgray DDAOAA plum 8B0000 darkred 90EE90 lightgreen BOEOEG powderblue E9967A darksalmon FFB6C1 lightpink 800080 purple 8FBC8F darkseagreen FFA07A lightsalmon FF0000 red 483D8B darkslateblue 20B2AA lightseagreen BC8F8F rosybrown 2F4F4F darkslategray 87CEFA lightskyblue 4169E1 royalblue 0OCED1 darkturquoise 778899 lightslategray 8B4513 saddlebrown 9400D3 darkviolet BOC4DE lightsteelblue FA8072 salmon 00008B dblue FEFFEO lightyellow F4A460 sandybrown 008B8B dcyan 00FF00 lime 2E8B57 seagreen FF1493 deeppink 32CD32 limegreen FFF5EE seashell OOBFFF deepskyblue FAFOEG linen A0522D sienna B8860B dgoldenrod FFB6C1 Ipink COCOCO silver M300 Colors Continued M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 34 Color System SEA Model 300 RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name 808080 deray FFA07A Isalmon 87CEEB skyblue 006400 dgreen 20B2AA Iseagreen GASACD slateblue 696969 dimgray 87CEFA Iskyblue 708090 slategray BDB76B dkhaki 778899 Islategray FFFAFA snow 8B008B dmagenta BOC4DE Isteelblue OOFF7F springgreen 1E90FF dodgerblue FFF
124. 99 1 Function Reference O 398 StrCpy String Copy SEA Model 300 StrCpy String Copy Synopsis StrCpy STRING StrCpy STRING LENGTH STRING String for compare m21 string LENGTH 1 Number of characters to be copied integer Description This function copy the string in the parameter provided to the formula s result space This in fact copies the contents on one formula to another The LENGTH parameter can be used to limit the number of characters copied Result Type Space S n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations StringCopy n F1000 S 32 StrCpy F2000 Function Reference O 399 StrParameters String Parameter Count SEA Model 300 StrParameters String Parameter Count Synopsis StrParameters STRING DELIMETER STRING x String for compare 721 string DELIMETER 1 Delimiter character between parameters integer Description This function returns the number of parameters from a string The delimiter identifies the separating ASCII character between parameters Result Type Space D1 F 1 LEJ 11 I 411 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations StringParameters uu F1000 Ifi StrParameters F2000 47 Function Reference O 400 StrPrt String Print SEA Model 300 StrPrt String Print Synopsis StrPrt FORMAT VALUE FORMAT 7 String for format m21 string VALUE 1 Value to print double float long integer Description This function is used to do a basi
125. A lt B then fli FTRUE i else f i FFALSE i Result Type Space D n if A lt B n m else n p Example Name Units Number Result Computations LessThan AEL F300 F 5 Lt F100 F101 F200 Function Reference O 317 F100 LToF Long to Float SEA Model 300 LToF Long to Float Synopsis LToF A A Acquisition tag for long data tag Description This function takes four bytes long integer and converts them to a float number Upon completion this function returns an array of size n containing the converted long integer to float values where 7 is the number samples field from the directory referenced by A Acquisition tag name number Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations LongToFloat na F100 F 20 LToF A100 Function Reference O 318 Masses Masses SEA Model 300 Masses Masses Synopsis Masses PROBE F CFAC TAS FREQUENCY LINEAR EXP Masses F P RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL LINEAR EXP PROBE Probe name number probe F m Formula for the array of sums m21 CFAC 1 Correction factor TAS 1 True air speed value RANGE 1 Range used in probe definition table integer INTEVAL 1 Interval of summation integer LINEAR 1 Linear scaling coefficient EXP 1 Exponential scaling coefficient FREQUENCY 1 Integration frequency Description This function uses the summed up channel counts and the probe definition t
126. A BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL MODE BOARD Board name for CYDDA interface board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage in volts CHANNEL 1 Output channel integer 0 15 MODE 1 Mode Description Controls the output voltages for the CYDDA Board This function is used to control the analog voltage value output for a specific channel The MODE parameter can be used to select the appropriate voltage range Valid mode values are 10 5 and 2 5 If MODE is set to zero the board will perform a simultaneous update specified by the CYDDA user manual Type Mode Output Range Volts 5 10 10 3 gt 45 E 2 5 2 5 10 10 5 5 5 2 5 2 5 0 Simultaneous read and update Mode Selection Options The function returns an integer containing the calculated analog output voltage If mode is set to zero the function will return a one Check the CYDDA manual for further details Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations ControlCYDDA en F501 I 1 CoCYDDA Bd CYDDA 10 2 5 Function Reference O 239 CoDo Control Digital Output SEA Model 300 CoDo Control Digital Output Synopsis CoDo BOARD PORT BIT VALUE BOARD Board name for digital output interface board PORT 1 Port number integer BIT 1 Bit position of event bit to be set integer 0 7 VALUE 1 Set mode on off integer 0 or 1 Description This function reads in the current state from the
127. ANNEL 248 Copy E INDEX ELEMENTS 249 CoQuit STATE 250 CoRTI802 BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL MODE 231 CoSeaDA BOARD VOLTAGE 23a CoShutdown STATE 253 CountBy DATA BINS 254 CountEdges F 255 CountEdges F DIR Cumulative F 256 Date A0 27 DateTime A0 258 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 192 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page DayOfYear A0 259 DayOfYear YEAR MONTH DAY Delay E CYCLES 260 Delta F CYCLES 261 DewPointToRH DP TEMP 262 DFault F LOW HIGH DEFAULT 263 DIndex E INDEX 264 DirData A SELECT 265 Div A B 266 DToF A 267 Eq A B FTRUE FFALSE 268 Esi T 269 Esw T 270 EvtStr EVENT BIT STRO STR1 271 EvtVal EVENT BIT STATE 272 FalconData A TITLE aia FalconDay A OFFSET 274 FalconTime A OFFSET 273 FArray F INDEX 276 FIndex F INDEX att Ge A B FTRUE FFALSE 278 GetData A OFFSET COUNT TYPE 279 GetData A OFFSET COUNT TYPE SWAP GrData A SELECT 280 GrSums PROBE A MODE FREQUENCY 282 GrSums A MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE PIXELSIZE Gt A B FTRUE FFALSE 285 HSAnalog A X B 286 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 193 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page HvMask A 2
128. B s i tanh B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space DI Example Name Units Number Result Computations HypTangent mt F106 F 25 F105 tanh Math Function Reference 482 SEA Model 300 tan Tangent tan Tangent Synopsis B tan i B 7 Last operand n gt 1 KP Note Values of large magnitude may yield partial or total loss of significance Description This function computes the tangent of B s i tan B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Tangent wn F101 F 15 F105 tan Math Function Reference 483 xchg Exchange SEA Model 300 xchg Exchange Synopsis A B xchg Al m Next to last operand mm gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This functions put the values of A into B and vice versa The new size of array B will be equal to m as shown above Also the new size of array A will be equal to p as shown above The following two formulas summarize this process A i Bl i fori 0 n 1 where n p B i Ali fori 0 n 1 where n m Result Type Space Example Name Units Number Result Computations Exchange Jid F100 F 1 F105 F106 xchg Math Function Reference O 484 Command Manager Reference Command Manager Reference The Command Manager is a runtime portion of the M300 system that will execute commands SEA Model 300 specified in the Trigger Command Table tic 300 and
129. Conversion SEA Model 300 Unit of Measure TO FROM Acceleration m s2 Meters per second sq cm s2 Centimeters per second sq ft s2 Feet per second sq g G s Angular Velocity rpm Rotations per minute rps Rotations per second rad s Radi ans per second Temperature C Celcius F Farenheit R Rankine re Reaumur K Kelvin TO FROM Possible Conversion Arguments Continued Result Type Space D n Example Name SqFeetToSqMeters Units Number Result Computations ma F300 F 15 Units 1000 Function Reference O 429 m2 uw F fe2 VaxTime VAX Time SEA Model 300 VaxTime VAX Time Synopsis Vax Time A A Time acquisition tag for VAX clock tag Description This function converts the VAX clock from milliseconds to an ASCII string for display purposes The resulting string as the format HH MM SS where HH stands for hours MM stands for minutes and SS stands for seconds Result Type Space S 10 Example Name Units Number Result Computations VAXTime wn FO S 10 VaxTime A100 Function Reference O 430 VaxTimeDiff VAX Time Difference SEA Model 300 Vax TimeDiff VAX Time Difference Synopsis Vax Time A A Acquisition tag for VAX clock tag Description This function uses the VAX clock data and the Model 300 time to compute the difference between the times in milliseconds Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Numbe
130. D Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio Description This function computes the inverse velocity acceptance ratio from 1D data This value can be used to correct concentrations volumes and masses calculations EA TOTALSTROBEINDEX py 0 Pe EA STROBEINDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Result Computations InverseVelAccRatio F 10 IVariD A100 15 16 1 1 Function Reference O 304 IVar1DAdv Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D SEA Model 300 IVar1 DAdv Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D Synopsis IVar 1DAdv STROBE TOTALSTROBES CFAC INTERVAL STROBE Tag for strobe count tag TOTALSTROBES Tag for total strobes tag CFAC 1 Correction factor INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See OdIVarAdv 1D Advanced Inverse Veloc ity Acceptance Ratio Description This function computes the inverse velocity acceptance ratio from 1D advanced data This value can be used to correct concentrations volumes and masses calculations _ TOTALSTROBES CFAC f STROBE Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations AdvInverseVelAccRatio mn F100 F 1 IvaridAdv A100 A101 1 1 Function Reference 305 KeyIndex Sorted Array Indexing SEA Model 300 KeyIndex Sorted Array Indexing Synopsis KeyIndex KEY KeyIndex KEY COUNT KEY 1 Key value to be inserted indexed long integer
131. Data Size The data size is variable depending on the data The largest size supported is 1024 This is limited by the MTU size of about 1500 bytes Data Format The data format varies To access data from this acquisition type you might want to use the GetData function Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference 160 Type 86 CIPGS Serial Data SEA Model 300 Type 86 CIPGS Serial Data Description This acquisition type acquires all the binary serial data from the Cloud Imaging Probe Grey Scale CIPGS The SEA CAPS interface is used to communicate with the CIPGS by sending the necessary setup and data request commands Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters In the M300 these parameters have status information for the acquisition Parameter 1 setup 1 data 2 setup grey scale 3 Parameter 2 bad checksum 1 invalid data size 2 missing ack 3 reset flat 4 Data Size The date size for the CIPGS acquisition event must be 180 bytes The maximum theoretical acquisition frequency for CIPGS is 31 Hz The maximum suggested acquisition frequency is 25 Hz Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary sent by the CIPGS in response to the data request command check the CIPGS probe manual Use the CIPGSData function to retrieve the individual data elements from the CIPGS data block Type Synchronous event
132. E AS a ic id 389 SEE EEN Seria EEE ihe ea SA A AA 390 Silnteger Serial Intervenir ia da e odo 391 SrNmea NMEA Sentence o 392 SEV AKO Sena VAX al is a ds ds si tl 394 StDev Standard Deviation eps ota a ra nta she d vaca 395 STemp Static Temperature nuit Dl edi ia ei aioe 396 Stat Sto Concate ate ban ere wie rl eGR ke REO EES ee ne eee 397 StiCmpcottine Con pare iiss AAA E a A Aes 398 e ao 2 estan AS Boh oho Wiehe 6 ROR Re Re ee daha le Ba Range wei 399 StrParameters String Parameter Counts a AA AAA SEA 400 SerPrtO String Print ds ate a eas endo aes doar edocs wR ae dues a ene Wake wee area ae ey 401 Stesel String Selects ie ii ta a eae ee 402 St loDO String to Doubles a e na e e Maire o NY 403 SirlokQParse strne Token vet o E ita eee 404 StrToL String to Long terri A A Bee ee Ra 405 StToULO String to Unsigned Long Integer coord dad 406 StrXmlProtect String XML Protect c praia ia 407 SUBO y Subtract Arrays 4 A AS E de eee a ee dente eG a nae 408 Sumo Summation e da be eed due eit ine a ew heed 409 Sums DO Sums Dil tao ed oe Sa ates e dhl veo la a Oa O 410 Sums2D 02D Sums AAA OLDS Ge Bi as Sees 411 S ms2G 02D Grey SUMS detinea tat ia aed egsa oes dey n P iatea Dees 412 Sums2GAdv 2D Grey Advanced Sums ceda a a 415 SumsHVPS High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums ooooocooooccooco o 418 System System Data ACES eens AA A A a ADA da A Bee os 419 TamedarData Q Tamdar Data Access iru dd 420
133. ET COUNT TYPE GetData A OFFSET COUNT TYPE SWAP A Acquisition tag for data tag OFFSET 1 Byte offset into data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values to be returned integer TYPE 1 Type of data integer SWAP 1 Swap data integer 0 or 1 Description This function is used to get data from a raw acquisition tag Data offset and count are user selectable The data can be byte swapped if necessary The type of data used is based on the following table Size Bytes TYPE Data Type Result 1 1 String S n 1 2 Signed Char C n 1 3 Unsigned Char c n 2 4 Signed Integer I n 2 5 Unsigned Integer i n 4 6 Signed Long L n 4 7 Unsigned Long I n 4 8 Float F n 8 9 Double Din Type Result Type Space See type table n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations GPSLatitude rad F1104 D 1 GetData A1200 12 1 9 Function Reference O 279 SEA Model 300 GrData Grey Data Access SEA Model 300 GrData Grey Data Access Synopsis GrData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for 2D Grey Advanced data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 14 Description This function allows access to individual items of the 2D Grey Advanced data header The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different 2D Grey Advanced header data fields Data Field SELECT 2DG or 2DGADV Samples 0 Particle Coun
134. EX 1 First element of B to be combined integer BELEMENTS 1 Number of elements in B to be combined integer Description This function build a new array from segments of two different arrays For each of the arrays specified the user may pick an index and number of elements to use Result Type Space D n n AELEMENTS BELEMENTS Example Name Units Number Result Computations CombineArrays yeas F101 F 15 Comb F99 2 5 F100 O 10 Function Reference 244 Concs Concentrations SEA Model 300 Concs Concentrations Synopsis Concs PROBE E CFAC TAS MODE Concs K PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL MODE PROBE Probe name number probe F 7 Formula for the sums array channel samples 721 CFAC 1 Correction factor TAS 1 True air speed MODE 1 Mode value used to specify divide correction value integer RANGE 1 Selected range value INTERVAL 1 Interval of summation used by sums routine integer Description This function uses the summed up channel counts and the probe definition table to compute concentrations The result is typically used for mean median mode and total concentration calculations as well as X vs Y display plots This function should be refreshed at the same time interval as the summation routine generates data so as to eliminate redundant calculations on the same input data Please note that if the TAS is in m s and the sample area is mm2 the resulting concentratio
135. Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumTime aM F200 S 10 MaxTim F100 F99 Function Reference O 322 MaxVal Maximum Value SEA Model 300 MaxVal Maximum Value Synopsis MaxVal F STATE F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 STATE 1 State option variable integer 0 or 1 Description This function returns the maximum value observed The STATE variable is used to control the function operation If the STATE is zero the maximum value stays unchanged If the state changes from zero to one rising edge the maximum value is cleared and a new maximum is started If the STATE is one the maximum value will change when the current value is a maximum Result Type Space Diax Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumValue mn F200 F 1 MaxVal F100 0 Function Reference O 323 Mean Mean SEA Model 300 Mean Mean Synopsis Mean X Y X m Formula of an array for X data values m gt 1 Y p Formula of an array for Y data values p gt 1 Description This function computes the expected X value using Y array values as weighing coefficients for the X array values Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Mean ee F300 F 1 Mean F100 F200 Function Reference O 324 Median Median SEA Model 300 Median Median Synopsis Median X Y Median X Y MODE X m Formula of an array for X data values mm gt 1 Y p Formula of an
136. F STATE F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 STATE 1 State option variable integer 0 or 1 Description This function returns the minimum value observed The STATE variable is used to control the function operation If the STATE is zero the minimum value is unchanged If the state changes from zero to one rising edge the minimum value is cleared and a new minimum is started If the STATE is one the minimum value will change when the current values is a minimum Result D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations MinimumValue wn F200 F 1 MinVal F100 0 Function Reference O 329 Mode Mode SEA Model 300 Mode Mode Synopsis Mode X Y X m Formula of an array for X data values m21 Y p Formula of an array for Y data values p21 Description This function computes the mode X value using the Y array values as the weighing coefficients for the X array values Uses quadratic interpolation Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Mode um F300 F 1 Mode F100 F200 Function Reference O 330 MoSums 2D Mono Sums SEA Model 300 MoSums 2D Mono Sums Synopsis MoSums PROBE A MODE FREQUENCY MoSums A ELAPSED MODE PROBE INTERVAL PROBE Probe name number probe A Acquisition tag for 2D Mono data tag ELAPSED 2D Elapsed time tag tag MASK 1 Time slice mask value integer FREQUENCY 1 Integration frequency INTERVAL 1
137. F 7 Formula value to be limited n21 LOW 1 Lower limit value HIGH 1 Upper limit value Description This function checks limits on a formula value and hard limits the result between a low and a high limit if F i lt LOW then fli LOW else if F i lt HIGH then f i HIGH fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Limit Jen F100 F 1 Limit F100 0 100 Function Reference 310 Lindex Long Element Access SEA Model 300 LIndex Long Element Access Synopsis LIndex E INDEX F 7 Formula representing an array of values long n21 INDEX 1 Index number of element being referenced integer gt 0 Description Uses the element INDEX to reference that particular value in an array of long integer data f F INDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations LongIntegerIndex F300 F 15 LIndex F100 24 Function Reference O 311 LonStr Longitude String SEA Model 300 LonStr Longitude String Synopsis LonStr LONGITUDE LONGITUDE 1 Formula for longitude value in radians Description This function converts the longitude in radians value to an ASCII longitude string for display purposes The return string is in the form of E DDD MM HH where E stands for east west DDD stands for degrees MM stands for minutes and HH for fraction of minutes Result Type Space S 12 Example Name Units Number Res
138. FEO lyellow 4682B4 steelblue 556B2F dolivegreen FFOOFF magenta D2B48C tan FF8C00 dorange 66CDAA maquamarine 008080 teal 9932CC dorchid 800000 maroon D8BFD8 thistle 8B0000 dred 0000CD mblue FF6347 tomato E9967A dsalmon 66CDAA mediumaquamarine 40E0DO turquoise 8FBC8F dseagreen 0000CD mediumblue EE82EE violet 483D8B dslateblue BA55D3 mediumorchid F5DEB3 wheat 2F4F4F dslategray 9370DB mediumpurple FFFFFF white 0OCED1 dturquoise 3CB371 mediumseagreen F5F5F5 whitesmoke 9400D3 dviolet 7B68EE mediumslateblue FFFFOO yellow B22222 firebrick OOFAIA mediumspringgreen 9ACD32 yellowgreen M300 Colors Continued M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 35 Font System SEA Model 300 Font System The basics The M300 system actually used the same fonts provided by the GUI It is recommend that you check the Font documentation using the online documentation for Photon use helpviewer There is also a GUI configuration utility called fontcfg To run this utility to check or change setting just type fontcfg amp at a PtTerm window command shell window To list the basic font names you can use the l command and look at the qnx4 photon font directory If necessary you can use the Text window to select the desired font for a text label Then check the txt 300 file and the appropriate label entry for the font name We recommend to use the Courier font since it is a fixed font True type fonts dont display as nice
139. For example cipgs see also Window on page 527 ColorMinimum ColorMiddle ColorMaximum The CIPGS probe has 2 bits per pixel Each bit is assigned an intensity level minimum middle and maximum The CIPGS display allows the user to pick whatever colors he desires for each intensity level The color for each intensity level maybe the same as another or even the background color The use of the background color for the lowest intensity level could be useful in removing undesirable noise from the display such as splash stuck diodes etc see also Color on page 528 Address Setup Table Reference O 560 Cloud Image Probe Grey Scale Display Table cgs 300 SEA Model 300 The address selects the CIPGS Image data The user doesn t need to know the tag number for the CIPGS Image data just the address of the board where the CIPGS Image data is coming from Valid addresses are 0x7300 0x7302 0x7700 and 0x7702 other addresses possible When the user changes the address the primary trigger for the window also gets changed This allows the display to run only when there is CIPGS Image data available see also Address on page 528 Timebars Along with each CIPGS particle there are also two slices containing the timing data for the particle The CIPGS display can display these in the same color as the particle use a 1 or as the background use a 0 When the time bars are shown with the background color they are not removed
140. GN td ie te as 65 Type 18 CAMAC INS ARINC Serial nn cit eek acento tebe gin he Ole da RA 66 Type 19 GAM AGING Sync AA ls 67 Type 20 2D Grey Image 20000 o A A RA A RA 68 Type ol OD Grey TAS Factors ct na Da A AA DRA 71 Type 22100 Grey Elapsed Time esca cia ei dea eas Gah a E tas 72 Type 23 2D Grey Elapsed TAS 256 ora Ae st 73 Type 24 2D Grey Minimum Corn AA AA 74 Type 25 2D Grey Middle Count o oo sd it ii eek Wala Wee 75 Type 26 2D Grey Maximum Count rd a tt daa 76 Type 27 QD Grey OR Slice reisir a a os 77 Type 28 2D Grey Shadow Slice Count see ad eee eet ee as 78 Type 29120 Grey Probe Byte ii AAA AS AS ORE 79 Type 30 LD Counts reir e debi cd arpi ae bis clad REN 80 Type Hall Spectrometent 15 aa A a a db sad 82 Table of Contents i M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Type 32 Hail Bret att peen a NA AS ede Sen A dee 84 Type oo Analog S BEE Analog ta st Das a 86 pes e e A 88 Type 35 SEA Analog to Digital pub lot a 89 Type 36 SEA DA COURSE A e 91 Type 37 Sena ASCH Data i bios E RS 92 Type 38 Seral IEEE Datay see rt Wa aetna sad ii S EAEE RUNE a as 94 Type 39 Serial Integet Data ii wba eee eet alien whe eae RA Ge wee Eee ee 96 Type 40 Sonic Wind System 322 02 202 ID co cons 98 Type Nkan dara hate a dr o ec ND A Og ot AM eid A 101 Type 42 UNS Accelerometer 92514 sie aia alee Meee ee kee a 103 Type43 D256 C nts es ob hw aden pra naan Gwin crane E a Poach ae ampere 104 Type 44 1D256 Analog
141. Hz Acquisition Reference O 143 Type 72 INS INI Synchro SEA Model 300 Type 72 INS INI Synchro Description This acquisition type is used to acquire angular position from a synchro channel in the SEA Inertial Navigation Interface IND This adapter supports up to eight synchro to digital converters These synchro channels can be used to acquire pitch roll and yaw or other synchro encoded information Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Synchro channel 0 7 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires 16 bits of data Two bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The format of the acquired data is a 14 bit unsigned integer 0 16384 This integer represents angles from 0 27 radians Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 144 Type 73 INS INI Serial SEA Model 300 Type 73 INS INI Serial Description This acquisition type acquires binary or BCD ARINC 575 data from one of two boards located inside the SEA Inertial Navigation Interface INI This adapter contains an on board RAM which captures the serial data transmitted from the INS system Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 ARINC Label 0 255 2 Card 0 1 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires 32 bits of data Four bytes should be allocated for each sample The actual data is only 24 bits inside a 32 bit word with the most significant byte equal to zer
142. Input s0 icc ecee see ney bi s bee pe wee hl A 106 Type A A CAMA VOR Dita ponete Reade Weta be Rew ade 108 Type46 D256 Spare Dias id A A AAA AAA 109 Types UDG pae Wace sce 5c copa n a MGs Miva eee waa Sac 110 peas 1D256 Ho se Data ha is ware do ok AMAL clas al 111 Type 4 D256 Activity sis pesci a Mee ASE DA ads ie UA DARA AG ae 112 Type 0D 567 Pot Strobes sagts aat eiet aoe wats mele la li es 113 Type 51 1D256 botal Counts 22 0 4922ebicate da e beeen 114 Type 52 SDSMT HVPS Image Data a is is ata 115 Type 53 SPEC LV Ps Image Di AAA 116 ds MES 5 eR iOS Reto RS ett C E GGUO ee pene pune en ceu nae e 118 Type oo VAX Clot ASA AA tata Osaka Ded A 119 Type 56 CAMAC 1D256 Counts a tea peta aaa eee Me eee ee 120 Type 57 CAMAC 1D256 Reference Voltage ind wine una siete sauna ahaha leaned aw Aces 122 Type 58 CAMAC TD256 Spate O eis gif le A og Mau 123 Type 59 CAMAC 1256 Spare llos eet abe e A ges 124 Type 60 CAMAC 1D256 House Data sich b gan AAA ee lees 125 Type 61 CAMAC 1D256 Activity i cria adi das 126 Type 62 CAMAC 1D256 Total Strobes 2 paraiso ee ie eae 127 Type 63 CAMAC 1D256 Total Counts cues ses dee eee de cea edd de 128 Type 64 1D256 Ballard Counts ea eu ia era e por io do ii dol 129 Type 65 Serial Port DC 8 DADS Dat o td eos efi bon ls ale A 131 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced seors ta A ere geek eM een 133 Type G74P MS 10588 1D Data es csc as etd ees ate eee ahs ee ds ee 137 Type 68 9513 Counters inch aceite a
143. LE Volume This field is used to specify the volume of a sphere of average diameter 3 VOLUME 1 5 AS gt Y MIDDLE 6 Setup Table Reference O 611 Probe Channel File prb SEA Model 300 sampleArea This field is used to specify the two dimensional sample area typically in mm2 of the sensing area of the probe This sample area is multiplied by the distance propagated during the sampling interval TAS Delta Time to generate the sample volume The user should include all conversion constants needed to provide the final result in the desired units By convention the TAS will always be in m s and Delta Time in seconds Example Probe Channel Files fssp100 prb Number Minimum Maximum Middle dD dlogD Area Volume SampleArea 1 12 50 37 50 25 00 25 000 0 4771 490 9 8181 48 848 2 37 50 62 50 50 00 25 000 0 2218 1963 6 545e 004 48 895 3 62 50 87 50 75 00 25 000 0 1461 4418 2 209e 005 48 943 4 87 50 112 50 100 00 25 000 0 1091 7854 5 236e 005 48 991 5 112 50 137 50 125 00 25 000 0 08715 1 227e 004 1 023e 006 49 038 6 137 50 162 50 150 00 25 000 0 07255 1 767e 004 1 767e 006 49 086 7 162 50 187 50 175 00 25 000 0 06215 2 405e 004 2 806e 006 49 134 8 187 50 212 50 200 00 25 000 0 05436 3 142e 004 4 189e 006 49 181 9 212 50 237 50 225 00 25 000 0 0483 3 976e 004 5 964e 006 49 229 10 237 50 262 50 250 00 25 000 0 04347 4 909e 004 8 181e 006 49 277 11 262 50 287 50 275 00 25 000 0 03951 5 94e 004 1 089e 007 49 324
144. Limit The ageLimit is used to hash out an old display Once the current HVPS display is older than the specified ageLimit then the display gets hashed out as an indication of old data This parameter is specified in seconds The window must have the secondary trigger set to expire once per second on the synchronous buffer Probe This is the probe name from the probe table See Probe Table prb 300 on page 609 This is used to associate a probe table entry with an HVPS display entry see also Probe on page 528 Example Version 2 hvp 300 Name Number Window Color Address Timebars Scale AgeLimit Probe HVPS 2 HVPS Green 0x1700 0 1 15 hvps Setup Table Reference O 586 Label Table 161 300 SEA Model 300 Label Table 151 300 Overview The Label display allows a user to display a text data label on any M300 window This allows the user to greater control and flexibility of where and what to display This display is not as effective as a text data label on text windows It is therefore not recommend for the user to place a large number of these in the project Also care should be taken not to place labels where they might interfere with objects Parameters Name The identifier for the Label see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Label displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the
145. M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 6 60 06 S H A se Engineering Associates M300 Reference Guide Revision date April 1 2015 9 01 am Miscellaneous Reference This book contains vital information on the M300 Data Buffer M300 Data Format M300 Trigger structure and the use of RPN post fix computations in the M300 Acquisition Reference This book contains information on each type of data acquisition that is available with the M300 Each acquisition type is listed along with its allowable parameters data size data format type and any miscellaneous comments applicable to that specific type Function Reference This book contains the non mathematical functions which may be called based on the user s needs as specified in the user s formula tables This reference is needed to create those tables correctly Math Function Reference This book contains the same type of information that is in the Functions Reference with the exception that these are mathematical only and operate directly on the floating point stack Command Manager Reference This book provides a general overview of how the M300 Command Manager operates and associated commands that are available for use Setup Tables Reference This book contains the setup table information that is used to drive the acquisition processes and configure M300 projects Please E mail your comments on the documentation to docs scieng com Copyright 1997 2015 Scien
146. O LONTO LATFROM n Latitude of reference point from in rad m21 LONFROM p Longitude of reference point from in rad p21 LATTO g Latitude of target point to in rad 421 LONTO 7 Longitude of target point to in rad 721 Description This function returns the bearing from the reference point to the target point in radians Typically the reference point is the aircraft s current position and the target point is a fixed point on the ground fil atan LONTOLA LONFROMIi cos LATTOLD LATTO i LATFROMI i if f lt 0 then f f 2r Result Type Space D n n min m p q 7 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Bearing rad F300 F 1 Bearing F100 F101 F200 F201 Function Reference O 218 BufferTime Buffer Time SEA Model 300 BufferTime Buffer Time Synopsis BufferTime SELECT SELECT 1 Select value integer 0 3 Description This function is used to return the buffer time information We can return start time and end time in seconds The resulting seconds are since January 1 1970 floating point value We can also return the delta time for the buffer end time start time in seconds We can return the delta time between buffers end time current end time previous The following table shows the valid SELECT values for the function SELECT Name 0 Start time 1 End time 2 Delta time for buffer 3 Delta time between buffers SELECT Result T
147. O 121 Type 57 CAMAC 1D256 Reference Voltage SEA Model 300 Type 57 CAMAC 1D256 Reference Voltage Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the 1D256 reference voltage Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and represents the unsigned digital value of the reference voltage 0x7FFF 32767 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero Data Format Notice that 8 bit analog data is being placed into 16 bit integer values The data is placed in the upper 8 bits so the data can be treated as a 16 bit signed integer Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 122 Type 58 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 0 SEA Model 300 Type 58 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 0 Description This acquisition type is for the first of two spare 16 bit counter channels on the CAMAC 1D256 interface The maximum counting rate is 7 MHZ It can be used independently of the probe sizing functions Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Mode low byte 0x00 OxFF 2 Mode high byte 0x00 0xFF 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters The values for parameter one and two are used to program the mode register for the counter chip For the regular count mode use 0x28 for parameter one and 0x03 for parameter two Fo
148. PRES 7 Static pressure in mb 721 Description This function computes pitot pressure in mb from static temperature tas and static pressure Function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computation 2 3 498130249 m TAS JUIS SERESSX or x STEMP 273 15 1 7 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example Name Units Number Result Computations PitotPress mbar F200 F 1 TasP F100 F101 F102 Function Reference O 422 Test Test SEA Model 300 Test Test Synopsis Test P P siii P P First parameter P3 Second parameter P nth Parameter Description This function is used to create an array of test values This array may be used as an input to other functions or displays The resulting array is formed by the parameters passed in the function Result Type Space D 7 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Test te F100 F 7 Test 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 Function Reference O 423 Time Time SEA Model 300 Time Time Synopsis Time A A Date time acquisition tag number tag Description This function converts the date time acquisition data into an ASCII string for display purposes Only the time part is returned The resulting string has the format HH MM SS FFF where HH stands for hours MM stands for minutes SS stands for seconds and FFF is for milliseconds The number of elements in the result
149. PS data tag KP Note Deprecated M300 function replacement See HvMask High Volume Precipitation S 3 spectrometer Mask Description This function will look at all existing HVPS data and try to find a diagnostics buffer with the current mask information The current HVPS mask is retrieved as an array of 16 integer words 16 bits each word for a total of a 256 bit mask Result Type Space I 16 Example Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSMask re F100 I 16 HvpsMask A100 Function Reference O 288 A KF HvpsTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing SEA Model 300 HvpsTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing Synopsis HvpsTiming A TASFACTORTAG A Acquisition tag for HVPS data tag TASFACTORTAG 1 Tag for HVPS TAS factors data tag Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See HvTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing Description This function is used to retrieve the HVPS timing data first float element and the HVPS overflow data second float element from an HVPS data block Result Type Space D 2 Example Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSTiming NEM F100 D 2 HVPSTiming A100 A101 Function Reference O 289 HvSums High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums SEA Model 300 HvSums High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums Synopsis HvSums PROBE A MODE FREQUENCY HvSums A PROBE INTERVAL A Acquisition tag f
150. Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 32 bit word Four bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 32 bit word unsigned long word counts the number of 25 ps ticks that have passed while the probe was armed Type Asynchronous slave event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 72 Type 23 2D Grey Elapsed TAS 256 SEA Model 300 Type 23 2D Grey Elapsed TAS 256 Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Grey elapsed TAS 256 value from a 2D Grey adapter Elapsed TAS 256 is the number of true airspeed clocks divided by 256 that have passed since the time the probe was armed and when the image was recorded Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 32 bit word Four bytes must be allocated per sample Data Format The 32 bit unsigned long word contains the counts of the TAS clock divided by 256 while the 2D Grey probe was armed Type Asynchronous slave event Comments This acquisition should be taken at the end of each image The true air speed clock gives and indication of the spatial separation between when the probe was armed and when the probe became full You can convert elapsed TAS 256 to a distance in the same units as the pixel size by using the following formula AD RawCounts x 256 x PixelSize Yo
151. Properties dialog of the M300 When the Project is reloaded this data will be used to populate the Command Manager History List on the M30 Main Window Example Version 1 cfg 300 CommandHistory0 cmd2g 2DGP 0x21 CommandHistoryl cmd2g 2DGC 0 CommandHistory2 cmd2g 2DGC 0x41 CommandHistory3 cmd2g 2DGC 0x21 CommandHistory4 cmd2g 2DGC 0x60 CommandHistory5 cmd2g 2DGC 0x61 CommandHistory6 cmd2g 2DGC 0x60 or CommandHistory7 cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 or CommandHistory8 cmd2g 2DGC 0x0 CommandHistory9 cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 CommandHistory10 cmd2g 2DGC OxFE and CommandHistory11 cmd2g 2DGC 0x00 CommandHistory12 cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 OR CommandHistory13 cmd2g 2DGC 0x01 and CommandHistory14 cmd2g 2DGC 0x61 or CommandHistory15 cmd2g 2DGC 0x60 and CommandHistory16 wnd 0 jpg CommandHistory17 wnd 1 jpg CommandHistory18 cmdld FsspER auto CommandHistory19 clear error Console 0 Setup Table Reference O 559 Cloud Image Probe Grey Scale Display Table cgs 300 SEA Model 300 Cloud Image Probe Grey Scale Display Table cgs 300 Overview This display is used to display particle image data of CIPGS Image type The user can select a color for the images minimum middle and maximum shadows This display has the capability of hashing out old images via a user selectable age limit The image data is identified via the board address for the CIPGS Image data The image may be scaled The CIPGS Image display has an age counter whic
152. RES p Pitot Pressures in mb p21 SPREST r Static Pressures in mb 721 RECOVERY 1 Recovery factors Description This function computes total air temperature from static temperature pitot pressure static pressure and an installation specific recovery constant The recovery constant varies between 0 0 and 1 0 This function uses interpolation See Interpolation 0 285867 fli STEMP 273 15 x 1 RECOVERY x 1 PERES a 1 227315 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations TAT nOon F200 F 20 TTemp F100 F101 F102 1 0 Function Reference O 426 Unfold Unfolding Doppler SEA Model 300 Unfold Unfolding Doppler Synopsis Unfold V1 V2 V1 m Formula for array of values of 1st Velocity m gt 1 v2 p Formula for array of values of 2nd Velocity p 1 Description Performs the Standard Doppler Unfolding function using the ration of 5 4 Result Type Space D n n min m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Unfold UEN F300 D 10 Unfold F1002 F1003 Function Reference 427 Units Unit Conversion SEA Model 300 Units Unit Conversion Synopsis Units F TO FROM F 7 Formula of an array of values to be converted 721 TO Units F is to be converted to see below string FROM Units F was originally described with see below string Description This function takes in the F
153. Reference O 569 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Name Description ONE 1 PI PI PI 2 PI 2 RADTODEG PI 180 SPACE Space 32 or 0x20 ZERO 0 Constant Factors We will explain the computations with some basic examples DegToRad F5 F 1 0 01745329252 Latitude deg F1100 F 1 Ins429Bin A1000 20 180 0 Latitude rad F1200 F 1 F1100 F5 The first formula 5 or F5 is set to 0 01745329252 This formula will be used to convert from degrees to radians It has no units Only one element of float type The next formula 1100 or F1100 is named Latitude It has deg for units Only one element of float type In the computation we see a function Ins429Bin used This function has three parameters The first is a tag number 1000 or A1000 for the raw ARINC429 data for latitude The second is parameter indicates to use 20 bits The final parameter specifies a range of 180 0 This function will take the raw data perform the necessary conversion using the number of bits and range and then puts the result on the stack Finally the result from the stack will get copied to F1100 result space The final formula is 1200 or F1200 It has rad for units Again only one element and the type is float In the computations we see that F1100 latitude in degrees is pushed on the stack Then F5 DegToRad is pushed on the stack Finally the operator is used to multiply the two together and
154. Serial VAX Get Serial VAX data 378 Set Sets formula value 379 Sizes Returns the channel sizes from a probe table 380 Skip Skips to a particular point in the formula table 381 Slope Return slope of a line 382 SpData Access SPP100 SPP200 SPP300 CDP CDPPBP data 383 Spp100Data Accesses SPP 100 data 385 SrASCII Gets tokens from serial ASCII data 387 SrDADS Gets DC 8 DADS Serial data 388 SrData Gets serial data 389 SrIEEE Gets IEEE data 390 SrInteger Gets integer data 391 SrVAX Gets float values from micro VAX data 394 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference O 187 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page StDev Standard Deviation 395 STemp Gets static temperature 396 StrCat String Concatenate 397 StrCmp Boolean comparison of two strings for equality 398 StrCpy String Copy 219 StrParameters String Parameters 400 StrPrt String Print 401 StrSel Select string based on comparison 402 StrToD Converts string to a double precision floating point value 403 StrTok Parses a string token 404 StrToL Q Converts string to a long integer value 405 Str TOULO Converts string to an unsigned long integer value 406 StrXmlProtect Protect XML string 407 Sub Returns the difference of two arrays of formulas 408 Sum Returns the sum of an array of data 409 Sums1D Sums up ch
155. System board Type Description 1D SEA 1D Basic Interface 1D256 SEA 1D Advanced Interface 1D256 2DGREY SEA 2D Grey Interface 2DMONO SEA 2D Mono Interface AIMMS AIMMS ADP Interface ARINC429 SEA ARINC429 Interface ARINC561 SEA ARINC561 Interface Board Types Setup Table Reference 542 SEA Model 300 Board Table brd 300 Type Description ATDAQ141X ATDAQ1411 ATDAQ1412 Interfaces BALLARD708 BALLARD 708 Interface CAMACID SEA CAMAC 1D Interface CAMAC1D256 SEA CAMAC 1D256 Interface CAMACANALOG CAMAC Analog Interface CAS CAS Interface part of CAPS CASPBP CAS Particle by Particle Interface part of CAPS CIP CIP part of CAPS CIPGS CIPGS part of CAPS COUNTER SEA COUNTER Interface CYCTM Cyber Counter Interface CYDDA Cyber D A Interface CYDIO24 Cyber 24 bit Digital I O Interface CYPDISO Cyber Isolated Relay Interface DT2801 DT2801 Interface DT2817 DT2817 Interface DT2827 DT2827 Interface FALCON SEA FALCON Interface GPIBPCII GPIB PCII Interface GPS SEA LORAN GPS Interface HAIL SEA HAIL Interface HVPS SEA HVPS Interface NETWORK Network Socket Connection NRCFS NRC Frame Synch NRCPT NRC Parallel Transfer PCIDAC PCIDAC Interface PIRAQ PIRAQ Interface Board Types Continued Setup Table Reference O 543 SEA Model 300 Board Table brd 300 Type Description PIRAQ2
156. TE E batas ie 174 Type252 UE ero A aae esate aie p ale eaaa by Beet Ald Bas 175 Type 2s Telemetri Data it laa Rieke loa RE ed 176 Type 254 Secondary Acquisition voy vie a4 giana eee ede RY EEG SG oR GaSe oe eee 177 ype 25 gt Tables Data veo Y A E ep eae ae en ee 179 Function Reference Function Prototype Quick Reference sect ds Corea ss ee unease 191 Accumulate Accumulate Arrays e a e o A Me 200 Add Add Afrays a A A ada VE Mag 201 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access ooooooooomoo eee e eee eee e ees 202 Marlen cad cote el 208 APO Inverse Pressure Altitude A eds Bah wed Net SAS ote BU re ae 209 Areas O ATC A e Say UN ds do R 210 Arinc4290ut ARING 429 Output sapos tros artos 211 Arinc708Data ARING 708 Data oare r e rd GAY a ol as Mak ue a lO 212 Array AA A WEN RE ASS PETE EGOS EERE Se PETE AGS Se awe 214 AsyncData Asynchronous Data in AGS 215 NN 216 AVG Average AI A A A A A ai 217 Beattie Airer ft Bearing erer piesei AA A AAA IAE 218 Buffer Time Buffer lime cra i erkene rs ara diras 219 CArray Character Array Element Access rd do 4a eat ewaes 220 CAS Data CAS Data Access ni Vi a ieee btn ee deca ie BA Ok 221 CASPBPData CAS PBP Data Access 0 0 ccc ccc ce eee eee eee e ene 224 CIndex Character Element Access 1 tee iin oi AY A Os Sele WEISS Be 225 ClPData CIP Data Access oooooooo ooo 226 CIPGSData CIPGS Data Access 2 cece ee eee eee e ee ene 228 Table of Contents iii
157. TL events Acquisition Reference O 85 Type 33 Analog STB TC Analog Type 33 Analog STB TC Analog Description This acquisition type is used to acquire analog data It has support for the DT2817 and ATAQ141X boards Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Channel 0 3 2 Mode See Parameter 2 3 Gain See Parameter 3 Parameters Parameters 2 and 3 are used for documentation only The M300 sets the values for them based on the board configuration Parameter 2 Mode xx0 Bipolar xxl Unipolar x0x AT1412 xlx AT1411 Oxx Single ended lxx Differential input Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Gain User 0 5 1 2 Parameter 3 Acquisition Reference O 86 SEA Model 300 Type 33 Analog STB TC Analog SEA Model 300 Parameter 3 Gain 4 4 5 5 6 8 7 10 8 50 9 100 10 500 11 1000 Parameter 3 Continued Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and represents the signed digital value of the analog signal Ox7FFF 32767 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32768 full scale Data Format Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 87 Type 34 Digital Input SEA Model 300 Type 34 Digital Input Description This acquisition type is used
158. The Board Table is used to keep all the information necessary to configure the board entries In the M300 system all interfaces must be specified in the Board Table There are different board types for each different board For most boards the user can have more than one board per system of the same type at different addresses In some cases there can only be one board of a given type for example System Board The Board Table and the board configuration files are totally configured from the M300 system using the Board Setup Dialog This documentation is provided as an extra reference in case a manual override is necessary Each line in the board table must have a valid board type followed by the and the board file name Spaces can be used between the board type and the sign and the and the board file name The number of boards in a project is only limited by how many physical boards you can place in the system The M300 software places no limit on the number of boards It is not possible to have more than one board at the same board address 5 The order of the acquisition events must follow the same order as board table entries Comments will be saved out of sequence otherwise Parameters Type The type for the board The following is a list of the valid board types Boards marked with a are not supported at this time in the M300 Support for these boards will be added as needed Each gt project must have at least a
159. The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and represents the signed digital value of the analog signal Ox7FFF 32767 Full Scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32767 Full Scale Data Format Type Synchronous event Acquisition Reference O 89 Type 35 SEA Analog to Digital Input SEA Model 300 Comments To obtain the correct voltage multiply the raw count by the voltage range and divide by 65536 Voltage Range Parameter 3 Gain Multiply By 10 0 1 3 051757813E 4 5 1 2 1 525878906E 4 2 5 2 4 7 629394531E 5 1 25 3 8 3 814755474E 5 Voltage Calculation The id parameter is the id code of the particular 32 channel converter box where the channel resides At the present time the first A D converter box is id 0 the second A D converter box is id 1 etc Acquisition Reference O 90 Type 36 SEA 24 Counter SEA Model 300 Type 36 SEA 24 Counter Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the SEA 24 Counter board Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This acquisition type requires 96 bytes of data 24 4 Data Format The data acquired is four bytes per counter Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 91 Type 37 Serial ASCH Data SEA Model 300 Type 37 Serial ASCII Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire serial ASCII data
160. Trigger Type Trigger Life Value Description 0 Ignore life use other properties gt 0 Trigger on life for sync buffers Trigger Life Trigger Addresses Value Description 1 Ignore address use other properties 20 Trigger on address Trigger Address Trigger Formula Number Value Description 1 Ignore formula number use other properties 20 Trigger on formula number Trigger Formula M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 22 Trigger SEA Model 300 Trigger Frequency Value Key Description 4 OnceOnPlay Trigger once on play 1 Ignore Ignore frequency use other properties 0 Once Trigger once only gt 0 Trigger on frequency Trigger Frequency Default trigger values The default trigger values for primary trigger are O for type sync 1 for address none 1 for frequency 1 hz 0 for life ignore and 1 for formula ignore The default trigger values for secondary trigger are 2 for type never 1 for address none 1 for frequency ignore O for life ignore and 1 for formula ignore Where are trigger used Triggers are used in several different places The most common places are the formula table fml 300 and the window tables wnd Triggers are also used in the ASCII table asc 300 in the trigger commands table tic 300 and the label table 1b1 300 See Setup Tables Reference Trigger entries used in the formula table control how often and when a block of formulas
161. Upper limit Description This function calls Rand See Rand Random and uses the random value with SCALE and OFFSET to generate a new value that will always lie between MINIMUM and MAXIMUM The following formula summarize the computation fli Rand 1 SCALE OFFSET if f 1 lt MINIMUM then f i MINIMUM else if f i gt MAXIMUM then f i MAXIMUM fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n size of the result space entry Example Name Units Number Result Computations RandomTemp ye F201 F 20 RandData 2 25 32 0 100 Function Reference O 362 RandSeed Random Seed SEA Model 300 RandSeed Random Seed Synopsis RandSeed SEED SEED 1 Random number generator seeding value unsigned integer Description This function uses SEED as the new seeding value for any subsequent calls to Rand and RandData Upon successful completion the function will return the SEED value Result Type Space IA Example Name Units Number Result Computations RandSeed a F400 Ifi RandSeed F399 Function Reference O 363 Range Range SEA Model 300 Range Range Synopsis Range REFLAT REFLON LAT LON REFLAT 7n Latitudes of reference points from in radians m gt 1 REFLON p Longitudes of reference points from in radians p gt 1 LAT r Latitudes of target points to in radians r 2 1 LON s Longitudes of target points to in radians s 1 Description This function co
162. Window on page 527 Color The CIP Image probe has 1 bit per pixel Each bit can be on or off The CIP Image display allows the user to pick whatever color he desires for the images see also Color on page 528 Address The address selects the CIP Image data The user doesn t need to know the tag number for the CIP Image data just the address of the board where the CIP Image data is coming from Valid addresses are 0x7300 0x7302 0x7700 and 0x7702 other addresses possible When the user changes the address the primary trigger for the window also gets changed This allows the display to run only when there is CIP Image data available see also Address on page 528 Setup Table Reference 562 Cloud Image Probe Display Table cip 300 SEA Model 300 Timebars Along with each CIP particle there are also two slices containing the timing data for the particle The CIP display can display these in the same color as the particle use a 1 or as the background use a 0 When the time bars are shown with the background color they are not removed from the display This leaves the particles in the same position regardless of whether or not the time bars are shown Scale The user can scale the CIP Image particles by a desired value The default scale value is 1 The larger the scale value the larger the particles will appear on the display Larger particles may mean less particles per display window AgeLimit The ageLimit
163. a Description This acquisition type acquires all the binary serial data from the Cloud Imaging Probe Grey Scale CIPGS The SEA CAPS interface is used to communicate with the CIPGS by sending the necessary setup and data request commands Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The date size for the CIPGS Info acquisition event must be 190 bytes The frequency should be 1 hz There is no reason to acquire this data any faster At start up the probe sends this information After this these values never change until we re send the setup command to the CIPGS Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary sent by the CIPGS in response to the Grey Scale setup reply command check the CIPGS probe manual Use the CIPGSInfo function to retrieve the individual data elements from the CIPGS data block Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 163 Type 89 Serial Binary Data SEA Model 300 Type 89 Serial Binary Data Description This acquisition type acquires binary data from a serial port or SEA serial interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 match 0 1 2 3 Parameters Parameter 1 is used to match value of 1 the size of the data If the data read matches the data size the data is accepted Otherwise the data is ignored If match is zero then all data read is returned Data Size The data s
164. a see also State on page 528 Size Data size for acquisition event This value changes from acquisition event to acquisition event Consult the acquisition type reference manual for information on the valid data sizes for each acquisition event type When you use the acquisition setup dialog in the M300 the data size will get filled automatically for most acquisition events There are some acquisition events where the data size must be provided by the user If the size of the data is overridden care must be taken to ensure that a large enough value is specified A WARNING Not specifying enough data size is a serious problem which might cause the M300 to crash At the very least the data will be missing or incorrect Type The data type for the acquisition event Valid types are a byte 0 255 see also Acquisition Reference on page 37 Paral Para2 Para3 These are extra configuration setup parameters for the acquisition event The meaning of these parameters changes from acquisition type to acquisition type Consult the acquisition type reference manual for information on the valid parameter values for each acquisition event type In the M200 system these parameters sometimes configured how a particular interface card was setup Since we now have entries for each interface in the board table some of these parameter values are no the same as in the case of the M200 When a parameter is used to configure the acquisition event we ha
165. a for true value m 1 FFALSE p Formula for false value p21 Description This function compares two values and it returns the value of true formula FTRUE if the first value A is equal to the second value B otherwise the value of false formula FFALSE is returned This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation if A B then f i FTRUEL i else f i FFALSE i Result D n if A B n m else n p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Equal aL F130 F 15 Eq F199 F200 F400 F401 Function Reference O 268 Esi Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Ice SEA Model 300 Esi Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Ice Synopsis Esi T T 7 Formula for temperature in degrees celsius 721 Description This function returns vapor pressure of water with respect to ice in mb from temperature in degrees celsius The following computation is performed for each temperature passed esi 104 9 09718 273 16 T 273 16 1 3 56654 LOG10 273 16 T 273 16 0 876793 1 T 273 16 273 16 LOG10 6 1071 Result Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations ESI mb F130 F 1 Esi F199 Function Reference O 269 Esw Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Water SEA Model 300 Esw Vapor Pressure of Water with Respect to Water Synopsis Esi T T 7 Formula for temperature in degrees celsius 721 Description This function returns vapor pressure of water with respect to wa
166. a formula array in a tabular grid The Data No Units entry is the same as Data without displaying the units field from the formula table Setup Table Reference O 623 Text Display Table txt 300 SEA Model 300 The Table No Units type is the same as Table entry without displaying the units field from the formula table Type Usage 0 Label 1 Data 2 Table 3 Data No Units 4 Table No Units Type Font The font used to display the Text entry It is recommended that a fixed font be used to display data labels Otherwise we run into problems with erasing the previous data value Color The Text display allows the user to pick whatever color he desires for the text entry see also Color on page 528 X Y The x and y position for the text entry display in pixels The upper left corner of the text window is the origin 0 0 The Label type text entries are drawn with left top alignment This means that the x and y position mark the top left corner of the text entry For Data and Table entries the entries are drawn with right top alignment This means that the x and y position mark the top right corner of the text entry The units will be shown after the data with the same alignment as the Label entry W H The width and height of the text entry This is necessary for several reasons like the rectangular selection box and controlling the spacing between table items Index The index of the desir
167. a percent character 9 that is not part of a conversion specifier A conversion specifier is a sequence of characters in the format string that begins with a percent character and is followed in sequence by the following Zero or more format control flags that can modify the final effect of the format directive An optional decimal integer or an asterisk that specifies a minimum field width to be reserved for the formatted item An optional precision specification in the form of a period followed by an optional decimal integer or an asterisk An optional type length specification One ofh l L w N or F A character that specifies the type of conversion to be performed One of the characters cdeEfFgGinopsuxX The valid format control flags are Minus sign The formatted item is left justified within the field normally items are right justified Plus sign A signed positive object will always start with a plus character normally only negative items begin with a sign Space A signed positive object will always start with a space character if both and a space are specified overrides the space Pound sign 44 3 4 is an alternate conversion form is used Octal O For o unsigned octal conversions the precision increments if necessary so that the first digit is 0 Hexadecimal X For x or X unsigned hexadecimal conversions a non zero value is appende
168. a stream to a standard Loran GPS data format This standard Loran GPS data format is described in the Loran GPS to CAMAC interface card documentation Acquisition Reference O 47 Type 5 2D Mono Image Type 5 2D Mono Image Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono image from a 2D Mono adapter The adapter is a high performance 16 bit DMA interface using demand mode DMA This design maximizes DMA performance while minimizing system bandwidth impact Parameters The following table shows the possible values for the upper 4 bits of parameter two bit shift Parameter two should be entered as an hexadecimal number for example 0x02 would give a 2MHz Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 DMA Channel 5 7 lower nibble 2 Bit Shift Divide 0 F upper nibble 3 Rearm rate Hz oe bit shift Value Divide Factor Frequency MHz 0 16 0 250 1 1 4 000 2 2 2 000 3 3 1 333 4 4 1 000 5 5 0 800 6 6 0 667 7 7 571 8 8 500 Bit Shift Acquisition Reference O 48 SEA Model 300 Type 5 2D Mono Image SEA Model 300 Value Divide Factor Frequency MHz 9 9 444 OxA 10 400 OxB 11 364 OxC 12 333 OxB 13 307 OxE 14 286 OxF 15 267 Bit Shift Continued The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which 2D images will be
169. able mam 300 SEA Model 300 Moving Air Mass Display Table mam 300 Overview The Moving Air Mass display provides a way for the user to keep track of a moving air mass parcel This display shows a relative position between the aircraft and the moving air mass The display provides range and bearing to the target The aircraft heading and track are shown on this display The user can also select the desired number of range rings Parameters Name The identifier for the Moving Air Mass entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple Moving Air Mass displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Moving Air Mass displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Moving Air Mass display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Moving Air Mass display will not affect the HVPS display Window Link to window where Moving Air Mass display will be performed This window must be a Moving Air Mass window type see also Window on page 527 Color The color for the display see also Color on page 528 Font The font name to be used for the range and bearing text display which is part of the Mov
170. able Reference 579 Hodograph Display Table hod 300 SEA Model 300 Example Version 2 7 hod 300 Name Number Window Color Rings Range Entries AltFormula SpdFormula DirFormula hod 0 hod Red 5 170 500 F553 F5604 F5711 Setup Table Reference 580 High Speed Analog Display Table hsa 300 SEA Model 300 High Speed Analog Display Table hsa 300 Overview The High Speed Analog display produces a line graph of all the sample points for an array of analog channels This graph is useful in observing quickly changing analog signals Parameters Name The identifier for the High Speed Analog display see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple HSA displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a HSA display does also then a command set up to change the color of the HSA display will not affect the HVPS display Window Link to the window where the High Speed Analog display will be performed This window must be a High Speed Analog window type see also Window on page 527 Color Color for display see also Color on page 528 Type This parameter is used to select what gets drawn once a new point
171. able to compute masses The result is typically used for mean median mode total mass calculations as well as X vs Y display plots This function should be refreshed at the same time interval as the summation routine generates data so as to eliminate redundant calculations on the same input data The SAREA and MIDSIZE originate from the user specified channel files via the probe name number The following formula summarizes the computations F il LINEAR MIDSIZE i RANGE EXP BUFLIFE j i LEE INTERVAL CFA SAREA i RANGE TAS SYSFREQ INTERVAL CFAC fori 0 n 1 fli Result D n n min m probe channels Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Masses RG F200 F 15 Masses F100 Pr 2D F102 F1 2 0 1 4 1 0 Function Reference O 319 Max Maximum SEA Model 300 Max Maximum Synopsis F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 Description This function is used to find an return the largest value in the formula array of values Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumVa 1 a F300 F 1 Max F100 Function Reference O 320 MaxSiz Maximum Size SEA Model 300 MaxSiz Maximum Size Synopsis MaxSiz X Y MaxSiz X Y MODE X m Formula of an array for X data values m21 Y p Formula of an array for Y data values p21 MODE 1 Which computation mode to use 0 1 Description The MaxSiz function has two modes of operat
172. acos Math Function Reference 454 acosh Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine SEA Model 300 acosh Inverse Hyperbolic Cosine Synopsis B acosh B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note B must be greater than 1 0 or a domain error will occur gr Description This function computes the inverse hyperbolic cosine of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i acosh B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space DIn Example Name Units Number Result Computations ArcHypCosine en F101 F 1 F1012 acosh Math Function Reference O 455 asin Inverse Sine SEA Model 300 asin Inverse Sine Synopsis B asin B r Formula containing value or array of values n gt 1 KFP Note All Values in B must be in the range 1 1 or a domain error will occur Description This function computes the inverse sine in the range 1 2 1 2 The following formula summarizes the calculations s i asin B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Diax Example Name Units Number Result Computations InvSine ua F101 F 1 F122 asin Math Function Reference 456 asinh Inverse Hyperbolic Sine SEA Model 300 asinh Inverse Hyperbolic Sine Synopsis B asinh B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function computes the inverse hyperbolic sine of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i asinh B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Com
173. ad F100 F 1 InsPos A100 Function Reference O 300 IntegerData Integer Data SEA Model 300 IntegerData Integer Data Synopsis IntegerData A INDEX SCALE OFFSET SWAP A Acquisition tag for integer data tag INDEX 1 Index to desired integer data integer X 1 Scale multiplier value B 1 Offset value SWAP 1 Perform byte swap on data integer 0 or 1 Description This function will retrieve integer data from the data buffer and perform scaling on the data If swap is set to 1 the function will change the high byte to the low byte and the low byte to the high byte for each index fli AUNDEX i X B fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations IntegerData te F100 F 10 IntegerData A100 5 PI 0 1 Function Reference O 301 Intercept Calculate Intersect Point at Y Axis SEA Model 300 Intercept Calculate Intersect Point at Y Axis Synopsis Intercept KNOWNYS KNOWNXS STATE KNOWNYS n Known Y values KNOWNXS n Known X values STATE 1 Function control variable integer Description This function calculates the point at which a line intersects the y axis by using the best fit regression line plotted through the known x and known y values The STATE control variable is used to control the function operation mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the function performs a reset and computes a new va
174. age Accumulate A 200 Add A B 201 AIMMSData A SELECT 202 Alarm HOUR MINUTE SECOND OFFSET DURATION 208 AltP ALTITUDE 209 Areas PROBE E CFAC TAS 210 Areas PROBE E CFAC TAS FREQUENCY Areas F PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL Arinc4290ut BOARD DATA LABEL BITS RANGE 211 Arinc708Data TAG SELECT 212 Array E INDEX VALUE 214 AsyncData A OFFSET 215 Average F CYCLES STATE 216 Avg E 217 Bearing LATFROM LONFROM LATTO LONTO 218 BufferTime SELECT 219 CArray F INDEX 220 CASData A SELECT 221 CASPBPData A SELECT 224 CIndex F INDEX 225 CIPData A SELECT 226 CIPGSData A SELECT 228 CIPGSInfo A SELECT 230 Cmd1D A 231 ColDCmd BOARD COMMAND 232 Function Prototype Quick Reference Function Reference O 191 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page Co2DTAS BOARD FREQUENCY 233 Co2GCmd BOARD COMMAND 234 Co2GTAS BOARD FREQUENCY 299 CoATDAQ141X BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL 236 CoCIPGSTAS BOARD FREQUENCY 237 CoCIPTAS BOARD FREQUENCY 238 CoCYDDA BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL MODE 239 CoDo BOARD PORT BIT VALUE 240 CoDT2817 BOARD PORT BIT VALUE 241 CoFile STATE 242 Color COLORNAME 243 Comb A AINDEX AELEMENTS B BINDEX BELEMENTS 244 Concs PROBE F CFAC TAS MODE 245 Concs E PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL MODE CoPCIDACDA BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL 247 CoPMFDA BOARD VOLTAGE CH
175. age data The image may be scaled The CIP Image display has an age counter which keeps track of how many seconds have elapsed since the last valid image display The number of displays buffers that the user can see per second can be controlled via the primary trigger frequency for the window The CIP Image display is made up of several strips Each strip displays as many slices as possible Because of image compression there are a variable number of slices in the CIP Image display Slices are 64 bits pixels wide 8 bytes We have a one bit pixel mapping for the CIP Image display Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the CIP Image entry For example CIP see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple CIP displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a CIP display does also then a command set up to change the color of the CIP display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the CIP Image display table need to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the CIP Image display will be done The type of the window must be CIP Image display For example cip see also
176. ain 0 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires two 8 bit bytes Two bytes of data should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and represents the signed digital value of the analog signal Ox7FFF 327678 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32768 full scale Data Format Type Synchronous event Acquisition Reference O 142 Type 71 Pressure Multiplexer SEA Model 300 Comments To obtain the correct voltage multiply the raw count by the voltage range and divide by 65536 Voltage Parameter 3 Gain Multiplier 10 0 1 3 051757813E 4 5 1 2 1 525878906E 4 2 5 2 4 7 629394531E 5 1 25 3 8 3 814697266E 5 Voltage Matrix The id parameter is the id code of the particular Pressure Multiplexer box where the channel resides At the present time the first Pressure Multiplexer box is id 16 the second Pressure Multiplexer box is id 17 etc You can use the Volts function to convert from raw analog to volts if you set parameter 3 to the appropriate gain value and set the corresponding dip switch inside the Pressure Multiplexer box It is recommended that the acquisition events for the Pressure Multiplexer channels be placed at the end of the synchronous buffer in the acquisition table This allows for maximum efficiency when sampling a variety of acquisition events The maximum sample rate for all channels is about 250
177. aining bytes will be set to zero Comments None Acquisition Reference O 95 Type 39 Serial Integer Data SEA Model 300 Type 39 Serial Integer Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire serial integer data from the SEA serial interface card or any serial port including boards which add serial ports to the system The serial data should be blocked by nine OxAA bytes followed by a 0x55 byte Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Data Type 0 3 2 3 Throttle Lo Zoos Parameters The high nibble for parameter one is reserved and should be 0 Bit zero of the lower nibble is used to specify data type 0 integer 16 bits 1 long integer 32 bits Bit one is used to specify data swap 0 no swap 1 swap The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which integer data blocks may be recorded per second It should be significantly larger than the maximum block rate that will be received If the throttle rate is less than or equal to the actual block rate the internal FIFO will never completely empty This will increase data latency Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of bytes in the largest serial data block The data size is automatically resized to the actual number of bytes in the serial block Data Format The data acquired corresponds to the integer data sent Type Asynchron
178. al Strobes Description This acquisition type records 1D probe total strobe data Total strobe data is recorded in a 32 bit counter Total strobe data is the sum of all particles that passed through the beam of the probe regardless of whether or not the probe actually used all particles in the sizing Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to four bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 32 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments There are probes for which the total strobes are internally divided by ten In these cases the total strobes data must be corrected in the data system multiply total strobes by ten The actual total strobes should always be greater than or equal to the total counts Acquisition Reference O 127 Type 63 CAMAC 1D256 Total Counts SEA Model 300 Type 63 CAMAC 1D256 Total Counts Description This acquisition type records 1D probe total count data Total count data is recorded in a 32 bit counter Total count data is the sum of all normal strobes received It should be equal to the total of all size channels from 0 to the maximum specified for the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to
179. alculates the square root of B s i B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations SquareRoot den F101 F 5 F105 sqrt Math Function Reference 478 swap2 Swap 2 Bytes SEA Model 300 swap2 Swap 2 Bytes Synopsis B swap2 Bl r Last operand n gt 1 Description This operator performs a bytes swap on the 2 bytes of B Result Type Space D n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Swap t F101 I 15 F105 swap2 Math Function Reference O 479 swap4 Swap 4 Bytes SEA Model 300 swap4 Swap 4 Bytes Synopsis B swap4 B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This operator performs a bytes swap on the 4 bytes of B Result Type Space D n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Swap t F101 L 15 F105 swap4 Math Function Reference O 480 swap8 Swap 8 Bytes SEA Model 300 swap8 Swap 8 Bytes Synopsis B swap8 B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This operator performs a bytes swap on the 8 bytes of B Result Type Space D n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Swap t F101 I 15 F105 swap8 Math Function Reference 481 tanh Hyperbolic Tangent SEA Model 300 tanh Hyperbolic Tangent Synopsis B tanh EF B 7 Last operand n gt 1 Note Values of large magnitude may yield partial or total loss of significance Description This function returns the hyperbolic tangent of
180. alue in seconds long Description This function is used to generate true return one or false return zero events at particular time intervals with respect to the M300 time For example if an event is desired for every minute at 5 seconds after the minute mark and that will last for 10 seconds then the function call would look like Alarm 0 1 0 5 10 The formula trigger will affect this function The user can control the trigger to determine the number of times the function gets called Result Type Space D 1 Example Trigger Trigger Sync 1 None Name Units Number Result Computations GenerateAlarm F100 TELJ Alarm 0 1 0 5 10 Function Reference O 208 AltP Inverse Pressure Altitude SEA Model 300 AltP Inverse Pressure Altitude Synopsis AltP ALTITUDE ALTITUDE n Formula of an array of values containing altitude in ft 721 Description This function computes static pressure from altitude 5 25486 fli 1013 25 1 ALTITUDE mb 1 45458 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations StaticPressure mb F200 F 1 AltP F100 Function Reference O 209 Areas Areas SEA Model 300 Areas Areas Synopsis Areas PROBE E CFAC TAS Areas PROBE E CFAC TAS FREQUENCY Areas K PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL PROBE Probe name number probe F m Formula of an array of sums for each channel m21 RANGE 1 Range used in probe d
181. alues from the integer counts When changing ranges you must change both the jumpers and the acquisition parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and represents the signed digital value of the analog signal 0x7FFF 32767 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32767 full scale Table 6 Data format Acquisition Reference O 106 Type 44 1D256 Analog Input SEA Model 300 Notice that 12 bit analog data is being placed into 16 bit integer values The data is placed in the upper 12 bits so the data can be treated as a 16 bit signed integer Type Synchronous event Comments Note that channel zero is used for 1D reference voltage and is divided by a factor of two prior to conversion This means a 10 volt reference signal will be recorded as 5 volts Multiply the 1D reference voltage by a factor of two in the formula table Acquisition Reference O 107 Type 45 CAMAC VOR Data SEA Model 300 Type 45 CAMAC VOR Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire VOR bearing data Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Slot 1 23 2 Channel 1 4 3 Parameters Parameter one represents the CAMAC slot number and can be a value from one to 23 Parameter two represents the port number VOR Heading channel and can be a value between one and four
182. ameters are controlled through the Board Table You must have an entry in the Board Table for the CAPS and CAS Acquisition Reference 150 Type 77 CIP Serial Data SEA Model 300 Type 77 CIP Serial Data Description This acquisition type acquires all the binary serial data from the Cloud Imaging Probe CIP The SEA CAPS interface is used to communicate with the CIP by sending the necessary setup and data request commands Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters In the M300 after 11 27 06 these parameters have status information for the acquisition Parameter 1 setup 1 data 2 Parameter 2 bad checksum 1 invalid data size 2 missing ack 3 reset flat 4 Data Size The date size for the CIP acquisition event must be 180 bytes The maximum theoretical acquisition frequency for CIP is 31 Hz The maximum suggested acquisition frequency is 25 Hz Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary sent by the CIP in response to the data request command check the CIP probe manual Use the CIPData function to retrieve the individual data elements from the CIP data block Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference e 151 Type 78 CIP Image Data SEA Model 300 Type 78 CIP Image Data Description This acquisition type acquires the Cloud Imaging Probe CIP image The SEA CAPS interface is used to commun
183. and they are a lot more expensive to render The basic naming convention is to use the Font name or abbreviation followed by font size and then any style modifier For example for Courier you could use cour20b or cour12 The first would give you Courier 20 point size and bold The second would provide a basic 12 point size Courier font M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 36 Acquisition Reference Acquisition Reference The following is a list of the acquisition type routines different instruments presently available SEA Model 300 supported Type Description Parameter Parameter2 Parameter3 Page Type 0 Date Time Reserved 41 Type 1 CAMAC Analog E205 E210 slot channel gain 43 Type 2 CAMAC 1D Counts slot command interface 44 Type 3 CAMAC Digital Events E100 slot port 46 Type 4 CAMAC Loran C GPS slot command type 47 Type 5 2D Mono Image interface factors rearm 48 Type 6 2D Mono TAS Factors interface 50 Type 7 2D Mono Elapsed Time interface 51 Type 8 QD Mono Elapsed TAS 100 interface 2 Type 9 2D Mono Elapsed Shadow OR interface 53 Type 10 2D Mono Total Shadow OR interface 54 Type 11 2D Mono House Data interface type 56 Type 12 DT2801 Analog channel gain 57 Type 13 DT2801 Digital Events port 58 Type 14 Loran C GPS command control type 59 Type 15 Encoding Altimeter 62 Type 16 INS Arinc Serial
184. annels for data 410 Sums2D Sums up channels for 2D Mono data 411 Sums2G Sums up channels for 2D Grey data 412 Sums2GAdv Sums up channels for 2D Grey Advanced data 415 SumsHVPS Sums up channels for HVPS data 418 System Access M300 system information 419 TamdarData Tamdar data access 420 TasP Pitot Pressure from TAS 422 Test Returns a predicted set values 423 Time Creates a string containing the time 424 Timer Timer fuction 425 TTemp Total Air Temperature calculations 426 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference 188 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page Unfold Performs a Doppler Unfolding computation 427 Units Converts one unit of measure to another 428 VaxTime Creates a string containing the VAX Time 430 Vax TimeDiff Returns the difference between VAX and M300 time 431 VectorAngle Calculates a vector angle 432 VectorLen Calculates a vector length 433 Vols Computes volumes 434 Volts Converts analog values to volts 435 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference O 189 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Reference O 190 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Quick Reference The following table lists the functions prototypes for quick reference purposes Function Prototype P
185. ans aster septs wi deuce andes Won state aie Gy wae eR any ote arse hdd piste aces Sette ha te a Table of Contents ix M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File br caos iio res a A 545 Button Table DUO yt il ia sde Stolen 552 Butter Table buf 300 a ir See Ges 556 Project Configuration Table cfg 300 cia za 559 Cloud Image Probe Grey Scale Display Table cgs 300 0 eee ee eee oro 560 Cloud Image Probe Display Table cip 300 ooooooooccoorocccanoccc eee 562 Command Table Tenia SU A AA SI A RNA EA 564 Formula Table tm 00 wae es ites A ls Atala eee gs tE adds awa aa ates 566 Formula Watch and Alter Table fwa 300 ooooooooooooooommomomm ooo 575 Histogram Display Table his 300 E AS A Ed 577 Hodograph Display Table hod 300 corrida ta da arts 579 High Speed Analog Display Table bsa 500 00 0 sess twa sete ei 581 Height Time Indicator Display Table hti 300 2 2 4 52 0400 e0s00 22s sence e eds 583 High Volume Particle Spectrometer Display Table hvp 300 0 00000048 585 Label Table ULSA oda yeti aad aera aa ata A he Oe Sie 587 List Table Usb 0O ord 25 5 ent pe pod oo etek Be AAO Oe ee Ol eG Oo eee eas 590 List Table Configuration File lst ted tanh a ee ce A ee clk AMA cect 592 Lookup Table up 300 side ais Mes CHGS Lew ads i een eked eee Meee VES 593 Lookup Files lup 22s 4a Ber oon Hewes aah ue eels tee a Sele aoa tee 594 Moving Air Mass Di
186. ar 1D Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 226s AS Pie oi la 336 OdIVarAdv 1D Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 0 00 e eee eee 337 OdRett ID Reference Voltages arado tasas 338 Odsums O ID SUMs bt a a a A a is 339 PAI Pressure Aids a A ata SAA 340 Plast Pressure Indicated Airspeed cd da A AS a 341 P ly Polynomial eet dt sr AI OS ae oe ee Rate Gate as 342 PosAvData POSAV Data Access 0 ccc ccc omo 343 Power POWER A A AGA tt ida Tle A la a 345 PqConfig Piraq Configuration Dai a ls tata 346 PqPowerl Piraq Powel sc1i h seve sec enced e a a Reed 347 PaRance Piraq Range sna vate wee A ld e o ii de wee Rew Sa 348 PaRaw Piraq Raw Datat io A LAS 1484 4 Ge eae eas aa 349 PqReflectivity Piraq Reflectivity 222 2000 torio Ones dedi acota 350 PaStattsOs Pirag STA AS AAA ARA AA 351 Prats Probe datas a e a o etnies Wide a e 352 ProbeData Probe Data da it Ge fe dad daria 353 PromoBins Promo BIOS A A vn aa on Sed es 354 PromoData Promo Data 355 Protec Protect Values a e o re 356 PrTasGlockial Probe TAS Clock Iria iria beet kee odode eee tess 357 PrTasClockOut Probe TAS Clock Out e520 43 45 aa 358 PTas Pressure Amspeeds di e ged eee hed ia eda EASA 359 RaConst antO Radar Constant a catarata dase boxe buses 360 Rana ly Random txtp htt aces eno Ae och a oe ey CA a e AA wens ole A ei oa N 361 Rand Dati Random Dats eta ASG Ad a wee OT ae 362 RandSeed Random Seed it ita tots adas 363 Range
187. ar A STROBEINDEX TOTALSTROBEINDEX CFAC INTERVAL A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag STROBEINDEX 1 Strobe count channel index integer TOTALSTROBEINDEX 1 Total strobes count index integer CFAC 1 Correction factor INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Description This function computes the inverse velocity acceptance ratio from 1D data This value can be used to correct concentrations volumes and mass calculations The following formula summarizes the computations A TOTALSTROBEINDEX CFAC f A STROBEINDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations InverseVelAccRatio ma F200 F 100 OdIVar A100 15 16 1 1 Function Reference O 336 OdIVarAdv 1D Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio SEA Model 300 OdIVarAdv 1D Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio Synopsis OdIVarAdv STROBETAG TOTALSTROBETAG CFAC INTERVAL STROBETAG Total valid strobe counts tag tag TOTALSTROBETAG Total strobe counts tag tag CFAC 1 Correction factor INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Description This function computes the inverse velocity acceptance ratio from 1D advanced data This value can be used to correct concentrations volumes and masses calculations The following formula summarizes the computations TOTALSTROBETAG CFA f STROBETAG GRRE Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations IVAR Ma F100 F 1 OdIVarAdv A1006 A1005 1 1
188. arding data sizes Data Format The format of acquired data is dependent on the command sent to the Loran GPS card For data format information refer to the Loran GPS adapter card documentation Acquisition Reference O 60 Type 14 Loran C GPS SEA Model 300 Type Synchronous event Comments This adapter converts incoming data stream to a standard Loran GPS data format This standard Loran GPS data format is described in the Loran GPS adapter documentation Acquisition Reference e 61 Type 15 Encoding Altimeter SEA Model 300 Type 15 Encoding Altimeter Description This acquisition type is used to acquire encoding altimeter data from an encoding altimeter adapter mounted in the back plane Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The format of acquired data is an unsigned two byte word returning the altitude in feet Type Synchronous event Comments This adapter converts the Grey coded encoding altimeter output into a unsigned integer represented the altitude in feet Acquisition Reference O 62 Type 16 INS Arinc Serial SEA Model 300 Type 16 INS Arinc Serial Description This acquisition type is used to acquire serial data from the Arinc and Arinc429 interfaces These adapters contain on board RAM which captures the serial data transmitted from the INS
189. are described in the following table B3 B2 Description 0 O Before version 2 50 25ps clock fixed Any data created with ver sion 2 50 and above will not have zeros for these bits 0 1 Version 2 5 and above 25ps clock Default value if b3 and b2 are both zero for version 2 5 and above 1 0 2 5ps clock 1 1 0 25ps clock Valid Clock Sources Acquisition Reference 133 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced SEA Model 300 Prior to version 2 50 the elapsed counter since start of buffer SOB was a 32 bit counter counting TAS clock 256 gated by probe on With the new version of the software the elapsed counter SOB is a 32 bit counter counting the selected clock frequency no gating on probe on The elapsed counter SOB is always reset at the start of a new buffer With the new faster clock frequencies there is the possibility for a counter overrun to occur The user should be aware of this situation The interrupt channel and the DMA channel should match the switch settings in the interface card Care should be taken to avoid duplicate use of these channels The system will not operate properly and may crash The following table shows the possible values for the upper 4 bits of parameter 2 The 2D Grey interface takes two clock cycles to unload one bit from the probe In fact the bit shift rate is half of the clock frequency Value Divide Factor Freq
190. array for Y data values p gt 1 MODE 1 Computation mode integer 0 or 1 Description Computes the median X value using the Y array values as the weighting coefficients for the X array values Uses linear interpolation This function has been upgraded to allow a mode parameter to be passed in If MODE is set to zero the area old style is used or if it is set to one counts is used for the median computation Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Median mm F300 F 1 Median F100 F200 Function Reference O 325 Min Minimum SEA Model 300 Min Minimum Synopsis Min F F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 Description This function return the minimum value from the formula array of values Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Minimum KE F901 F 1 Min F100 Function Reference O 326 MinSiz Minimum Size SEA Model 300 MinSiz Minimum Size Synopsis MinSiz X Y MinSiz X Y MODE X m Formula of an array for X data values m21 Y p Formula of an array for Y data values p21 MODE 1 Which computation mode to use 0 1 Description The MinSiz function has two modes of operation Mode 0 This function is used to find the smallest value in the X array corresponding to a non zero value in Y array This is done by searching the Y array from the beginning to the end until a non zero value is found
191. asc n a n a Ascii Output Config Files 540 brd 300 brd n a Board Setup Table 542 brd n a dsp eee Board Config Files 545 cap def btn 300 n a n a Button Display Table De buf 300 n a n a Buffer Setup Table 556 cfg 300 n a n a Project Configuration Table 559 cgs 300 n a n a CIP Grey Scale Display Table 560 cip 300 n a n a CIP Display Table 562 cmd 300 n a n a Command Table 564 fml 300 n a n a Formula Table 566 fwa 300 n a n a Formula Watch amp Alter Table ie his 300 n a n a Histogram Display Table 577 hod 300 n a n a Hodograph Display Table ate hsa 300 n a n a High Speed Analog Display Table 581 hti 300 n a n a Height Time Indicator Display Table 583 hvp 300 n a n a HVPS Particle Display Table 585 161 300 n a n a Label Display Table 587 Ist 300 Ist n a List Display Table 590 Ist n a n a List Display Config Files 592 lup 300 lup n a Lookup Table 593 lup n a n a Lookup Config Files 594 mam 300 n a n a Moving Air Mass Pointer Display Table 595 pdi 300 n a n a Probe Distribution Display Table 597 pos 300 tet map n a Position Display Table 599 tgt map n a n a Target Map Files o M300 Setup Tables Continued Setup Table Reference O 524 Setup Table Reference SEA Model 300 M300 Setup Tables Continued File Name Config File Other Files Setup Table Page ppi 300 n a n a Plan Position Indicator Display Table 607 prb 300 chn p
192. ason for developing the data directory structure was the desire and necessity of facilitating generalized access to the recorded data In the past data acquisition systems generally used a fixed data format where each recorded value had a fixed place in the buffer One problem that frequently occurred was that someone would change a parameter or add additional information to the buffer This meant that project data was recorded in more than one format The problem this causes with post processing software is obvious M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 18 Trigger SEA Model 300 Trigger Triggers explained The Trigger concept is one of the most important in the M300 system This is a new concept feature that didn t exist in the M200 system so every user needs to read this section and get familiar with this new idea If you are not familiar with the data buffers structures for the M300 system please refer to the data buffer section See Data Buffer before you go on In the M200 Data Acquisition System and Playback the data path through the system was very specific but different in each instance The M200 was designed first without the necessary considerations for the Playback system When the Playback was built it required a different software package with a different way to handle the data The M200 had nice structures with links to the data from all different kinds of places This made data access very easy and fast which is what we wante
193. ast operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing bit wise AND operation of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations s i A i amp BUi fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations And u F101 I 1 F105 OxFA amp Math Function Reference 447 Boolean OR SEA Model 300 Boolean OR Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing bit wise OR operation of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations sli A i B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations ory IRN F101 I 1 F105 OxFA I Math Function Reference O 448 A Boolean Exclusive OR SEA Model 300 A Boolean Exclusive OR Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing bit wise Exclusive OR operation of the two given arrays element by element The bit position of the A is X OR ed with the same bit position in B This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation T
194. ay3 Third Order Array Scaling SEA Model 300 ScaleArray3 Third Order Array Scaling Synopsis ScaleArray3 X A B C D X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of third order coefficients p21 B r Formula of an array of second order coefficients 721 C s Formula of an array of first order coefficients s21 D z Formula of an array of offset values 1 KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Scale3 Third Order Scaling Description This function returns an array of values representing the third order scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli AL0X1i1 BUX Cli X i D 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p n s t Example Name Units Number Result Computations ScaleArray3 yew F200 F 10 ScaleArray3 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 Function Reference O 372 Seconds Seconds SEA Model 300 Seconds Seconds Synopsis Seconds A0 AO Date time acquisition tag number 0 always tag Description This function is used to get seconds since midnight Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Seconds uu F100 F 1 Seconds A0 Function Reference O 373 SerialASCII Serial ASCII SEA Model 300 SerialASCII Serial ASCII Synopsis SerialASCIT A INDEX DELIMITER COUNT MODE A Acquisition tag for Se
195. be performed on the window which last had the focus The following describe the different window operations close Closes the specified windows Note that these windows can then be opened either by another defined command i e wnd 0 10 open or by using the M300 graphical interface No data updates are performed on windows that are closed open Opens the display windows front Brings the specified windows to the front of the screen back Puts the specified windows behind all other windows in the display minimize Minimizes the display windows Note that these windows are not closed and can be restored quickly Data updates are still performed on windows that are minimized Command Manager Reference O 517 Display Window Commands SEA Model 300 maximize Maximizes the data display windows restore Restores the specified windows to the display print Print the specified windows to the default printer bmp Capture the specified windows to bit map format files If a single window is captured the file name may be given If the file name is omitted the system will automatically generate a file name using date and time jpg Capture the specified windows to JPEG format files If a single window is captured the file name may be given If the file name is omitted the system will automatically generate a file name using date and time tif Capture the specified windows to TIFF format files If a single window is captured the
196. ber Result Computations DayOfYear men F300 I i DayOf Year A0 Function Reference O 259 Delay Delay SEA Model 300 Delay Delay Synopsis Delay E CYCLES F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 CYCLES 1 Number of seconds integer gt 1 Description This function is used to delay the value of a formula by the specified number of cycles The system keeps the desired number of values in memory and gives the delayed value as the return value The function returns zero until the number of CYCLES have elapsed by The current trigger will affect the meaning of CYCLES Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations 1MinDelay AT F200 F 10 Delay F200 60 Function Reference O 260 Delta Delta SEA Model 300 Delta gt Delta Synopsis Delta E CYCLES F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 CYCLES 1 Number of seconds integer gt 1 Description This function computes the difference of the current formula value and the formula value observed CYCLES previously The function returns zero until the number of CYCLES have elapsed The function returns zero until the number of CYCLES have elapsed The current trigger will affect the meaning of cycles Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Delta ud F200 F 10 Delta F100 60 Function Reference O 261 DewPointToRH Dew Point to Relative Humidity SEA Model 300 DewPointToRH Dew Point to Relative H
197. betes ib he Rearend ee eae kee to 139 Type O BCG20AT limas Cotas woo hates ead Arete etsy EE 140 Type LO DRVI Data at 8 vals SS FRG FSS GAARA Gd See SE 141 Type 71 Pressure Multiplexer ataco 8tRo de ra Kueed eer Das ooo roda Ge 142 Type 7 2ACUIN GIN ES Cli fae SA SSA NA anes 144 Type 73 1NS INI Serial 143 ir id teehee eh eet eee a ee 4 145 Type 7 ONS AINE ca dia nd ii a demas 146 Type75 SPP CDP Data stops ire dia td ea aa 147 Type 70 LAS Seral Data cs dd cs a 149 Type 77 CIP Seral DA A A OU 151 Table of Contents ii M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Type 78 CIP Image Dit SS A A AA de 152 Type79 CAS PBP Data esti pia Dt ai cate la aye vs 153 pe O Bl AOS Mata pi its idos 154 Type 81 Serial Port Tamdar Data Le be av pe 155 Type 82 Serial Port AIMMS Data ited cas A E es SEER 156 Type 83 Network POSAV Data ioiiecit ari 158 Type 84 Network AS CIM Data mos cus o s gait wats a a aaa d pa A E eee 159 Type 85 Network Binary Data 460 eee a a pee aes eee Ee 160 Type 86 CIPGS Seal Dato criado rene wont ato acond 161 Type 87 CIPGS Image Dat O A o EI ES 162 ype 68 CIPGS Info Data e e e ire SS A IO ee al 163 Type 89 Serial Binary Ds do a te aiii 164 Type 90 Network Binary Buffered Data cotos tasrciol all 165 Type 100 PIRAQ T QO amd Presi y AS o dd 166 Type 101 MIRADO COn o ish A AAA AAA AAA 168 Type TO2APTAOSS tU us eb ici E la Oe en aa 170 A Dire peat want E 172 Type251 Command Data 2234 ir Mem eked dadas KE
198. ble See Buffer Table buf 300 on page 556 The recommended way to make changes to the acquisition events is in the acquisition setup menu in the M300 system WARNING The order of the acquisition events must follow the same order as board table entries Comments will be saved out of sequence otherwise gt WARNING Manual modifying this table by adding or removing an acquisition entry also requires modification of the buf 300 table gt Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the acquisition event entry This name can be used in other tables to access the raw data For example Temperature see also Name on page 527 Setup Table Reference 535 Acquisition Event Table acq 300 SEA Model 300 Tag Tag number for acquisition event This number can be used in other tables to access the raw data The tag number must be unique Dont use a reserved tag number link to reserved tags see also Tag on page 528 Frequency Desired frequency value for acquisition event integer value This can be between 1 and the maximum system frequency specified in the system board entry Valid frequency values are entered in the acquisition setup dialog for the current system board frequency State The state controls whether a particular acquisition event is active on 1 or off 0 If you turn off a particular acquisition event then there will be no directory nor data entry for this event in the raw dat
199. ble Reference O 565 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Formula Table fml 300 Overview The Formula Table is used to perform any necessary computations Each line in the formula table is a formula entry variable Each formula entry is made up of a name number for identification and can have units The result field determines both the type and number of elements that make up the formula value data The computations are done at the end of the formula entry using Reverse Polish Notation RPN For additional information on RPN please reference our Reverse Polish Notation on page 1 There is an extensive set of general purpose functions that can be used to do predefined tasks The parameters to the functions are passed after the function name and are inside parentheses It is important to note that no spaces are allowed between the function name and the opening parentheses In addition to the general purpose functions there are also a large number of Math functions that can be used in the computations Math functions are used differently than regular functions because they operate on the stack To use a Math function you simply use the math function name when you want to use it Math functions can be used any where except as a parameter to a function This differs from Regular functions because they must have the parameters passed inside the parentheses and cannot be nested inside other functions The user does not have to defi
200. bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 32 bit integer value representing the net counts in the specified direction Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference e 103 Type 43 1D256 Counts SEA Model 300 Type 43 1D256 Counts Description This acquisition type is used to acquire 1D counts from the 1D256 interface card sometimes also called 1D Advanced This card is capable of interfacing with all 1D types probes It provides a maximum of 256 channels of particle size information and a maximum of 256 channels of particle temporal spacing information All counters are 32 bits in length Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Size Count 0x0 F lower nibble 1 Strobe Counts 0x0 F upper nibble 2 Probe Commands 0x0 F lower nibble 2 1D Interface 0x0 7 upper nibble 3 Source 0x0 4 lower nibble 3 Divide Factor 0x0 F upper nibble Parameters The acquisition parameters for the 1D256 Counts are not set up by the user The system will copy the parameter information from the associated board table See Board Table Configuration File brd We do this to document the way the board probe is set up and to keep with M200 compatibility The lower nibble for parameter one is used to set the number of size channels to be acquired The number of channels is the value specified in the lower nibble plus one multiplied by 16 The upper nibble for parameter one is used to set the n
201. c print of a VALUE to a string result space for the formula The FORMAT parameter is a string that will need to follow the guidelines for the c programing language printf function The VALUE cannot be a string type Result Type Space Sin Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations StringPrint yeu F1000 S 32 StrPrt A 05 0f F2000 Function Reference O 401 StrSel String Select SEA Model 300 StrSel String Select Synopsis StrSel VALUE SELECT STRING VALUE 1 Integer value for comparison SELECT 1 Integer select value for comparison STRING n String to copy to result space 721 string Description This function compares the integer values value and select If the comparison is true then the string provided is copied to the result space Otherwise nothing is done Result Type Space S n n length of the parsed string Example Name Units Number Result Computations DLW yee F9103 S 6 StrSel F9102 1 DLH OZR ner F9103 S 6 StrSel F9102 2 OZR PXT nor F9103 S 6 StrSel F9102 4 PXT SAE Mee F9103 S 6 StrSel F9102 8 SAW Function Reference O 402 StrToD String to Double SEA Model 300 StrToD String to Double Synopsis StrToD STRING StrToD STRING OFFSET STRING 1 String to be converted m21 string OFFSET 1 Byte offset into string to start conversion integer Description This function takes a string of characters given by STRING and converts the
202. can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple PDI displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a PDI display does also then a command set up to change the color of the PDI display will not affect the HVPS display Window Link to window where Probe Distribution display will be performed This window must be of the Probe Distribution type see also Window on page 527 Color Color used for display see also Color on page 528 Type This field is used to specify the plot type for the Probe Distribution entry Name Type Horizontal Bars 1 Step Horizontal and Vertical Bars 2 Type Width Line width for the X vs Y entry This is normally 1 pixel wide Larger value for line width will require more drawing and slow down the display You should keep this in mind when changing the line width Setup Table Reference 597 Probe Distribution Display Table pdi 300 SEA Model 300 Probe This is the probe name from the probe table See Probe Distribution Display Table pdi 300 on page 597 This is used to associate a probe table entry with an Probe Distribution display entry The Probe Distribution display uses the data
203. ce Engineering Associates Inc M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Table of Contents Miscellaneous Reference Data Britt RS A EIA AS A ts fe Bac 12 Data LOMA ani tar let phe eee Aaah da e a ae Gade pcs ee dara eed 15 A iae A IR i eM Lids meen Ald ee 19 Reverse Polish Noto 21 0 8 ety ate bisa ee ay ww Oe Lae BE bee RY wo ae 32 A AS 33 Font yla A A bene EE 36 Acquisition Reference Type 0 Date lime Reservo le e e ado aa o ay A Eds 41 Type 1 CAMAC Analog EZONE Desi il ds lea ad diia Lied 43 Type AMAS ID Connor lada atop aw ade ate dl ach polis Das da 44 Type 3 CAMAC Digital Events E100 ces cuke pss edo rd tarde 46 Type 4 CAMAC Loran GIGS uss coe A A AI IS 47 Type OD Mono Image e Jan ASS A A A a 48 Type 6 2DMono TAS Factors ar hated sr urls rara tadas 50 Type 7 2D Mone Elapsed ines Ad A do 51 Type 8 2D Mono Elapsed TAS 100 soii salis tar ghee balls eee aa oes 52 Type 9 2D Mono Elapsed Shadow OR arc cert dete na otha eae a ae Sates Senet aware 53 Type 10 2D Mono Total Shadow DR e CU ee a AN di o O 54 Type CD Mono House Data e A eek A A AA 56 di AI A Bore he etek te wh ek lise ea wae a 57 Type 13 DY 2801 Digital Events 2 vsisceucesinkee cists bencibieditciaeveauiia ts 58 Type t4 Lotan CAGES A A e Sg Naat A eed AGS Ware R DE a AL 59 Type 15 Encoding Aleta dt gags dente hoes Ce Ree Ge es 62 Typel6 UNS satin Sena ra Sock twa Cae de whey cad es 63 Type 7 UN Sr MO as OCA ter NAL i te
204. ce card Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 DMA Channel 5 0 7 2 Channel 1 4 3 Throttle Jl Zi Parameters The channel parameter is used to specify the High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer channel Valid values are 1 through 4 The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which High Volume Precipitations may be recorded Data Size The data size should be an even number that represents the maximum number of words to acquire Common values range from 128 to 4096 bytes Data Format The data recorded has the same format as specified by the High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer documentation It is encoded data of the number of pixels to clear and set in a given slice Timing data and image data are mixed They are identified by the upper bits in the word Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference 115 Type 53 SPEC HVPS Image Data SEA Model 300 Type 53 SPEC HVPS Image Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the SPEC High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer via the 2D interface card Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 DMA Channel 5 7 lower nibble 2 Bit Shift Divide 0 OxF upper nibble 3 Rearm Rate Hz 7 Parameters The following table shows the possible values for the upper 4 bits of parameter two Parameter two sh
205. cess SEA Model 300 Example Name Units Number Result Computations CasData WORM F300 F 1 CasData Aq CasData 12 Function Reference O 223 CASPBPData CAS PBP Data Access SEA Model 300 CASPBPData CAS PBP Data Access Synopsis CASPPBData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for CAS PBP data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 3 Description This function allows access to individual items of the CAS PBP data block including house data The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different CAS PBP data fields Please check the CAS PBP manual for further information If you have more than 1 hz data only the first sample is used Data Field SELECT Data Count 0 Forward Counts 1 Backward Counts 2 Inter Particle Timer 3 CAS PBP Data SELECT Options Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations CasPbpDataCount F300 L 1 CasPbpData Aq CasPbpData 0 Function Reference 224 ClIndex Character Element Access SEA Model 300 CIndex Character Element Access Synopsis CIndex F INDEX F 7 Formula of an array of characters char or string 721 INDEX 1 Index number of element being referenced integer gt 0 Description This function allows access to individual elements of a character array Returns a character referenced by INDEX in the string referenced by the formula E f F INDEX Resul
206. cifier If no precision value is given a precision of 0 is used The precision value affects the following conversions Integer For d i o u x and X integer conversions the precision specifies the minimum number of digits to appear Floating Point fixed For e E and f fixed precision floating point conversions the precision specifies the number of digits to appear after the decimal point character Floating Point variable For g and G variable precision floating point conversions the precision specifies the maximum number of significant digits to appear String For s string conversions the precision specifies the maximum number of characters to appear Setup Table Reference O 530 2D Grey Probe Display Table 2dg 300 SEA Model 300 2D Grey Probe Display Table 2dg 300 Overview This is used to display particle image data for 2D Grey types advanced or regular The user can select a color for each intensity level This display has the capability of hashing out old images via a user selectable age limit The image data is identified via the board address for the 2D Grey data The image may be scaled The 2D Grey display has an age counter which keeps track of how many seconds have elapsed since the last valid image display The number of displays buffers that the user can see per second can be controlled via the primary trigger frequency for the window A secondary trigger of one second is necessary for the age
207. communications board KP Note The user must specify the correct control byte in this parameter in order to establish commu nication Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of bytes in the largest serial data block The actual number of bytes per sample will always be the same regardless of the number of bytes received For the ATI Sonic the maximum number of data bytes is 10 Two bytes for the synchronization pattern and two bytes for each different field 0x8000 U V W T This acquisition type should not be sampled at frequencies above 10 Hz for the ATI Sonic The byte order for each field is reversed Acquisition Reference O 99 Type 40 Sonic Wind System SEA Model 300 For the CSAT3 Sonic the maximum number of data bytes is 10 Two bytes for each different field U V W T F Data Format The data acquired corresponds to the binary data sent by the Sonic instrument Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference e 100 Type 41 Falcon Data SEA Model 300 Type 41 Falcon Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the SEA Falcon interface card Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Clock Mode 0 2 2 Clock Divider 0 255 3 Throttle D2 Parameters This routine uses parameter one as the clock mode two as the frequency divider and parameter three as the throttle The clock mode is
208. cond a buffer started You must not specify this acquisition event in the acquisition table since it is automatically inserted in the data stream Care should be taken in order not to use tag 0 Time data will always be represented by the reserved tag 0 Acquisition Reference O 42 Type 1 CAMAC Analog E205 E210 SEA Model 300 Type 1 CAMAC Analog E205 E210 Description This acquisition type is used to acquire analog data from a DSP E205 analog to digital converter interface card mounted in a CAMAC crate The E205 can support up to 256 analog channels using 16 E210 multiplexers Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 2 E205 Channel 0 255 3 E205 Gain 0 1 2 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes of data should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is in the following format 0x7FFF 32767 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32768 full scale Data Format Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 43 Type 2 CAMAC ID Counts SEA Model 300 Type 2 CAMAC 1D Counts Description This acquisition type is used to acquire particle sizing data from a CAMAC 1D interface card The CAMAC 1D interface card is capable of interfacing to FSSP ASASP 1D C 1D B and IPC probes Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 p Probe command 0 15 3 1D Interface numb
209. conds have elapsed since the last valid image display The number of displays buffers that the user can see per second can be controlled via the primary trigger frequency for the window The 2D Mono display is made up of several strips Each strip displays as many slices as possible There are a total of 1024 slices in the 2D Mono display Slices are 32 bits pixels wide 4 bytes We have a one bit pixel mapping for the 2D Mono display Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the 2D Mono entry For example 2DC 25 see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple 2DM displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple 2DM displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a 2DM display does also then a command set up to change the color of the 2DM display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the 2D Mono display table need to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the 2D Mono display will be done The type of the window must be 2D Mono display For example 2dg25 see also Window on page 527 Color The 2D Mono probe has 1 bit per pixel Each bit can be on or off
210. d for a real time system When the Playback came around we could not build such structures and links from the data The Playback had to look through the data and find the desired tags and data offsets This meant two software packages two different data paths two sets of different data functions etc Although this approach worked it proved to have several disadvantages First since the data paths were different it was always very difficult to ensure that the same thing as being done Second it was necessary to have two sets of code which were very similar but with different functions This was necessary to be able to handle the differences between Playback and Acquisition modes Our desire initially when the Playback was built was to have one software package that handled the data in the same way for Acquisition and Playback modes This was not possible given all the circumstances When it came time to do the M300 system these ideas were already in place and therefore we had to make some choices This is how the Trigger concept was born out of the need to be able to have the same data path in different modes of operation using a singular software package The basics about Triggers There are two triggers the primary or trigger 1 and secondary or trigger 2 triggers Each trigger has five main properties that can be used for matching type life address formula and frequency Each trigger occupies a full line and only one Some of t
211. d address Each board entry must have unique address In some instances the board address is preferred way to specify a board as opposed to the board name This parameter is specified in hexadecimal notation and it starts with a Ox for example 0x1700 would typically refer to the first 2D board State The state field is used to control whether or not an entry is active on use 1 or off use 0 Other state values may be possible defined in the future Formula The formula number or name from the formula table See Formula Table fml 300 for the data to be used Formula numbers must start with the F character followed by a number for example F2000 In the M200 system the valid formula numbers where in the range of 0 to 65535 Setup Table Reference 528 Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files SEA Model 300 216 _ 1 The M300 can have formulas in the range of 0 to 2147483647 23 1 Formula names must be valid identifiers with a maximum of 31 characters You can use spaces in formula names but this may be a problem if you want to refer to the formula by name Format The format control string consists of Ordinary characters These are written exactly as they occur in the format string Conversion specifiers These cause argument values to be written as they are encountered during the processing of the format string An ordinary character in the format string is any character other than
212. d with a Ox or OX respectively for e E f g or G any floating point conversions the result always contains a Setup Table Reference O 529 Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files SEA Model 300 decimal point character even if no digits follow it normally a decimal point character appears in the result only if there is a digit to follow it In addition to the preceding for g or G conversions trailing zeros are not removed from the result Field Width If no field width is specified or if the value that is given is less than the number of characters in the converted value subject to any precision value a field of sufficient width to contain the converted value is used If the converted value has fewer characters than are specified by the field width the value is padded on the left or right subject to the left justification flag with spaces or zero characters 0 If the field width begins with a zero the value is padded with zeros otherwise the value is padded with spaces If the field width is a value of type int from the argument list is used before a precision argument or a conversion argument as the minimum field width A negative field width value is interpreted as a left justification flag followed by a positive field width Precision Specifier As with the field width specifier a precision specifier of causes a value of type int from the argument list to be used as the precision spe
213. digital board Based on the value of BIT the function will replace that bit position of the control byte to the value of VALUE Once that is complete the function will output the new byte to the digital board Function will return the new byte being output to the digital board This function can be used for the ATDQ141X CYPDISO CYDIO24 PCIDAC PMF and DT2817 boards Result Type Spaces L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DigitalOutput en F101 L 1 CoDo Bd DT2817 1 5 1 Function Reference O 240 CoDT2817 Control DT2817 SEA Model 300 CoDT2817 Control DT2817 Synopsis CoDT2817 BOARD PORT BIT VALUE BOARD Board name for DT2817interface board PORT 1 Port number integer BIT 1 Bit position of event bit to be set integer 0 7 VALUE 1 Set mode on off integer 0 or 1 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See CoDo Control Digital Output Description This function reads in the current state from the digital board Based on the value of BIT the function will replace that bit position of the control byte to the value of VALUE Once that is complete the function will output the new byte to the digital board Function will return the new byte being output to the digital board This function can be used for the DT 2817 board Result Type Spaces L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DigitalOutput us F101 L 1 CoDT2817 Bd DT2817 1 5 1 Function Reference O 241
214. display manager to have the 2D Image data displayed and then we look for the 2D Image data tag No We can just look for buffers of type 5 asynchronous 2D Mono buffers and then send these to be displayed This cuts down on the amount of work the system needs to do to look for the correct data not to mention other problems Understanding address matching Just as we can perform a trigger based on the buffer type we can also perform a trigger based on the acquisition event s address This allows use to select data from a particular board address Frequency We use the frequency as a way to throttle the amount of data we look at In the case of the 2D Image data we may have 20 50 buffers per second During real time acquisition we don t want to display 50 buffers per second we can display a few based on the users needs On the other hand the data processing can look at all the 2D Image data So different parts of the system can select the type and amount of data that they need to look at to perform the necessary task This all works the same way for all different modes of operation acquisition playback and udp There is only one data path through the system There is only one software application to use one set M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 13 Data Buffer SEA Model 300 of code and data functions to maintain The user can customize the type of data and the amount of data that different parts of the system get by using the trigger mechani
215. dow coordinates Split The split values are used for the displays that utilize the split feature on the M300 data displays The format is split x split value y split value A value of 1 instructs the M300 to use auto mode while a positive value 7 instructs the M300 to offset the display from the x or y labels by pixels Closed Closed keeps the window open closed state If a window is closed this would be a one otherwise a zero for open windows Minimized This keeps the window minimized state A one indicates the window is minimized and a zero indicates the window is normal GridState This keeps track of the grid state A one indicates the grid is turn on and should be displayed A zero indicates no grid desired Background Window background color see also Color on page 528 Grid Window grid color see also Color on page 528 Text Setup Table Reference O 629 Window Table Configuration File wnd Window text color see also Color on page 528 XScale YScale X axis and y axis scale Name Scale LINEAR 0x00000001 LOGARITHMIC 0x00000002 TIME 0x00000004 DIVISIONS 0x00000010 UNITS 0x00000020 PIXELS 0x00000040 BINS 0x00000080 Scale XMode YMode X axis and y axis mode XTypeMinor XTypeMajor y TypeMinor y IypeMajor X axis and y axis type for both minor and major grids Name Type SOLID 0x00000100 DOTTED 0x00000200
216. ds that will be carried out in sequence The number of command entries in a single command block can contain 1 to n commands where z is limited only by memory constraints The command blocks are carried out in the following manner Trigger PriType PriFreq PriAddress SecType SecFreq SecAddress command argg arg arg command argg arg arg command argg arg arg The commands can contain from 0 to m additional arguments that will then be used in the command execution where m is the maximum number of arguments accepted for a particular function See Commands Some arguments are optional while others are required See the function specification for details For each defined function definition more than one command block may be defined The pound sign is used to delimit one command block from another The command blocks are executed based on the number of times the defined trigger has fired The first time the trigger fires the first command block will execute the second time it fires the second command block will execute and so forth Again the command blocks may rang from 0 to 7 where 7 is limited only by memory Setup Table Reference O 621 Triggered Command Table tic 300 SEA Model 300 constraints When the defined trigger fires 2 1 times the first command block will execute and the cycle will start over All function calls are not case sensitive The syntax for the command blocks is as foll
217. dwidth impact Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 DMA Channel 0x5 0x7 lower nibble 2 Bit Shift Divide 0x8 0xF upper nibble 3 Rearm Rate Hz oa Parameters The following table shows the possible values for the upper 4 bits of parameter 2 The 2D Grey interface takes two clock cycles to unload one bit from the probe In fact the bit shift rate is half of the clock frequency Value Divide Factor ee 0x0 16 0 250 0x1 1 4 000 0x2 2 2 000 0x3 3 1 333 0x4 4 1 000 0x5 5 0 800 0x6 6 0 667 0x7 7 0 571 Bit Shift Acquisition Reference O 68 Type 20 2D Grey Image SEA Model 300 Value Divide Factor ee 0x8 8 0 500 0x9 9 0 444 OxA 10 0 400 OxB 11 0 364 0xC 12 0 333 0xD 13 0 307 OxE 14 0 286 OxF 15 0 267 Bit Shift Continued The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which 2D Grey images will be recorded Data Size This routine acquires a variable length image block depending on the bytes per sample field of the acquisition table and the number of slices in an image The actual data acquired is the minimum of the two sizes Data Format Slices are 128 bits wide and first bit of each slice is stored in the lowest bit of a sixteen byte slice while the last bit is stored in the highest bit of a sixteen byte slice Type Asynch
218. e two benefits from doing this The first is that we can save CPU time by not executing a sequence of formulas all the time if the value doesnt change The second is that there are times when we really only want to initialize a formula and make sure it doesnt run again The third case for frequency is OnceOnPlay 4 This is similar to the Once trigger and the trigger executes only once each time the play is hit M300 Sync Buffer Information Sync 1 Hz buffer The Sync 1 Hz buffer has a life equal to the system frequency from the system board table So if the system frequency is set for 200 hz then the life for the Sync 1 hz buffer is 200 This would be the standard Sync 1 Hz trigger once per second Trigger Sync 1 None Never Ignore None If you want a 0 5 hz once every two seconds trigger off the sync buffer you can use Trigger Sync 0 5 None Never Ignore None If you want a faster trigger than 1 hz you can t use the Sync 1 Hz buffer The following is example will only trigger at 1 hz even though the trigger is asking for 5 hz The reason being that the Sync 1 hz buffer occurs only once per second so that is the maximum possible trigger off the Sync 1 Hz buffer M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 25 Trigger SEA Model 300 Trigger Sync 5 None Never Ignore None Sync buffer faster than 1 hz Sync 10 Hz buffer 10 times per second Say we want a buffer that is faster than the 1 hz Sync buffer Let s say we wa
219. e 32 bit word is an unsigned long integer whose value represents the number of 25 s ticks that have passed between the arming and filling of a 2D Mono probe Type Asynchronous slave event Comments This acquisition should be performed once at the end of each image From the combination of the date time data and the elapsed time data one may determine the actual time when the probe became full Acquisition Reference O 51 Type 8 2D Mono Elapsed TAS 100 SEA Model 300 Type 8 2D Mono Elapsed TAS 100 Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono elapsed TAS 100 value from a 2D Mono adapter Elapsed TAS 100 is the number of true airspeed clocks divided by 100 that have passed since the time the probe was armed and the probe became full Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 32 bit word Four bytes must be allocated per sample Data Format The 32 bit word unsigned long integer counts the number of TAS clock tick that have passed between the arming and filling of the 2D Mono probe Type Asynchronous slave event Comments This acquisition should be taken at the end of each image The true air speed clock gives an indication of the spatial separation between when the probe was armed and when the probe became full You can convert elapsed TAS 100 to a distance in the same units as the pixel size by using the fol
220. e 527 Color25 Color50 Color75 The 2D Grey probe has 2 bits per pixel Each bit is assigned an intensity level 25 50 and 75 The 2D Grey display allows the user to pick whatever colors he desires for each intensity level The color for each intensity level maybe the same as another or even the background color The use of Setup Table Reference 531 2D Grey Probe Display Table 2dg 300 SEA Model 300 the background color for the lowest intensity level could be useful in removing undesirable noise from the display such as splash stuck diodes etc see also Color on page 528 Address The address selects the 2D Grey data The user doesnt need to know the tag number for the 2D Grey data just the address of the board where the 2D Grey data is coming from Valid addresses are 0x2300 0x2700 and 0x2B00 other address possible When the user changes the address the primary trigger for the window also gets changed This allows the display to run only when there is 2D Grey data available see also Address on page 528 Timebars Along with each 2D Grey particle there are also two slices containing the timing data for the particle The 2D Grey display can display these in the same color as the particle use a 1 or as the background use a 0 When the time bars are shown with the background color they are not removed from the display This leaves the particles in the same position regardless of whether or not the time ba
221. e F300 F 1 Protect F300 1 0e 6 Function Reference O 356 PrTasClockIn Probe TAS Clock In SEA Model 300 PrTasClockIn Probe TAS Clock In Synopsis PrTASClockIn A A Acquisition tag for the TAS factors data tag Description This function retrieves the multiply and divide factor from the data based on the user specified tag It then uses the retrieved multiply and divide factors to calculate and return the TAS clock frequency in MHz The following formula summarizes the computation y MULFAC 0 05 DIVFAC Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations TASClockFreg MHz F100 F 1 PrTasClockIn A100 Function Reference O 357 PrTasClockOut Probe TAS Clock Out SEA Model 300 PrTasClockOut Probe TAS Clock Out Synopsis PrTASClockOut PROBE TAS PROBE Probe name number probe TAS 1 True air speed Description This function calculates the TAS clock frequency based on the user specified TAS Upon completion this function returns the calculated TAS clock frequency in MHz This function updates the internal probe value for y size which will be used by other functions The TAS values is first limited based on the TAS limit value from the probe entry The frequency value generated by this function should be used as an input to the Control TAS functions such as Co2DTAS The following formulas summarize the computation FREQUENCY 145 SIZE TAS ySize _
222. e Gh ADRS A ee RE A e AIMS Commands anti AS wade dota hee eae ad tee eat ASGIL Commands o A A A Ree tee ea eae es es Cloud Imaging Probe CIP Commands escri iia ads Cloud Imaging Grey Scale Probe CIPGS Commands 20d oe ee eee Control Commands da e hath a atte tl Ele O peratidns Commander is A eee eR d RETA Formula Commands uri derirgerarcter debia bid iia Formula Watch and Alter Display Commands uds id E A es General Commands visi A A E AEE A A A A A ia Tabel Display Command sa tao sl a ee bado oe List Display Commande 20s adios a NA eA cacti ek tee oS Ad Ae tere a A te A e Ey Main Window Commands reco LA eee et dy Gay Moving Air Mass Display Commands sierto ale eGo yal Bore Position Display Commands sii 26 perno rr daa eee heeds bebe ts Screen Console Commands 2 LAA A nid ud INES Skew T Display Commands Sa faa eit tae ae ee Cae eee wee Strip Chart Display Command ora ae ee Text Display En AAA A O Display Window Commands ii Peed A A A a A ees AA xs plan Commands rd dBi ride rai Setup Tables Reference Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files o oooooooooooooo o 2D Grey Probe Display Table 2dg 300 52s in IAN 2D Mono Probe Display Table 2dm 300 3 02 vec ae ee eh ta Acquisition Event Table Acq 300 daras riadas ui ties eae oad deus ASCH Output Table Case G00 ir it cd ah E A a tdo e Ae E tA ASCII Output Table Configuration File asc 24 444 4 4 Se ewe ee eee eee oe Board Table brd 300
223. e M300 naming convention standard The format is the same as M200 system Example Version 1 prb 300 Name Number RangeMax Channels Size Sync tasLimit FileName fssp100 0 4 15 0 0 0 fssp100 prb 2dc 1 1 32 25 Oxff 125 2dc prb pcasp100 3 1 15 0 0 0 pcasp100 prb 2dp 2 i 32 200 Oxff 200 2dp prb Setup Table Reference O 610 Probe Channel File prb SEA Model 300 Probe Channel File prb Overview For each probe entry there is a Probe Channel configuration file The file provides information about the channel sizes and other pre computed parameters used for computations Parameters Number This field is used to define the channel number of the data following on the same line Minimum This field is used to specify the minimum channel size diameter Maximum This field is used to specify the maximum channel size diameter Middle This field is used to specify the average channel size diameter This average can be a linear or geometric average depending on whether the channels are arranged in a linear or logarithmic fashion dD This field is used to specify the linear difference of the maximum and minimum channel sizes dD Maximum Minimum dLogD This field is used to specify the logarithmic difference of the maximum and minimum channel sizes dLogD log Maximum log Minimum Area This field is used to specify the area of a circle of average diameter 2 AREA 1 OLE 7 MIDD
224. e Number Formula Result Computations FloatArray at F200 F 1 Farray F100 3 Function Reference O 276 Flndex Float Element Access SEA Model 300 FIndex Float Element Access Synopsis FIndex F INDEX F 7 Formula number of an array of values float 721 INDEX 1 Index number of element being referenced integer gt 0 Description Uses the element INDEX to reference that particular value in an array of float data f F INDEX Result D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FloatIndex U F300 F 1 FIndex F100 24 Function Reference O 277 Ge Greater Than Equal Ge Greater Than Equal Synopsis Ge A B FTRUE FFALSE A 1 First value used in comparison B 1 Second value used in comparison FTRUE m Formula for true value m21 FFALSE p Formula for false value p21 Description SEA Model 300 This function compares two values and it returns the value of true formula FT RUE if the first value A is greater than or equal to the second value B otherwise the value of false formula FFALSE is returned This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation if A gt B then fli FTRUE i else ffi FFALSE i Result Type Space D n if A gt B n m else n p Example Name Units Number Result Computations GreaterThanEqual IEM F130 F 1 GE F100 F101 Function Reference O 278 F200 F201 GetData Get Data GetData Get Data Synopsis GetData A OFFS
225. e cip 300 18 Hodograph hod 300 19 Skew T skt 300 20 Moving Air Mass mam 300 21 Formula Watch amp Alter fwa 300 22 Reserved 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Cloud Imaging Probe Grey Scale cgs 300 Window Types Continued Setup Table Reference O 627 Window Table wnd 300 SEA Model 300 Example Version 2 wnd 300 Name Number Type PiraqARaw 0 16 PiraqAPower 1 16 HtiPower 2 2 HtiDoppler 3 2 HtiReflectivity 4 2 PiragAConfig 5 13 PiragAStatus 6 13 Arinc429 7 13 fwa0 8 21 fwal 9 21 Setup Table Reference O 628 Window Table Configuration File wnd SEA Model 300 Window Table Configuration File wnd Overview The window configuration files are used to keep all the properties for a window This includes window position size etc Parameters Trigger The primary trigger is used to determine how often the display will be done for a particular window For example in the case of text data for a FSSP probe the user may trigger the window once per second On the other hand for a 2D Image the trigger is selected for 2D Image data type and the frequency would select the maximum number of buffers displayed Certain display types require a secondary trigger For example in the case of the 2D Image a secondary trigger of 1 Hz is required to keep track of the image age and to perform the hashing Area The area is used to keep the window position x y and the window size w h These are specified in win
226. eater than the largest X size found so far The X size computation may be modified by the minimum middle and maximum bits of the MODE parameter If the minimum bit is set all three shadow levels are counted minimum middle and maximum If the middle bit is set two shadow levels are counted middle and maximum Similarly if the maximum bit is set only the maximum shadow is counted For the X size method these are the only three valid modifiers One of these methods will be picked depending on which bits are set minimum is checked first then middle and finally maximum Function Reference 283 GrSums 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations GrSums Wt F100 F 64 GrSums Pr 2dg A100 0x01 1 0 Function Reference 284 Gt Greater Than Gt Greater Than Synopsis SEA Model 300 Gt A B FTRUE FFALSE All B 1 FTRUE FFALSE p Description First value used in comparison Second value used in comparison Formula for true value m21 Formula for false value p21 This function compares two values and it returns the value of true formula FTRUE if the first value A is greater than the second value B otherwise the value of false formula FFALSE is returned Result Type Space if A gt B then ffi FTRUEL i else f i FFALSELi D n if A gt B n m else n p Example Name Gr
227. eaterThan Number Result Computations F130 F 5 Gt F100 F101 F201 F202 Function Reference 285 HSAnalog High Speed Analog Scaling SEA Model 300 HSAnalog High Speed Analog Scaling Synopsis HSAnalog A X B A Acquisition tag for High Speed Analog data tag 2 byte integer X 1 Formula for scaling value B 1 Formula for offset value Description This function converts analog counts data to floating point units in volts fli A i X B fori 0 n 1 samples Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations HighSpeedAnalog nyt F100 F 20 HsAnalog A100 3 0517578E 4 0 Function Reference O 286 HvMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask SEA Model 300 HvMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask Synopsis HvMask A A Acquisition tag for HVPS data tag Description This function will look at all existing HVPS data and try to find a diagnostics buffer with the current mask information The current HVPS mask is retrieved as an array of 16 integer words 16 bits each word for a total of a 256 bit mask Result Type Space I 16 Example Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSMask rn F100 IT 16 HvMask A100 Function Reference 287 HvpsMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask SEA Model 300 HvpsMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask Synopsis HvpsMask A A Acquisition tag for HV
228. econd order scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli A101X101 B 5 X 1 Cli fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r s Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Scale2 mn F200 F 10 Scale2 F100 F101 F102 Function Reference O 368 F103 Scale3 Third Order Scaling SEA Model 300 Scale3 Third Order Scaling Synopsis Scale3 X A B C D X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of third order coefficients p21 B r Formula of an array of second order coefficients 721 C s Formula of an array of first order coefficients s21 Di4 Formula of an array of offset values 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing the third order scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli A ilX i Bli X i C X 1 D i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p 7 s 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Scale3 a F200 F 10 Scale3 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 Function Reference O 369 ScaleArray First Order Array Scaling SEA Model 300 ScaleArray First Order Array Scaling Synopsis ScaleArray X A B X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of gain values p21 B r Formula o
229. ed m s 4 F 1 Ground Track deg 5 F 1 HFOM m 6 F 1 VFOM m 7 F 1 Navigation Mode 8 LU Satellites 9 F 1 Datum Number 10 F 1 AIMMS 20 Id 02 GPS Navigation Packet para3 02 Select Function Reference 203 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access Data Field SELECT Flow Rate ml min 0 AIMMS 20 Id 04 Purge Flow para3 04 Select SEA Model 300 AIMMS 20 Id 05 Internal Probe Temperature para3 05 Select Data Field SELECT Result Temperature Celsius 0 F 1 Relative Humidity 1 F 1 Barometric Pressure pa 2 F 1 Pitot Pressure pa 3 F 1 AOA Pressure Diff pa 4 F 1 Sideslip Pressure Diff pa 5 F 1 AIMMS 20 ADP Id 11 ADP Raw Data Packet para3 11 Select Data Field SELECT Result Temperature Celsius 0 F 1 Relative Humidity 1 F 1 Barometric Pressure pa 2 F 1 TAS m s 3 F 1 Data Field SELECT Result Heater Block Temperature Forward Celsius 0 F 1 Heater Block Temperature Aft Celsius 1 F 1 Low Temperature Threshold Celsius 2 F 1 AIMMS 20 ADP Id 12 Airdata Corrected for Dynamic Effects para3 12 Select Function Reference 204 SEA Model 300 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access Result Type Space See select tables above Example Name Units Number Result Computations Aimms 20 Trigger Trigger AIMMS 10 Aimms20 Ignore Never None
230. ed entry from the formula 0 for the first element The formula must be an array of values and the index must be valid For no index use a 1 Formula Formula link for data to be shown see also Formula on page 528 Format The format is optional If the format is blank the default format will be used based on the formula type see also Format on page 529 Setup Table Reference O 624 Text Display Table txt 300 SEA Model 300 Rows Columns Number of desired rows and columns for table entry display Syntax Description Formula Result Conversion Result s String s 5 s Hello d Decimal base 10 1 11 100 25d 00100 x Hexadecimal base 16 1 1 1 254 02x FE Vf Float single precision F 1 120 322 3 2f 120 32 g Float double precision D 1 210 119191 3 59 210 11919 Format Syntax Example Version 2 txt 300 Type 0 Label Name Number Window Type Font Color X Y TAS Ll text 0 1u20 OX00FFFF 3 21 Name Number Window Type Font Color X Y W H Counts 1 text 0 courl4 OXFEFEBD 252 281 42 15 Type 1 Data Name Number Wndw Type Font Color X Y Index Formula RawPC 0 text 1 1u20 OxCCCC 201 235 1 F1011 Name Number Wndw Type Font Color X Y Index Formula Format Command 0 text 1 1u20 0x7FFE 433 110 1 F1009 0x302X Name Number Wndw Type Font Color X Y W H Index Formula TasClk 1 text 1 1u20 Ox7FFO 209 45 10 20 1 F1102 Name Number Wndw Type Font Colo
231. efinition table integer CFAC 1 Correction factor TAS 1 True air speed value INTERVAL 1 Interval of summation used by sums routine integer FREQUENCY 1 Frequency of summation used by sums routine Note For function calls without a RANGE argument the range is passed via the probe entry argument Note For function calls without an INTERVAL or FREQUENCY argument a value of 1 will be used for either one Description This function uses the summed up channel counts and the probe definition table to compute areas The result is typically used for mean median mode total area calculations as well as X vs Y display plots This function should be triggered at the same time interval as the summation routine generates data so as to eliminate redundant calculations on the same input data The AREA and SAREA originate from the user specified channel files via the probe entry The BUFLIFE and SYSFREQ refer to the values entered in the system table The SYSFREQ is associated with the system frequency in the time data This comes from the frequency values in the system board entry The BUFLIFE is associated with the buffer life in the time data In the M300 system the buffer life and system frequency are the same for synchronous buffers F i AREA i RANGE 1 __ m a un BUFLIFE SAREA i RANGE TAS SYSFREO IVAL CFAC fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n min m probe channels Examp
232. encies of 20 hz and 25 hz are possible For system frequency of 160 hz buffer frequencies of 20 hz is possible but 25 hz would not be possible For system frequency of 160 hz the next possible frequency after 20 hz is 32 hz Count For each buffer number there are several buffer available in shared memory The buffer count controls the number of buffers that will be made available in shared memory The user doesn t have to play with these values much but 4 to 8 buffers of each type should be sufficient Record The M300 system gives us the capability to record or not buffers from a particular buffer number Broadcast Just like with the record option the broadcast option allows the user control over which buffer types will be broadcast over UDP Sync This parameter tell the buffer manager whether a buffer is synchronous 1 or asynchronous 0 Buffer zero must be synchronous Board The buffer manager needs to have a link to the board entry For synchronous buffers there is no particular board associated with the buffer entry so there is no board entry address 0x0000 In the case of asynchronous buffers the board entry for the master acquisition event is required Setup Table Reference O 557 Buffer Table buf 300 SEA Model 300 The following field s are part of the acquisition event entry Event This is the name for the acquisition event from the acquisition table The name is case sensitive and it must match the acqu
233. er Number of Bytes The number of bytes field contains the actual number of data bytes acquired This field will be zero if there is no data The number of bytes will always be less than or equal to the number of samples times the bytes per sample M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 16 Data Format SEA Model 300 Number of Samples The samples field specifies the number of desired samples The actual number of samples may be less than this field To get the actual number of samples divide the total number of bytes by the bytes per sample Bytes per Sample The bytes per sample field is indicative of the data size This field is used to jump from one data sample to the next By adding to the data pointer the number of bytes per sample one can obtain a pointer to the next sample of the same data type The number of samples should be checked before incrementing the data pointer in order to avoid getting a pointer to the wrong type of data or just the wrong data Data Type The data type can be used to identify the data and double check it against the known type for the tag number Different data types have different data formats and therefore it is important to check the data type as well as the number of bytes before using the data This is particularly important when checking data integrity Parameter One Two and Three Any data types may use these parameters to store encoded information regarding the data at any particular moment in time W
234. er 0 7 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires forty two bytes of data for each sample and 42 bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is in the following format Byte Offset Value 0 1 Size 1 Count 2 3 Size 2 Count 4 5 Size 3 Count 28 29 Size 15 Count 30 31 Strobe Count Data Format Acquisition Reference O 44 Type 2 CAMAC 1D Counts Byte Offset Value 32 33 Spare 1 total strobes 34 35 Spare 2 activity 36 37 Spare 3 38 39 Spare 4 40 Range command value 41 Reference voltage value Data Format Continued SEA Model 300 Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 45 Type 3 CAMAC Digital Events E100 SEA Model 300 Type 3 CAMAC Digital Events E100 Description This acquisition type is used to acquire digital event data from a DSP E100 digital event interface card mounted in a CAMAC crate The DSP E100 contains two 16 digital input ports This routine reads in sixteen bits of data from either of these two ports Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 2 E100 Ports 0 1 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires two bytes of data for each sample and two bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is a packed sixteen bit event word with each event occupying one bit Event 0 1st event occupies the lo
235. er ed td tia 285 HSAnalog High Speed Analog Scaling cai dia Dd ty ands seiteuad 286 HvMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask oooooooooommmomo o 287 HvpsMask High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Mask ooooommmcommmoo ooo 288 HvpsTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing ooooooomoo o o 289 HvSums High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums 0 00000 cece ee eee 290 HvTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing 00 291 JArray Integer Array Element Access 224 2 24k8 edi se lt bdedivenude dl eeneeeeias 292 IasP Inverse Pressure Indicated Aspeedso32cn2 Veer ie aaaeeeaa 293 Index Integer Element ACC AAA A is AA AAA 294 Incloud In Cloud Prediction ra scsi LOGS OE eG Ee a 295 as 4290BH0 INS 429 MD A ds SO eS at Cae gol LIO esto DM 28 296 InsBCDO INS BED Dat lc td Vi AGA triada Mien AL Wel aii dats 297 is Bits INS Dina Deba Dada mara ua e ta e aia ee ao 298 InsBin2 INS Binary 2 Data a SA A A A AA A 299 InsPos INS BCD Position 300 InteserDatal Integer D ta y A A Be SEAS SL Bee GA 301 Intercept Calculate Intersect Point at Y Axis ou 2 sGorendrnnt dae esecnneuiass 302 ROSITA A A A AA 303 IVar1DO Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D 11 eee eee 304 IVar1 DAdv Advanced Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D 0 000008 305 KeyIndex Sorted Array Indexing ei Je cto he tale a A tial echt ee e SM attr 0 doo 30
236. er of values integer Description This function can be used to easily initialize a formula value The INIT variable specifies the value to initialize the formula to If the formula is an array of values then all values in the array are set to the INIT value If the formula is an array of values then the INC variable specifies the increment to use after the first value For example if INIT is 0 and INC is 5 then the array would have a sequence of values such as 0 5 10 etc Typically the entire array of values is initialized by the function The COUNT variable can be used to limit the number of values initialized in the array Result Type Space Result space varies and is set by the formula used Example Name Units Number Result Computations AmplitudeCounts 151 F1000 F 51 Set 0 Function Reference O 379 Sizes Sizes SEA Model 300 Sizes Sizes Synopsis Sizes PROBE RANGE PROBE Probe name number probe RANGE 1 Size range in table integer Note Deprecated M300 Function Replacement See PrData Probe Data Description This function is used to retrieve the middle channel sizes MIDSIZE from a probe definition table and store in a array for other formula and display routines to use To get the other parameters for the probe table use the PrData function See PrData Probe Data See Probe Table prb 300 in Table Reference on page 609 and See Probe Channel File prb
237. er selector integer Description This function retrieves data from a GPS NMEA Sentence The IDSTR is used to pick the data from the correct NMEA sentence This should match the sentence ID from the NMEA format The INDEX is used to select the desired field from the data For the first field use 1 for the second field use 2 and so on The COUNT indicates the number of data entries to get This allows us to get multiple data entries at a time making it more efficient and using less formulas when possible The MODE allows for different types of data Please see the table bellow For hexadecimal numbers the HEX selector can be used to retrieve a hexadecimal value as opposed to decimal Having the correct trigger is critical to getting the correct data This means use the sentence ID to trigger on the exact NMEA sentence For an alternate function for getting NMEA data See Nmea NMEA Sentence MODE Data Type Bytes 1 String 0 Time 1 Date reserved 2 Char 1 3 Unsigned Char 1 4 Integer 2 5 Unsigned Integer 2 MODE Function Reference O 392 A SrNmea NMEA Sentence SEA Model 300 MODE Data Type Bytes 6 Long 4 7 Unsigned Long 4 8 Float 4 9 Double Float 8 MODE Note Data for this function must be in serial NMEA format You cannot use this function to unpack data for the SEA GPS Interface You must use the traditional way for SEA GPS interface data
238. ere are four types of entries in this file The map entries the position entries data entries and marker entries Map entries are the primary entry They are used to specify the window the center of latitude longitude setup the north south and east west miles as well as provide the map file The position entries are the secondary entries They are attached to the preceding map entry and will be displayed in the window specified in the map entry The data entries are used to display data labels along the flight path They must follow a position entry It s possible to have multiple data entries per position entry The marker entries are used to display markers on the map for a given position entry It s possible to have multiple marker entries if necessary In the M200 system there was only one entry with all the necessary information Sometimes some of the information had to be repeated omitted several times for different position entries This help define the separation of map position and data entries for the M300 system Map Entry Map entries are used to specify the display window center of latitude longitude north south and east west miles as well as the map file The map entry is responsible for drawing the map in the window Only one map entry per window is allowed Multiple map entries windows are possible Name The name used to identify the map entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify
239. ero the M300 will use Parameter 2 to delimit each block of serial data If both Parameter 1 and 2 are set to zero the M300 will use the buffer size to delimit each data block The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which DC 8 DADS serial data may be recorded per second It should be set significantly faster than the actual data rate Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the total number of characters in the DC 8 DADS block including carriage returns and line feeds Data Format The data acquired is ASCII data The data format is not relevant to the acquisition type Type Asynchronous master event or synchronous event This data type provides improved flexibility over the M200 version because it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous events If an Asynchronous master event is used the buffer automatically resizes for the number of bytes coming in This also implies that the bytes per sample are the largest block of data to be collected This acquisition event must be the first event of an asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Acquisition Reference e 131 Type 65 Serial Port DC 8 DADS Data SEA Model 300 If a Synchronous event is being used the buffer size is not dynamic and must have the bytes per sample set t
240. ers Data Format The data format varies accordingly with the data source float integer long character Type Synchronous event Comments Note that float data and long integer data have the same size 4 bytes but different values for parameter one Also integer and long integer data have the same value for parameter one but the data size is two for integer data and four for long integer data Acquisition Reference O 176 Type 254 Secondary Acquisition SEA Model 300 Type 254 Secondary Acquisition Description This acquisition type is reserved for the secondary acquisition data Secondary acquisition data is derived data from the raw data formulas The data source for the secondary acquisition data must come from one of the formulas in the formula table Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Type 0 9 2 3 Parameters The following table describes the acceptable values for parameter 1 it s corresponding secondary acquisition type These values are different from the M200 values Be sure to check before using Value Type Range 1 String Variable bytes N A 2 Character 1 byte 128 127 3 Unsigned Character 1 byte 0 255 4 Integer 2 bytes 32 768 32 767 5 Unsigned Integer 2 bytes 0 65 535 6 Long Integer 4 bytes 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 7 Unsigned Long Integer 4 bytes 0 4 294 967 295 8 Float 4 bytes 1 17x10 8 3 40x10 9 Do
241. erval If the STATE control variable is a 1 then the sums are accumulated If the STATE control variable is a 2 this causes the last summation value to be held Any other transition in the control variable clears the internal summation and starts the accumulation process all over again The FIRST parameter can be used to avoid returning the summation value for channel zero this may be desired with the advanced 1D256 interface Use a value of 0 to return all counts Use a value of 1 to skip the counts for channel zero If the acquisition type is a CAS probe then this parameter is used to select which channels will be used If the FIRST control variable is a 0 then the forward channel counts will be added if the variable is a 1 then the backward channel counts will be added and if the variable is a 2 then the inter arrival counts are added Result Type Space D n n number of samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations Counts uon F100 F 15 Sums1D A100 1 0 0 Function Reference O 410 A LP Sums2D 2D Sums SEA Model 300 Sums2D 2D Sums Synopsis Sums2D 2D ELAPSED MODE PROBE INTERVAL 2D 2D image tag tag ELAPSED 2D elapsed time tag tag MODE 1 Mode value integer PROBE Probe name number probe INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See MoSums 2D Mono Sums Description This function builds up an appr
242. es Sometimes this may or may not be desirable If we have an acquisition event defined as Dew Point with tag number 100 and then we want to use it in the formula table we must use A100 as opposed to trying to use Aq Dew Point The formula table would see the Aq Dew Point as two tokens and this would cause all sorts of problems If you are not familiar with hexadecimal and binary notations then we recommend you find a source of information for this and learn the basics The M300 system uses hexadecimal numbers everywhere In C the hexadecimal numbers start with Ox and this is the notation we use for the M300 system The maximum number of characters in a line is 1023 1024 1 This should be sufficient for most if not all tables The following parameters described are seen in almost all of the setup files We have listed them here as a quick reference Other setup parameters that are specific to a particular type of board can be found in their respective sections Comments Comments can be entered in almost all setup files Anything after a semi color will be treated as a comment and ignored by the system for processing You can specify a comment anywhere on a line Instances where comments are not allowed will be specifically documented It is not recommend to place comments at the end of files They are allowed as comments but will be lost when the system saves the tables Name The name is the identifier for the en
243. ese integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 Window The window where the Button entry will be placed see also Window on page 527 Type The button type selector This is a bit by bit field Bit zero is used to select a Toggle button 0x0001 Bit one is used to select a Repeat button 0x0002 Bit two is used to select a Status button 0x0004 The user can pick the bits for the desired features State The state controls whether the button is displayed If state is zero the Button entry is not visible otherwise it is visible Font The font used to display the button label Setup Table Reference O 552 Button Table btn 300 SEA Model 300 Color OnColor OffColor The user can select the text color on color and off color properties for the button see also Color on page 528 OnLabel OffLabel Text entries which will be used for the on and off labels for the button Style The style of the button Button Style Standard 0 Diamond 1 Box Round Tick Check AIAJ eR oO N Indicator Button Style Group This field can be used to group together several button This would create a group of button which would act as mutually exclusive This means only one button can be selected at a time For example you have a group of four buttons to control the range on a FSSP probe Then you can set the group to FSSP for all these button
244. eturn the portion of the string before the token It is important to note that only one string at a time can be parsed using this function Result Type Space S n n length of the parsed string Example Name Units Number Result Computations String tn F300 S 300 A1200 str WA F301 S 300 StrTok F300 n r Ser nen F302 S 300 StrTok NULL n r Str nen F303 S 300 StrTok NULL n r tre Malt F304 S 300 StrTok NULL n r Str quae F305 S 300 StrTok NULL n r Function Reference O 404 StrToL String to Long Integer SEA Model 300 StrToL String to Long Integer Synopsis StrToL STRING StrToL STRING OFFSET StrToL STRING OFFSET BASE StrToL STRING OFFSET BASE STRINGLEN STRINGCOUNT STRING m String to be converted m21 string OFFSET 1 Byte offset into string to start conversion integer BASE 1 Base to convert value to integer 0 2 36 STRINGLEN 1 Number of characters to use integer 0 for auto length STRCOUNTT 1 Number of samples integer Description This function takes a string of characters given by STRING and converts the string into it s long integer representation The function recognizes STRING containing an optional white space followed by an optional sign and a sequence of digits and letters alphanumeric For example the user may need to perform a computation on a value that is currently in a string form Prior to this computation the string must be
245. f an array of offset values 721 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Scale First Order Scaling Description This function returns an array of values or single value representing the linear scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli Ali X B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example Name Units Number Result Computations ScaleArray tem F200 F 10 ScaleArray F100 F101 F102 Function Reference O 370 ScaleArray2 Second Order Array Scaling SEA Model 300 ScaleArray2 Second Order Array Scaling Synopsis ScaleArray2 X A B C X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of second order coefficients p21 B r Formula of an array of first order coefficients 721 Cls Formula of an array of offset values s21 KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Scale2 Second Order Scaling Description This function returns an array of values representing the second order scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli A10X 01 B 5 X 1 Cli fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p n s Example Name Units Number Result Computations ScaleArray2 ou F200 F 10 ScaleArray2 F100 F101 F102 F103 Function Reference 371 ScaleArr
246. face is used to communicate with the CAS section of the CAPS probe by sending the necessary setup and data request commands Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 1D interface 0 7 2 3 relay control 0 OxFF Parameters The CIP interface number must be different than the CAS interface number Make sure that the correct interface number for CAS is also used in the CAS board entry The replay control parameter is passed to the CAS probe via the data request command Please check the CAS probe manual for further information Data Size The data size varies with the number of channels acquired The following table shows the appropriate number of bytes to specify for the different number of channels supported In addition the tables also show the maximum theoretical sampling rate as well as the maximum suggested sampling rate Channels Bytes Sample Maximum Theoretical Rate Maximum Suggested Rate 10 254 22 Hz 20 Hz 20 294 19 Hz 16 Hz 30 334 16 Hz 16 Hz 40 374 14 Hz 10 Hz Maximum Frequency Acquisition Reference O 149 Type 76 CAS Serial Data SEA Model 300 Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary data sent by the CAS in response to the request data command check the CAS manual Use the CASData function to retrieve individual data elements from the CAS data block Type Synchronous event Comments The CAS setup par
247. fferent and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 Window The window where the List entry will be displayed see also Window on page 527 State The state controls whether the display is updated If state is zero the list entry is not updated otherwise it is updated Font The font used to display the List entry see also Font System on page 36 Type The type parameter is used to select the different auto time options Select 0 for no time Select 1 for time in the form of hh mm ss hhhhh Select 2 for seconds in the form of s hhhhh Select 2 for seconds since midnight in the form of sssss hhhhh MaxFreq The number of lines per sample per second Title A boolean value 0 or 1 that controls whether the title from the specified CfgFile is displayed or not A value of 1 displays the title while a 0 suppresses the title display Setup Table Reference O 590 List Table Ist 300 SEA Model 300 CfgFile The configuration file that contains the list elements formulas to be displayed Example Version 1 7 1st 300 name number window state font type maxFreq title cfgFile dropi 1 dropllst 1 courl0 0 1 1 dropl lst Setup Table Reference O 591 List Table Configuration File dst SEA Model 300 List Table Configuration File Ist Overview The List table conf
248. fferent buffer types in the system with two main categories synchronous and asynchronous The main buffer type 0 is called the synchronous buffer because the system generates one buffer per second 1 hz All timed acquisition events get assigned to this buffer type Of the synchronous buffer type there are several buffers in the system The number of synchronous buffers is controlled in the buffer setup dialog buffer table buf 300 The other buffers in the system are called asynchronous buffers This is because these buffers don t get done with respect to a timed event such as the synchronous buffer The asynchronous buffers get done when all the data is acquired For example in the case of a serial stream of data an asynchronous buffer would get done when the terminating characters for a block are received The number of asynchronous buffers of each different type is also controlled in the buffer setup dialog buffer table buf 300 Why do we need to have two different buffer categories It s probably easy to see that we need at least one buffer type to put the data in We get some data and we put it in the buffer It doesn t matter what kind of data it is we just put it in the buffer Then we need to decide what to do with the buffer and when Since we are trying to build a real time data acquisition system it won t be long before the distinction between timed and un timed events is made So we put all our timed events in one buffer
249. file name may be given If the file name is omitted the system will automatically generate a file name using date and time move Begins a move operation on the window currently in focus The M300 will place the mouse pointer over the window to be moved Drag the highlighted rectangle to the point you move the window and press the mouse button This will complete the move operation Note that the move command can be used on windows without a title bar next Brings the next data display window in the M300 window list that is not closed into focus prev Brings the previous data display window in the M300 window list that is not closed into focus lock Lock display windows global lock This is similar to the Toggle Window Display button in the M300 window Certain window features will be locked The window features to be locked can be controlled by the window properties selecting the flags tab unlock Lock display windows global unlock This feature unlocks all windows Notice that local locks on the window might still apply In other words if a window has it s lock button pressed then that window will still be locked pause Pause display windows unpause Un pause display windows primary Switch to primary window position scheme secondary Switch to secondary window position scheme on Open all windows off Close all windows Example F1 wnd 0 5 close wnd 0 5 open y AF 2 wnd 4 minimize
250. for listing of valid colors clear Clears the X vs Y displays group turn on a group of X vs Y entries Command Manager Reference O 519 X vs Y Display Commands SEA Model 300 xlim ylim sets the X vs Y entry minimum and maximum values x or y xmin ymin sets the X vs Y entry minimum value x or y xmax ymax sets the X vs Y entry maximum value x or y xrange yrange sets the X vs Y entry range to the current value 0 5 range If range is omitted the X vs Y will perform auto ranging That is the limits of the X vs Y will be changed to accommodate all points visible x or y xbase ybase sets the X vs Y entry minimum to the base specified The new maximum is the new minimum current range x or y xoffset yoffset changes the minimum and maximum by the offset specified The new minimum is current min offset and the new maximum is current max offset x or y Example F5 xvy 0 3 clear Command Manager Reference O 520 X vs Y Display Commands SEA Model 300 Command Manager Reference O 521 X vs Y Display Commands SEA Model 300 Command Manager Reference O 522 Setup Table Reference SEA Model 300 Setup Tables Reference The M300 uses and extensive array of tables to store computations display settings and many other types of configuration information One difference between the M200 and the M300 is the shrinking need to become extensively familiar with these setup
251. formula space controls how much of the time string actually gets returned If the formula result space is three the time string will look like HH If the result space is six the time string will look like HH MM If the result space is 13 the time string will be HH MM SS FFE For the formula result space you must add 1 extra for the terminating character The tag number can be AO for M300 time or a GPS tag number for time These are the only two supported tags Result Type Space S n n size of result space entry Example Name Units Number Result Computations Time TEN FO S 6 Time AO Function Reference O 424 Timer Timer SEA Model 300 Timer Timer Synopsis Timer DELAY ON OFF DELAY 1 Initial delay for dead period integer ON 1 Time for which the function will be on integer OFF 1 Time for which the function will be off integer Description This function is used to generate a pulse train for instrument control After an initial dead period DELAY the function will return a one for the duration of ON and a zero for the duration of OFF The cycle will then repeat using the ON and OFF values Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Timer rent F100 IT 1 Timer 10 5 25 Function Reference O 425 TTemp0 Total Air Temperature SEA Model 300 TTemp Total Air Temperature Synopsis TTemp STEMP PPRES SPRES RECOVERY STEMP 7 Static Temperatures in C m21 PP
252. four bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 32 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments Total counts represents the total valid particles that the probe could size The total counts should be equal to the sum of all counts from all channels also known as total valid counts Acquisition Reference 128 Type 64 1D256 Ballard Counts SEA Model 300 Type 64 1D256 Ballard Counts Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the 1D256 interface card This card is capable of interfacing with all 1D types probes It provides a maximum of 256 channels of particle size information and a maximum of 256 channels of particle temporal spacing information All counters are 32 bits in length Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Size counts 0 OxF lower nibble 1 Strobe counts 0 0xF upper nibble p Probe command 0 0xF lower nibble 2 1D interface 0 7 upper nibble 3 Source 0 OxF lower nibble 3 Divide factor 0 4 upper nibble Parameters The lower nibble for parameter one is used to set the number of size channels to be acquired The number of channels is the value specified in the lower nibble plus one multiplied by 16 The upper nibble for parameter one is used to set the number of strobe interval channels to be acquired The number of strobe interval channels is the value specified in the upper nibble plus one and multiplied by 16
253. from the SEA serial interface card or any serial port including boards which add serial ports to the system The serial data should be blocked by carriage return and line feed characters Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Block 0 255 2 3 Throttle ee Parameters The block parameter should be used to tell the system about the last character in a data block The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which ASCII data blocks may be recorded per second It should be significantly larger than the maximum block rate that will be received If the throttle rate is less than or equal to the actual block rate the internal FIFO will never completely empty This will increase data latency Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of bytes in the largest serial data block The data size is automatically resized to the actual number of bytes in the serial block Data Format The data acquired corresponds to the ASCH block sent Type Asynchronous master event or synchronous event This data type provides improved flexibility over the M200 version because it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous events If an Asynchronous master event is used the buffer automatically resizes for the number of bytes coming in This also implies that the bytes per sample are the largest block of data to be collected This acq
254. from the probe channel file to find out and display the necessary probe bins x axis data The probe entry has an updated probe range value This value is used when applicable automatically see also Probe on page 528 y Formula Data source for Probe Distribution display This can normally be counts concentrations etc see also Formula on page 528 xMin xMax The minimum and maximum limits for the x axis yMin yMax The minimum and maximum limits for the y axis Please remember that no data will be displayed if the data source value is less than the minimum value Example Version 2 pdi 300 Name Number Window Color Type Width Probe yFormula xMin xMax yMin yMax 100 um11 0 wnd230 OxFFOO 1 2 fssp 075 F5177 1 10000 le 010 100 2dg um14 1 wnd230 Ox00FF 1 2 2dg F9177 1 10000 le 010 100 100 um31 2 wnd231 OxFFAA 1 2 fssp 075 F5177 1 10000 le 010 100 2dg um34 3 wnd231 OxFF11 1 2 2dg F9177 1 10000 le 010 100 Setup Table Reference O 598 Target Position Display Table pos 300 SEA Model 300 Target Position Display Table pos 300 Overview The target position display is used to show a map with the aircraft position and track The display plots aircraft position relative to a center latitude and longitude If desired wind speed and direction can be used to display wind barbs along the flight path Data labels along the flight path are also possible Markers can be display for given latitude and longitude Th
255. fter all acquisition events for buffer 0 we can have another entry for the next buffer if necessary Each time the acquisition events for the buffer must be listed following the buffer entry When the user uses the M300 system to create edit board and acquisition event entries the buffers will automatically be generated The Buffer Setup Dialog allows the modification of the default M300 generated setting to be altered A WARNING Manual modifying this table by adding or removing an acquisition entry also requires modification of the acq 300 table Parameters The following fields are part of the buffer configuration entry Number The buffer number 0 1 2 255 The first buffer number 0 is reserved for the 1 second synchronous buffer The 1 hz synchronous buffer must always be present Buffer number 251 is reserved for the Command data Buffer number 252 is reserved for the Error data Buffer number 254 is reserved for Secondary Acquisition Data Buffer number 255 is reserved for Tables this buffer doesn t show up in the buffer table Other buffer numbers can be used for asynchronous or other synchronous buffers Asynchronous Buffer Frequency Synchronous Life In the case of synchronous buffers the buffer frequency is the buffer life in other words when the buffer expires For the 1 second synchronous buffer the buffer frequency is set for the same value as the maximum system frequency specified in the System Board e
256. g Grey Scale Probe CIPGS Commands SEA Model 300 Cloud Imaging Grey Scale Probe CIPGS Commands Synopsis tascipgs board frequency tascipgs board auto board CIPGS Board name string frequency Frequency to be sent float Description This command can be used to change the CIPGS probe true air speed frequency The frequency should be specified in MHz The value specified will override the control function in the formula table fml 300 The board name specifies a unique CIPGS interface card as defined in the board table The use of auto in place of frequency is used to restore control of the CIPGS probe true air speed frequency to the control functions Example A Fi tascipgs cipgs 2 5 A F5 tascipgs cipgs auto Command Manager Reference O 498 Control Commands SEA Model 300 Control Commands Synopsis rewind start stop pause cancel pause hh mm ss next end restart delay time cancel time hh mm ss delay Delay time in ms default is 250 ms integer Description rewind Rewinds the M300 file being played back Not that this operation does not work when the M300 is recording start Pushes in the M300 play button to begin file operations If the record button has already been set then the M300 will immediately begin to record a file If the record button is not pressed in then normal playback will begin Not that a file must have been created or opened prior to this command stop Stops all M300 f
257. ge 527 Number A unique integer to identify the entry Tag The tag number will identify the for secondary acquisition event data This number can be used in other tables to access the data The tag number must be unique which means it cannot be used in the acquisition table Do not use a reserved tag number see also Tag on page 528 Index Used to extract a particular value from the given Formula see below If set to 1 it is assumed the subsequent given formula is comprised of only one value Formula The formula holding the values to be stored as a secondary acquisition event Example Version 1 7 saq 300 Name Number Tag Index Formula State 0 9000 1 F997 IDCommandValue 1 9001 1 F998 Range 2 9002 1 F1000 Sizes 3 9003 aL F1010 Counts 4 9004 1 F1020 Setup Table Reference O 616 Skew T Display Table skt 300 SEA Model 300 Skew T Display Table skt 300 Overview The Skew T skewed temperature logarithmic pressure diagram is a real time display of temperature and humidity in the atmosphere The horizontal axis is temperature in Celsius C The vertical axis is atmospheric pressure in millibars mb which decreases with altitude The measurements depicted in a Skew T diagram are collected in a sounding of the air The Skew T will usually have two entries one for temperature and one for humidity This displays supports all the standard grid lines for a Skew T diagram such as isobars isother
258. ger value for line width will require more drawing and slow down the display You should keep this in mind when changing the line width Entries The number of entries kept in memory for each Skew T pair If the number of entries is 0 then the Skew T plot has no memory xFormula Data source for x axis This is usually a formula for temperature or humidity in degrees Celsius see also Formula on page 528 yFormula Data source for y axis This is usually pressure altitude in millibars mb see also Formula on page 528 xMin xMax Minimum and maximum limits for x axis yMin yMax Minimum and maximum limits for y axis In the Skew T display the y axis limits are inverted this means we have higher value for pressure on the minimum limit than we have for the maximum limit SpdFml DirFml Data sources for wind speed and direction This speed must be knots and direction in radians see also Formula on page 528 Example Version 3 skt 300 Name Number Window Color WindColor Type Width Entries xFml yFml xMin xMax yMin yMax spdFml dirFml temp 0 skewt Red Green E 1 1500 F512 F510 40 40 1050 100 F200 F300 dewp 1 skewt Blue Green 1 1 1500 F513 F510 40 40 1050 100 F 1 F 1 Setup Table Reference 618 Strip Chart Display Table stp 300 SEA Model 300 Strip Chart Display Table stp 300 Overview This display is made to emulate a strip char recorder New data points appear in one side of the display wh
259. ges This field defines the number of ranges for a particular probe Most commonly this field is one except for probes which have more than one range Such is the case of the FSSP which has four ranges Channels The number of channels for a particular probe Common values for this field are 15 32 and 64 This number reflects the number of channels available on the 1D type probes Imaging probes allow the user to set the number of channels to a value different than the number of pixels recorded Size This field is the size of the Imaging probes 2D 2D Grey etc pixel and is used by spectrum routines Non imaging 1D type probes should have this value set to zero Setup Table Reference O 609 Probe Table prb 300 SEA Model 300 Sync This is the sync pattern or marker for the Imaging probes Actual only the 2D Mono has a sync pattern used by the display and spectrum routines This sync pattern can be ignored by using OxFF Zero should be used for all other probes TasLimit This is the TAS limit for the probe This will be used by the functions which are used to generate control the TAS to the probes For non imaging probes use zero FileName The name of the Probe Channel file See Probe Channel File prb on page 611 See next section for a description of the parameters for these files These probe channel files used to have a chn extension in the M200 system We have just renamed the file extension to keep th
260. gets executed Trigger entries in the window tables have the same effect but they control how often the window display is performed They basically drive the window pump Why do we need all these members for the trigger and what do they do for me Type The trigger type allows us to trigger on a specific data buffer We can pick a synchronous buffer or a 2D Mono buffer just by using the trigger type This means that we can ignore all other data buffers and narrow down on a particular buffer type But there are times when we don t want to do the type checking on the trigger So that s why we have the special option that ignores the trigger type checking Ignore 1 At other times one trigger is enough So we need to have an easy way to skip the other trigger Never 2 Life M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 23 Trigger SEA Model 300 The buffer life became necessary when we introduced different synchronous buffers to the M300 system so it applies to sync buffers only Originally we only had the 1 Hz Sync buffer so there was no need to pick amongst the different synchronous buffers But now that we can have buffers faster and slower than 1 Hz we need the buffer life to select which synchronous buffer we want to look at For asynchronous buffers the buffer life is zero and the trigger life is not used under those circumstances Asynchronous buffer s have their life based on the master event and not on a fixed frequency So if we setu
261. gger frequency or address 2 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None Time FO S 10 Time A0 Date F1 S 10 Date A0 This is the basic 1 hertz trigger on the Sync buffer The primary address is not a factor nor is the secondary trigger gt Trigger Piraq I Q P 1 PiragA Never Never None Timing Mode F2100 1 1 PqConfig A2001 0 Delay F2101 1 1 PqConfig A2001 1 Gates F2102 1 1 PqConfig A2001 2 This trigger is a bit more interesting The trigger type is on the Piraq I Q amp P data We have a 1 hz frequency The address board is PiraqA So this trigger will fire at most once per second on Piraq I Q amp P data for the PiragA board only The secondary trigger is not a factor Setup Table Reference O 571 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Here is another example which show how to handle 2DC data in the M300 system Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None 2DC Sizes F1000 F 32 PrData Pr 2dc 2 The primary trigger is set for Sync buffer 1 hz and ignore address The secondary trigger is not a factor This basically gets the 2DC Sizes once per second and updates for F1000 Trigger Sync 1 None 2D Image 10 2dc 2DC Counts F1001 F 32 MoSums Pr 2dc Aq 2DCImage 0x00 1 Here the trigger needed to be changed to handle the 2DC data into the MoSums function The MoSums function needs a 1 hz Sync trigger to produce a result once per second
262. ggeri Fregi Boardl Trigger2 Freq2 Board2 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None Name Units Formula Result Computations 2DG Sizes ee F1000 F 64 PrData Pr 2dg 2 2DG Counts m F1001 F 64 GrSums Pr 2dg Aq 2DG 0x02 1 2DG Tas Factors sE F1002 11 1 Aq 2DGTasFactors 2DG SOI Ss F1003 F 1 GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 4 2DG SOB ts F1004 F 1 GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 5 2DG Minimum di F1005 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 9 2DG Middle NAN F1006 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 10 2DG Maximum ie F1007 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 11 2DG Slice Count mo F1008 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 6 2DG RPC ee F1010 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 1 2DG RawParticleCount F1011 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 0 2DG Tas Mul Fac ret F1100 ifi GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 7 2DG Tas Div Fac uy F1101 1 1 GrData Aq 2DGAdvanced 8 2DG Tas Clock In MHZ F1102 F 1 PrTasClockIn Aq 2DGAdvanced 2DG Elapsed Time gt F1103 F 1 F1003 40000 2DG Elapsed Tas ee F1104 F 1 F1004 256 F1102 1 0e 6 Setup Table Reference O 574 Formula Watch and Alter Table fwa 300 SEA Model 300 Formula Watch and Alter Table fwa 300 Overview The M300 has a new window type used to watch and alter the any formula value The user can have has many formula watch and alter windows as necessary It s not necessary to edit this file the M300 takes care of everything The information here is provided for reference Parameters Name The formula watc
263. h and alter entry name see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple windows can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Formula windows they can assign different and or the same integers to each window based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the window type only they are not global to the M300 Window Link to the formula watch and alter window This window must be of the formula watch and alter type see also Window on page 527 Index This is the element index for formulas with arrays Use 1 for no index Index 0 is the first element Formula The formula number to watch and or alter see also Formula on page 528 Format This parameter is used to format the output data Since we use the printf function from C to output the data this follows that standard Special care must be taken not to use an invalid format for Setup Table Reference 575 Formula Watch and Alter Table fwa 300 SEA Model 300 the type of the formula Invalid format fields can cause the M300 to crash or at the very least provide data that doesn t make sense see also Format on page 529 On very common mistake is to have a formula of float type and then specify the string format option s This can sometimes cause the system to crash depending on the actual data that is in memory from where the string
264. h keeps track of how many seconds have elapsed since the last valid image display The number of displays buffers that the user can see per second can be controlled via the primary trigger frequency for the window The CIPGS Image display is made up of several strips Each strip displays as many slices as possible Because of image compression there are a variable number of slices in the CIPGS Image display Slices are 128 bits wide 16 bytes Each pixels is 2 bits wide So there are 64 pixels per slice The CIPGS display looks for the first full image to display The user can turn on off the timebar Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the CIPGS Image entry For example CIPGS see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple CIPGS displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a CIPGS display does also then a command set up to change the color of the CIPGS display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the CIPGS Image display table need to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the CIPGS Image display will be done The type of the window must be CIPGS Image display
265. he M300 Data Format 15 Trigger Provides an overview of how the M300 trigger operates 19 Reverse Polish Notation Explains the use of RPN Notation in M300 calculations 32 Color System Lists different M300 colors and some caveats to using them 33 Font Font support for M300 36 M300 Miscellaneous Reference M300 Miscellaneous Reference 11 Data Buffer SEA Model 300 Data Buffer Data buffers explained Data buffers are a very integral part of the M300 system so having a basic understanding of the data buffers and some on the inner workings is critical The system gathers data around using the Acquisition Manager m300m The data is placed in shared memory buffers Once the Acquisition Manager has acquired all the data for a particular buffer it marks it as being done and it triggers all the process that have registered with it m300r m300b M300 etc From this point forward access to the data is read only The M300 Record Process m300r can read and store this buffer The M300 Broadcast Process m300b can read and broadcast this buffer The M300 process can do computations and displays on this buffer Since access to the data is read only all of these process can get going at once doing their jobs Once they are done they decrement a work counter for the buffer If there are no processes left working on the buffer the buffer gets marked as free and the Acquisition Manager can start using this buffer again There are di
266. he element INDEX to reference that particular value in an array of double data This function returns a single double precision floating point value referenced by INDEX in the array E f F INDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DoubleIndex Ht F300 D 1 DIndex F100 24 Function Reference O 264 DirData Directory Data SEA Model 300 DirData Directory Data Synopsis DirData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for data tag SELECT 1 Directory field select integer 0 8 Description This function is used to retrieve specific data from a directory structure referenced by the acquisition tag A The SELECT argument is used to select which data parameter in the directory structure is retrieved SELECT Directory Data 0 Offset 1 Number of bytes Samples Bytes Per Sample Type Paral Para2 Para3 Address SELECT o NIAI BR OY N Result Type Space L 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DirectoryData en F205 L 1 DirData A100 8 Function Reference 265 Div Divide DivO Divide SEA Model 300 Synopsis Div A B A m Formula of an array of values m21 Bip Formula of an array of values B 1 0 p21 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See Divide Description This function returns an array of values representing the division of the two given arrays element by eleme
267. he examples and documentation syntax seem to be in two lines but that is only because we cant fit it all on the line Basic Trigger Syntax Traditional Trigger Trigger typel frequencyl board1 type2 frequency2 board2 This trigger entry doesnt specify lifel formulal life2 and formula2 The life values are 0 by default and the formula values are 1 No life no formula checks are performed for this type of trigger M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 19 SEA Model 300 Trigger Full Trigger Trigger typel lifel frequency1 board1 formulal type2 life2 frequency2 board2 formula2 This trigger entry reflects the fact that life and formula members are optional square brackets If the life is set to zero no life is displayed If the formula is 1 then no formula is saved This simplifies the trigger entry when possible The board trigger can also be called address trigger They are one and the same The board refers to the board name and the address to the hexadecimal address for the board Since there is a unique address for each board they can be used interchangeably It basically refers to an interface card where the acquisition events came from Almost all acquisition events are attached to a particular interface card Some events such as data from serial ports are attached to pseudo interface address OxF000 OxFOFF We will see some real trigger entries in the samples to follow but first here is what each member
268. he falcon data format Type Asynchronous master event Acquisition Reference e 101 Type 41 Falcon Data SEA Model 300 Comments None Acquisition Reference O 102 Type 42 INS Accelerometer SEA Model 300 Type 42 INS Accelerometer Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the INS Accelerometer interface card There are three 32 bits counters that can receive positive or negative counts Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Counter 0 2 2 Polarity 0 3 3 Reset 0 1 Parameters The counter parameter is used to specify the acceleration direction for the data acquired A value of zero for the X direction counter 0 one for the Y direction counter 1 and two for the Z direction counter 2 The polarity parameter is used to select the pulse polarity for both the up and down input signals for the specified channel A value of zero represents positive polarity for both signals A value of one represents negative polarity for the up signal and positive polarity for the down signal A value of two represents positive polarity for the up signal and negative polarity for the down signal Finally a value of three represents negative polarity for both signals If the reset parameter is a zero then the counts accumulate over time A value of one will reset the counters after every acquisition Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to four
269. he following formula summarizes the calculations s i A i a B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Xor el F101 I 1 F105 OxFA Math Function Reference 449 Boolean NOT SEA Model 300 Boolean NOT Synopsis B re Bl r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function returns a value or an array of values representing the bit wise Boolean Not operation of the given array element by element This operation ensures each bit position of B is inverted i e 00110011 11001100 Result Type Space D n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Not ucts F101 IT i F104 Math Function Reference O 450 lt lt Shift Left SEA Model 300 lt lt Shift Left Synopsis AB lt lt A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function shifts the bits that comprise the value of A to the left by B bit positions For each bit position shifted the Most Significant Bit MSB leftmost bit is dropped off and a 0 is appended to the Least Significant Bit LSB right most bit This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations ShiftLeft NoN F101 I i F105 2 lt lt Math Function Reference 451 gt gt Shift Right SEA Model 300 gt gt Shift Right Synopsis AB gt gt A m Next to last operand m gt
270. he number of size channels to be acquired The number of channels is the value specified in the lower nibble increments by one and multiplied by 16 The upper nibble for parameter one is used to set the number of strobe interval channels to be acquired The number of strobe interval channels is the value specified in the upper nibble increments by one and multiplied by 16 If no interval channels are desired set bit seven for parameter three Use parameter three to control the strobe interval frequency The lower nibble for parameter two is used to store the probe command value The upper nibble for parameter two is used as the 1D interface number Valid values for this parameter are between zero and seven This value must define a unique 1D interface card assigned in one of the parameter fields in the acquisition table The lower nibble for parameter three is used as the CAMAC slot number If bit seven is set the strobe counts will not be acquired Acquisition Reference 120 Type 56 CAMAC 1D256 Counts SEA Model 300 Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of size channels times four plus the number of interval channels times four Data Format The data acquired consists of one or two blocks of 32 bit integer data The first block always has the size counts The second optional block has the interval counts Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference
271. hen called for these fields must be checked to get a complete set of information regarding the data Different data types make different uses of these parameters Interface Address The interface address is primarily used to specify hardware data source The interface address is also used as a data synchronization pattern For data types with no hardware data source the interface address is set to 43605 0xAA55 Time Next Same and Last tags all have an interface address of 43605 used for synchronization Advantages of the Data Directories The data directory structure is a fundamental part of the Model 300 Data Acquisition System The data directory entries control the acquisition process and document how the data was acquired By reviewing the information in these directories when processing the acquired data important facts are available Data Acquisition Self Documentation Sample frequency may be determined for each tag Acquisition type and parameter values for each tag Interface Address identifies which hardware device was used Data Processing During and Post Acquisition Fast and easy data access for all data Data can be selected for one or more tags Data can be selected within a time frame M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 17 Data Format SEA Model 300 Smaller data sets of interest may be created for specific uses Just in case of Power Data Loss Data integrity may be checked Data recovery is possible The original re
272. hes the edge Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 DMA Channel 5 7 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 128 bit slice Sixteen bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 128 bit slice is stored in the same format as the slices of the image The first bit is stored in the lowest bit position and the last bit is stored in the highest bit position Type Asynchronous slave event Comments The DMA channel selected must be the same as that specified for this interface card in the 2D Grey acquisition type It must also be matched to the 2D Grey interface DIP switch settings Acquisition Reference O 77 Type 28 2D Grey Shadow Slice Count SEA Model 300 Type 28 2D Grey Shadow Slice Count Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the number of slices that had a bit shadowed in a 2D Grey image This becomes useful in determining vertical dimension of an image Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 16 bit word is stored in low byte to high byte format with the first byte in memory being the lowest byte and the last byte in memory being the highest byte Type Asynchronous slave event This acquisition event must follow acquisition type 20 a master event in an
273. hese characters Setup Table Reference O 566 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 Number The formula number is used to identify a formula link to formula When the user assigns formula numbers they should not be assigned from 0 1 etc Instead the user should pick a formula number based on the tag number or some other criteria that may be currently used in the project setup For example if converting from analog to volts for tag numbers 100 to 131 it would make sense for the user to pick formula numbers 100 to 131 Computations should be grouped and assigned a particular range of formula numbers This allows future expansion to the project without generating formula numbers which may be hard to remember Dont use the same formula number for two different variables this will likely not work If you are not sure before adding a new formula you should search the formula table It is acommon mistake to have the same formula number with two different results spaces This is ambiguous and cannot be allowed Result The result field is used to pick the result type and space The format for this parameter is a valid result type letter followed by square brackets or regular brackets with the number of elements inside the brackets For example F 10 would indicate a floating point formula variable with an array of 10 elements The minimum number of elements for a formula is 1 The maximum number of elements for a formula is 2500
274. icate with the CIP Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 DMA 5 6 7 3 Rearm rate Hz Pas ban Parameters Data Size The data size for the CIP image acquisition event must be 4098 bytes 4096 for image plus 2 for check sum Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the compressed image data from the CIP probe check the CIP manual Use the cip 300 file to display the CIP image data Type Asynchronous master event This acquisition event is the only event of a CIP asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Comments The CIP setup parameters are controlled through the Board Table You must have an entry in the Board Table for CAPS and CIP The true air speed is controlled by the request data command for the synchronous CIP serial data In order to acquire the CIP image properly you must also have an entry in the acquisition table for the CIP serial data There also must be an entry in the control table to control the TAS to the CIP probe Acquisition Reference O 152 Type 79 CAS PBP Data SEA Model 300 Type 79 CAS PBP Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the Cloud Aerosol Spectrometer CAS probe Particle by Particle PBP The SEA CAPS Serial Port or Serial interface can be used to interface to the CAS PBP Para
275. icator entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple PPI displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple PPI displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a PPI display does also then a command set up to change the color of the PPI display will not affect the HVPS display Window Link to window where the Plan Position Indicator display will be performed This window must be of the Plan Position Indicator type see also Window on page 527 Scheme Name of the Radar Scheme to use This is a link to the Scheme name from the Radar Table See Radar Table rdr 300 on page 614 Radar Name of the Radar entry to use from the Radar Table See Radar Table rdr 300 on page 614 powerFormula refFormula rangeFormula Data source for power dbm reflectivity dBz and range nmi see also Formula on page 528 gatesFormula hitsFormula angleFormula tiltFormula Data source for gates hits angle rad and tilt deg see also Formula on page 528 Setup Table Reference 607 Plan Position Indicator Table ppi 300 SEA Model 300 Example Version 2 7 ppi 300 Name Num Wind
276. ie Number 0 ANoiseLevel 47 BNoiseLevel 42 AMinimumRange 0 BMinimumRange 0 AMaximumRange 20000 BMaximumRange 20000 Range 50 Levell OXOOFFOO 1 0 000000 4 000000 Level2 0x66CC66 1 4 000000 8 000001 Level3 0x00A000 1 8 000001 12 000002 Level4 0x00A000 1 8 000001 12 000002 Level5 OXOOFFFF 1 16 000002 20 000002 Level6 0X0099FF 1 20 000002 24 000004 Level7 Ox0000FF 1 24 000004 28 000004 Level8 0x0000A40 1 28 000004 32 000004 Level9 OXFEFF7F 1 32 000004 36 000004 Level10 OXFFFFOO 1 36 000004 40 000004 Level11 OxFE8001 1 40 000004 44 000004 Level12 OXFE5555 1 44 000004 48 000008 Level13 OXFFOOOO 1 48 000008 52 000008 Level14 OXFFOOFF 1 52 000008 56 000008 Level15 0x8500B6 1 56 000008 60 000008 Level16 0x000000 1 60 000008 64 000008 Setup Table Reference 615 SEA Model 300 Secondary Acquisition Table saq 300 SEA Model 300 Secondary Acquisition Table saq 300 Overview The M300 is able to store various secondary acquisition data This is usually derived data from the raw data acquired The source of the secondary acquisition is any formula entered into the formula table fm1 300 Note that secondary acquisition works for only for acquisition mode it is not supported by playback or UDP mode Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the secondary acquisition event entry This name can be used in other tables to access the data For example Temperature see also Name on pa
277. iguration file provides the information the list display needs to display lines of data Each entry is a line of data itself that is displayed using the specifications provided Parameters Title A fixed positioned line of text that appears at the top of the List display Most commonly used as the header to describe each column of data There is a 256 character limit for this string of text Type Determines how the data is to be display in either column or row format Index The index of the desired entry from the formula 0 for the first element For no index use a 1 Formula Formula number name for the data to be output see also Formula on page 528 Format The format is optional If the format is blank the default format will be used based on the formula type see also Format on page 529 Example dropsonde ist y title type index formula format MsgType Id SondeId Date Time Press Temp RH WDir WSpd Wel column 1 F1302 s Setup Table Reference 592 Lookup Table lup 300 SEA Model 300 Lookup Table lup 300 Overview The Lookup Table is a general purpose tool used to enter data from a table of data points Each lookup entry has a name number which can be used as the identifier The user can retrieve data from the Lookup table via the Lookup function in the formula table The Lookup function does a linear interpolation to get the correct desired value The LookupGet and LookupSet functions also w
278. il the byte value IDENTIFIER is reached Example Name Units Number Result Computations SerialDADS Heat F100 F 5 SerialDADS A100 10 65 Function Reference O 375 SerialIEEE Serial IEEE SEA Model 300 SerialIEEE Serial IEEE Synopsis SeriallEEE A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for Serial IEEE data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See SrIEEE Serial IEEE Description This function gets IEEE data at the index specified in the data block It works with data from either serial IEEE data type or the DRV11 data type Make sure that parameter one in the acquisition table for these types indicates the appropriate data swap option for different machine types An index value of 1 represents the first value in the data index base 1 not base 0 Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SeriallIEEE ent F100 F 5 SerialIEEE A100 10 5 Function Reference O 376 SerialInteger Serial Integer SEA Model 300 SerialInteger Serial Integer Synopsis SerialInteger A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for Serial integer data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement Function See SrInteger Serial Integer Description This function
279. ile operations record or playback pause Pauses all M300 file operations playback only Specify time to pause at with hh mm ss field The time based command may be canceled with cancel keyword time Search the M300 data file playback only Specify the time to search for with hh mm ss field The timed search may be canceled with the cancel keyword next Skips to the next buffer during playback end Moves the file pointer to the end of the file during playback restart Stop delay and start Example FS rewind AC F2 start AC F3 stop Command Manager Reference O 499 File Operations Commands SEA Model 300 File Operations Commands Synopsis file onloff file close read file open filename file create filename filename File name to create or open Description Toggles the recording mode on and off If there is a file currently open then the write will begin with operation set to on otherwise the M300 will wait until a file is opened before it begins the writing to a file Starts or stops M300 recording to a file This is the same as clicking on the record button onloff Changes the state of the M300 recording output to either on or off When the state is off the record will not update close Close M300 binary file write file Or if using read option then close the M300 playback file read file open Open specified file name for reading playback mode create Create a new M300 binar
280. ile the data scrolls to the opposite side to show a history of the data over a period of time The number of strip chart display entries per window is not limited It is up to the user to pick the desired number of strip chart entries The user should consider window size and overall visual appearance when picking a large number of strip chart entries Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the Strip Chart entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple Strip Chart displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Strip Chart displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Strip Chart display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Strip Chart display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the Strip Chart Table must belong to a wndow This parameter is the name of the window where the Strip Chart display will be done The type of the window must be Strip Chart display For example stp see also Window on page 527 Color The color used for the Strip Chart entry The user can specify any color there are no restrictions Some color choices are better than others The
281. in kw antenna gain in db horizontal beam width in degrees vertical beam width in degrees and pulse rate in psec The following formula summarizes the computation e 10 log 922 092 100 RECEIVERGAIN f 2 WAVEGUIDELOSS 20 tog TROC ENET h fi ao log y TRANSMITPOWER 60 2 RECEIVERGAIN 10log HORIZONTALBEAMWIDTH 50 10 5 10 log 10 PULSERATE 2 99792458x10 10 log 0K2 f f 10 108 VERTICALBEAMWIDTH T 10 KP Note The constant 2 99792458x10 is for the speed of light Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations RadarConstant Hoe F2000 F 1 RaConstant F2102 F2103 20 4 Function Reference O 360 Rand Random SEA Model 300 Rand Random Synopsis Rand SELECT SELECT 1 Select for return type integer Description This function returns random values If SELECT is zero it will return a random integer in the range 0 2 If SELECT is non zero it will return a random normalized floating point value normalized value has a range 0 0 1 0 Result Type Space D n n size of the result space entry Example Name Units Number Result Computations Rand yey F200 I 20 Rand 0 Function Reference O 361 RandData Random Data SEA Model 300 RandData Random Data Synopsis RandData SCALE OFFSET MINIMUM MAXIMUM SCALE 1 Scaling value OFFSET 1 Offset value MINIMUMT 1 Lower limit MAXIMUM 1
282. inator character is used with the send command to transmit data to serial devices If termination is 0 no termination character is added Otherwise the termination will be sent Since the termination is an integer number it s possible to send out to terminating characters For example 0xODOA would send carriage return and line feed in this order MaxFreq The number of lines per sample per second must be an integer value greater than or equal to 1 This is usually 1 or the number of samples to output Title The ASCII file output can put a title entry at the start of the file for each column The title doesn t repeat with every page as the M300 system has no idea of how many lines there are per page Use a 1 to put the title and a 0 for no title CfgFile The file name for the ASCII configuration files which is used to control the ASCII output See ASCII Output Table Configuration File asc on page 540 OutFile The file name for the ASCII output data This can be set to dev ser1 or dev par1 to output to the serial port or parallel ports instead It can also be a network port name such as wem primary The file name should end in either txt or csv The csv extension is useful to create files to be Setup Table Reference 539 ASCII Output Table Configuration File asc SEA Model 300 ASCII Output Table Configuration File asc Overview The ASCII Output Configuration Files a
283. ing Air Mass display Rings The number of rings to display Range The range limit in nautical miles Entries The number of data points to keep in memory Setup Table Reference O 595 Moving Air Mass Display Table mam 300 SEA Model 300 latFormula lonFormula spdFormula dirFormula hdgFormula This is the data sources for the Moving Air Mass display This includes formulas for aircraft latitude longitude and heading Also moving air mass speed and direction The latitude longitude heading and direction must be in radians The speed must be in knots see also Formula on page 528 Example Version 2 mam 300 Name Number Window Color Font Rings Range Entries latFml lonFml spdFml dirFml hdgFml mam 0 mam 0x0 courl12 5 50 600 F2001 F2002 F5604 F5711 F4005 Setup Table Reference 596 Probe Distribution Display Table pdi 300 SEA Model 300 Probe Distribution Display Table pdi 300 Overview The Probe Distribution display gives a line graph of the probe size vs Y The Y data can represent counts concentrations sums volumes areas etc The probe distribution display will only display data which is larger than the Y minimum limit specified This creates gaps on the display for bins whose data value is less than the Y minimum limit specified Parameters Name The identifier for the Probe Distribution entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple PDI displays
284. ing from 1 to 3 Smaller track width results in better image performance Entries The number of entries kept in memory for each position entry If the number of entries is 0 then the Position plot has no memory Frequency The wind barb display frequency The wind barb frequency should be set for an optimal value so that the wind bards are not displayed on top of each other latFormula lonFormula hdgFormula wspFormula wdrFormula Data source for position display This includes latitude longitude heading wind speed and direction The latitude longitude heading and wind direction are in radians The wind speed is in knots The aircraft heading is used to display an aircraft marker with the aircraft symbol rotating to the correct heading If this feature is not desired leave the heading at 1 to indicate no heading formula Setup Table Reference O 601 Target Position Display Table pos 300 SEA Model 300 The wind speed and direction are used to display wind bards If the user doesn t wish to have wind barbs in the Position display then leave this at 1 for no wind speed and direction see also Formula on page 528 Data Entry The data entry shows data values along the flight track There must be a position entry in the file prior to data entries Multiple data entries per position entry are possible Name The identifier for the data entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique number to identify the data
285. inimum limit for the y axis yMax This specifies the maximum limit for the y axis Example Version 5 stp 300 Name Number Window Color Type Width State Decimate Group Index Formula yMin yMax 0 LWC 0 pristp red 1 1 1 E main sd F3521 0 2 0 8 1 AmbTemp 1 pristp green 1 1 1 5 main 1 F3315 15 10 2 AmbRH 2 pristp blue T 1 0 10 main D F3402 o 100 Setup Table Reference 620 Triggered Command Table tic 300 SEA Model 300 Triggered Command Table tic 300 Overview The Triggered Command Table is used to execute any M300 command manager commands automatically based on user trigger definitions This table is used to define triggered event commands For user keystroke executed commands See Command Table cmd 300 Parameters Comment This entry describes what the particular defined function s is are for Must be started with a semi colon see also Comments on page 527 There are certain limitations on the use of comments and where they may be put Trigger The trigger entry here has the same syntax as all trigger entries in setup tables See Trigger This particular trigger entry will tell the M300 when the subsequent command block s will be executed See Command Entry Block on page 621 Command Entry Block The command block is a series of commands to be executed when the preceding defined trigger fires The command block may contain a single command entry or a series of comman
286. integer STATE 1 State integer 0 or 1 Description This function computes the average of each element of the given formula for the last period of cycles The values returned are the sum of all the values divided by the number of cycles When the number of samples equals or exceeds the number of cycles the oldest sample is discarded and the new sample is included in the average If the state is zero the average is not changed If the state changes between zero and one the average is cleared and a new average is started If the state is a one the average is computed and returned every time The number of cycles can be affected by the current trigger Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations Average men F200 F 5 Average F100 60 1 Function Reference O 216 Avg Average Array SEA Model 300 Avg Average Array Synopsis Avg F F 7 Formula of an array of values to be averaged n21 Description This function computes the average of the given formula array of values The value returned is the sum of all the values divided by the number of values in the array The following formula summarizes the computation n 1 Y Flil f i 0 n Result D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Average m s F200 F 1 Avg F100 Function Reference O 217 Bearing Aircraft Bearing SEA Model 300 Bearing Aircraft Bearing Synopsis Bearing LATFROM LONFROM LATT
287. intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 Type Dictates what kind of Label entry it is Valid values are O label default and 1 data Ensure you are familiar with the structure of this table before changing this value Certain grammars apply to type 0 and others to type 1 See the example section below to familiarize with which grammars go with type 0 and 1 respectively Window The window where the Label entry will be displayed see also Window on page 527 State The state controls whether the display is updated If state is zero the label is not updated otherwise it is updated X Y The x and y coordinates where the Label is to be displayed It is recommended that these values are not such that the label blocks data from being displayed W H The width and height of the Label entry Setup Table Reference 587 Label Table 161 300 SEA Model 300 Font The font used to display the Label entry It is recommended that a fixed font be used to display data labels Otherwise we run into problems with erasing the previous data value Color The desired color of the Label text see also Color on page 528 ColorFill The desired background color of the Label see also Color on page 528 HorizontalAlign Controls whether the text in the Label is left center or right justified Valid values are left default
288. ion Mode 0 This function is used to find the largest value in the X array corresponding to a non zero value in Y array This is done by searching the Y array from the end to the beginning until a non zero value is found It then uses the same index to return the corresponding value from the X array This function is typically used to return the largest particle size found using the sizes data as the X array and the sums data as the Y array Mode 1 In this mode the function uses the Y array to search for the largest value Then it returns the corresponding value from the X array Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations MaximumSi ze es F300 F 1 MaxSiz F100 F200 Function Reference O 321 MaxTim Maximum Time SEA Model 300 MaxTim Maximum Time Synopsis MaxTim F STATE F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 STATE 1 State option variable integer 0 or 1 Description This function returns the time string for which the maximum value of a formula occurred The STATE variable is used to control the function operation If the STATE is zero the return value is unchanged If the state changes from zero to one rising edge the last time is cleared and a new maximum time is started If the STATE is one the time will change when the current value is a maximum The return string is in the form of HH MM SS HH is the hours MM is the minutes and SS is the seconds Result Type Space S 10
289. irection This includes Power Reflectivity and Range see also Formula on page 528 altitude Formula Data source for Altitude see also Formula on page 528 Setup Table Reference O 583 Height Time Indicator Display Table hti 300 SEA Model 300 Example Version 3 hti 300 name number window scheme aPwrFml aRefFml aRngFml bPwrFml bRefFml bRngFml altFml HtiPwr O HtiPwr Power F2020 F2020 F2000 F3020 F3020 F3000 F4000 Setup Table Reference O 584 High Volume Particle Spectrometer Display Table hvp 300 SEA Model 300 High Volume Particle Spectrometer Display Table hvp 300 Overview This display is used to show particle image data from the High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer HVPS probe The user can select the color for the images The display has the capability to hash out old images via a user selectable age limit parameter The display has an age counter that keeps track of how old an image is The number of displays buffers that the user can see per second can be controlled via the primary trigger frequency for the window The secondary trigger must be set to one second Sync buffer The HVDS display is made up of several strips Each strip displays as many slices as possible The number of slices per buffer is variable due to the HVPS data compression Slices are 256 bits pixels wide 32 bytes We have a one bit pixel mapping for the HVPS display Parameters Name The identifier for the High V
290. is CoPCIDACDA BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL BOARD Board name for PCIDAC interface board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage in volts CHANNEL 1 Output channel integer 0 1 Description Controls the output voltages for the PCIDAC Board This function is used to control the analog voltage value output for a specific channel The function returns an integer containing the calculated analog output voltage Check the PCIDAC manual for further details Result Type Space IA Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations ControlVo nen F501 ifi CoPCIDACDA Bd pcidacl16 1 0 0 Function Reference O 247 CoPMFDA Control PMF D A Voltages SEA Model 300 CoPMEDAQ Control PMF D A Voltages Synopsis CoPMFDA BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL BOARD Board name for PMF interface board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage in volts CHANNEL 1 Output channel integer 0 1 Description Controls the output voltages for the PMF Board This function is used to control the analog voltage value output for a specific channel The function returns an integer containing the calculated analog output voltage Check the PMF manual for further details Result Type Space IA Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations ControlVo nen F501 ifi CoPMFDA Bd pmf 1 0 0 Function Reference O 248 Copy Copy Arrays SEA Model 300 Copy Copy Arrays Synopsis Copy E INDEX ELEMENTS F m Formula for source array m21 INDEX 1 Index of sta
291. is done by this function for all particle slices For the edge Function Reference O 416 Sums2GAdv 2D Grey Advanced Sums SEA Model 300 reject modes the elapsed times for all particles rejected or not are counted up and used in the final correction The X size of a particle is computed by adding all the set bits in a particular slice From slice to slice in a given particle the X size only changes if it was greater than the largest X size found so far The X size computation may be modified by the minimum middle and maximum bits of the MODE parameter If the minimum bit is set all three shadow levels are counted minimum middle and maximum If the middle bit is set two shadow levels are counted middle and maximum Similarly if the maximum bits is set only the maximum shadow is counted For the X size method these are the only three valid modifiers One of these methods will be picked depending on which bits are set minimum is checked first then middle and finally maximum After April 12 2000 there is new method for correcting the total particle counts Please note that more work space is needed Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations 2DSums ett F100 F 64 Sums2dgadv A100 0x02 P3 1 1 25 Function Reference O 417 A LP SumsHVPS High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums SEA Model 300 SumsHVPS High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Sums
292. is used to hash out an old display Once the current CIP Image display is older than the specified ageLimit then the display gets hashed out as an indication of old data This parameter is specified in seconds The window must have the secondary trigger set to expire once per second on the synchronous buffer Probe This is the probe name from the probe table prb 300 This is used to associate a probe table entry with a CIP Image display entry see also Probe on page 528 Example Version 3 cip 300 name number window color board timebars scale ageLimit probe CIP 0 CIP Red 0x7300 1 1 60 cip Setup Table Reference 563 Command Table cmd 300 SEA Model 300 Command Table cmd 300 Overview The Command Table is used to execute any M300 commands that have been defined by the user The user can choose from a large array of commands and define specific keyboard mappings for them For instance a user can define the key mapping of Ctrl and F1 that will change the FSSP range simply by pressing Ctrl F1 Note that all commands are stored in a data file if acquiring at the time the command is input The commands are stored under reserved tag 65532 buffer number 251 Parameters Comment This entry describes what the particular defined function s is are for Comments must be started with a semi colon see also Comments on page 527 There are certain limitations on the use of comments and where they may be put Fo
293. isition event entry name character for character Example Version 1 7 buf 300 Number Freq Count Record Broadcast Sync Board 0 100 8 1 1 1 0x0000 Latitude Longitude True Heading Magnetic Heading Pitch Roll Altitude 1 100 8 1 1 0 PiragA T and Q A Config A Status A 2 100 8 1 1 0 PiragB T and Q B Config B Status B 3 100 8 1 1 0 PiragFwd T and Q Fwd Config Fwd Status Fwd PwdAntAz FwdAntTilt 4 100 8 1 1 0 CCN CCNData 5 100 8 11 0 Hygrometer HygrometerData 6 100 8 1 1 0 PitotPress PitotPressData 7 100 8 1 1 0 StaticPress StaticPressData 8 100 8 1 1 0 ProPak ProPakData 25108 1 1 0 0x0000 25208 1 1 0 0x0000 254 0 8 1 1 1 0x0000 Setup Table Reference O 558 Project Configuration Table cfg 300 SEA Model 300 Project Configuration Table cfg 300 Overview This table is used to store global M300 project information This information is saved every time the M300 exits Note that this data is global for a project only When the user switches to another project the M300 will load in new data from the cfg 300 file associated with the newly selected project Parameters Console Stores the console number 0 8 the user was viewing at the time the M300 last exited CommandHistory0 n Stores the commands that have been entered into the Command Manager command prompt The number of entries saved is dependent on the History Size set in the
294. isplay gets hashed out as an indication of old data This parameter is specified in seconds The window must have the secondary trigger set to expire once per second on the synchronous buffer Probe This is the probe name from the probe table See Probe Table prb 300 on page 609 This is used to associate a probe table entry with a 2D Mono display entry Please note that the sync pattern for the timebars is specified in the probe table Since the 2D Mono display knows about the probe entry it can find the sync pattern and use it when necessary We have used the probe entry as opposed to specifying the sync pattern here since this reduces the number of places where the sync pattern must be entered Basically the sync pattern goes with the probe and the user uses the probe entry where necessary see also Probe on page 528 Example Version 3 7 2dm 300 name number window color board timebars scale ageLimit probe 2DC 0 2DC red 2DC El 1 20 2dc 2DP 1 2DP green 2DP wi 4 15 2dp Setup Table Reference O 534 Acquisition Event Table acq 300 SEA Model 300 Acquisition Event Table acq 300 Overview The acquisition event table is used to define all the acquisition events and their properties Each acquisition event must belong to a board and have a valid acquisition type The tag number and the name identify the acquisition event and must be unique Acquisition events can be on off Data si
295. ition Reference O 49 Type 6 2D Mono TAS Factors SEA Model 300 Type 6 2D Mono TAS Factors Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono TAS factors from a 2D Mono adapter These TAS factors are the multiply and divide factors used to generate the TAS clock need to strobe image slices into the 2D Mono probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires two 16 bit words the multiply and divide factors respectively Therefore 4 bytes should be reserved for each sample Data Format Each of the 16 bit factors are stored in two successive word locations The multiply factor is stored first followed by the divide factor Type Asynchronous slave event Comments The true air speed clock frequency is equal to the multiply factor times 50 KHz divided by the divide factor Acquisition Reference O 50 Type 7 2D Mono Elapsed Time SEA Model 300 Type 7 QD Mono Elapsed Time Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono elapsed time value from a 2D Mono adapter Elapsed time is the number of 25s increments that have passed since the time the probe was armed and the probe became full Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 32 bit word Four bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format Th
296. ize is variable depending on the data Data Format The data format varies Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 164 Type 90 Network Binary Buffered Data SEA Model 300 Type 90 Network Binary Buffered Data Description This acquisition type acquires binary data from a socket Typical network data is less than 1024 bytes MTU Data for this acquisition type will be buffered up to the data size selected Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 expire s 0 255 2 3 Parameters Parameter 1 is used as number of seconds to expired data buffer A zero will not expire buffers based on time buffered data returned up to data size requested A non zero value will return all the data buffered so far up to the selected number of seconds Data Size The data size is variable depending on the data Data Format The data format varies Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 165 Type 100 PIRAQ I Q and P SEA Model 300 Type 100 PIRAQ I Q and P Description This acquisition type is used to acquire I Q and P data from the PIRAQ interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size is specified in bytes This acquisition event can have a variable number for the data size The valid data size for this acquisition event must be equal to the number of gates 4
297. l Range iiss borcesd e A e A deem oes 364 Ref lO 1D Reference Voltages ind e dl a E 365 RHToDewPoint Relative Humidity to Dew Point 00 0 cece ee 366 Scale First Order Scaling te o eee ace we enue sree dete ieee ewes 367 Scale20 Second Onder Scaling sean Loren e oot he o e a lie NE 368 Scale3 Third Order Scaling vita tie ls Wee Pee eee Peete betaine eee 369 ScaleArray First Order Array Scaling bere cnt ah lee aaa hee eee So eae ae mek 370 ScaleArray2 Second Order Array Scaling isc tupccees rra a 371 ScaleArray3 Third Order Array Scaling sao ead Gl iy eh eee eee 372 A O SECON Ss cater ee Sieg O a ars a aR Me gal eee ee Rd Nk Se AO 373 Table of Contents vi M300 Reference Guide SEA Model 300 Se al ASCHO Serial ASCI si al ASS TIA A A inert di 374 SerialDADSO Serial AIS ts dre teeta ate wate il whee eh ia dos 375 SenallEEE Seria IEEE jcc esse ds 376 SerialInteger Serial Wntepen Aveo te Vuh on ciate e De ted 377 SEV Fl SEL VAX ses Lapa Stl a S ee ees OM od Waa GS aha Peds 378 Seth Set RN 379 SIZES OE SIZES ass E A A A Ac 380 Skip Skip RE arte hence AS ie es eke AN AROSA NOR OR TERR E R ees or eure a 381 Slope Return Slope of a Line ass cs Ghetto eee Oe E eho ead ee oa ae 382 Splat EDAD statin O oA Id a UNO le ES 383 SPP100Data SPP100 Data Retrieve cee eee eee ees 385 SrASCIHO Sena NS CAE tiara di nat laa bario 387 SDADSO Serial DADS edo ud a A a 388 SrData Serial Data Function a
298. le Name Units Number Result Computations Areas rent F200 F 15 Areas Pr 1D F100 F54 F102 Function Reference 210 Arinc4290ut ARINC 429 Output SEA Model 300 Arinc4290 ut ARINC 429 Output Synopsis Arinc4290ut BOARD DATA LABEL BITS RANGE BOARD Arinc429 board entry board DATA 1 Data to be sent out float or long LABEL 1 Arinc user label integer BITS 1 Number of bits to use integer RANGE 1 Range scale for data Description This function is used to send ARINC429 data out to the ARINC 429 board The user must specify the ARINC label to use The function returns one when successful and zero for failure Valid values for bits are O to send raw integer data or 2 20 to send scaled data Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Arinc4290ut F300 T II Arinc4290ut Bd Arinc429 F100 42 10 600 0 Function Reference O 211 Arinc708Data ARINC 708 Data SEA Model 300 Arinc708Data ARINC 708 Data Synopsis Arinc708Data A SELECT A Acquisition tag for Ballard ARINC 708 data tag SELECT 1 Data field select integer 1 9 17 30 37 43 50 52 65 Description This function is used to retrieve certain ARINC 708 data The SELECT field chooses which data fields are returned SELECT Probe Data Return Type 1 label I 1 9 control data accept I 1 17 faults I 1 30 tilt F 1 37 gain F 1 43 maximum range F 1 50 contr
299. lement to be changed integer 0 VALUE 1 New value for array element Description Used to construct arrays of elements or just change a few elements in an array F INDEX VALUE Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Array ma F100 F 15 Array F100 5 3 14159 Function Reference O 214 AsyncData Asynchronous Data SEA Model 300 AsyncData Asynchronous Data Synopsis AsyncData A OFFSET A Acquisition tag for asynchronous data tag OFFSET 1 Byte offset into data block integer KP Note Deprecated M300 uses other means to retrieve needed asynchronous data Access tag with the desired trigger Description This function is used to retrieve data from the asynchronous buffer into a formula This allows calculations and display to work with this asynchronous data In the M200 system the user only had to specify an asynchronous tag number to get the desired data In the M300 system the user must specify the correct trigger to be able to get the desired anachronism data Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Trigger Trigger Never Never None 2D Mono 1 2DMono Name Units Number Result Formulas ElapsedTime de F7012 L 1 AsyncData A7007 0 Function Reference 215 Average Average SEA Model 300 Average Average Synopsis Average F CYCLES STATE F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 CYCLES 1 Period of time for average
300. llowing formula summarizes the computations fli Ali B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Subtract ney F300 F 15 Sub F100 F200 Function Reference O 408 Sum Summation SEA Model 300 Sum Summation Synopsis Sum F F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 Description Computes the sum of all values in an array n 1 f gt Fli i 0 Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Sum ree F200 F i Sum F100 Function Reference O 409 A LP Sums1D Sums 1D SEA Model 300 Sums1D Sums 1D Synopsis Sums1D A INTERVAL STATE FIRST A 1D acquisition tag number tag INTERVAL 1 Interval of summation in display cycles integer STATE 1 Function control variable integer FIRST 1 Skip channel zero size integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See OdSums LD Sums Description This function sums up all 1D samples i e FSSP ASASP from a data buffer This summation is accrued for an interval of time as specified by the second parameter in display cycles At the end of the time interval the sums are returned through the result space and the internal summation values are cleared for the next summation period The STATE control variable is used to control the function operation mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the summation is done every int
301. lock The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different AIMMS ADP data fields The function will returns the value of a user specified item from a AIMMS ADP buffer Please check the AIMMS ADP manual for further information Data Field SELECT Result Time HH MM SS 0 S 12 Temperature Celsius 1 F 1 Relative Humidity 2 F 1 Barometric Pressure pa 3 F 1 Wind Flow Vector NS m s 4 F 1 Wind Flow Vector EW m s 5 F 1 Wind Speed m s 6 F 1 Wind Direction deg 7 F 1 Wind Solution Flag 8 111 AIMMS 20 Id 00 Standard Meteorology Packet para3 00 Select Data Field SELECT Result Time HH MM SS 0 S 12 Latitude deg 1 F 1 Longitude deg 7 F 1 AIMMS 20 Id 01 Aircraft Data Packet para3 01 Select Function Reference O 202 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access SEA Model 300 Data Field SELECT Result Altitude m 3 F 1 Velocity NS m s 4 FI Velocity EW m s 5 FU Velocity UD m s 6 F 1 Roll deg 7 E 1 Pitch deg 8 FL s 9 E 1 TAS m s 10 E 1 Vertical Wind m s 11 F 1 Side Slip das 12 Fl AOA Pressure Diff pa 13 F 1 Side Slip Diff pa 14 F 1 AIMMS 20 Id 01 Aircraft Data Packet para3 01 Select Data Field SELECT Result Time HH MM SS 0 s 12 Latitude rad 1 D 1 Longitude rad 3 D 1 Altitude m 3 F 1 Ground Spe
302. lowing formula AD RawCounts 100 PixelSize You can convert elapsed TAS 100 to a time by using the following formula AT RawCounts L ae 2x10 s MultiplyFactor Acquisition Reference 52 Type 9 2D Mono Elapsed Shadow OR SEA Model 300 Type 9 2D Mono Elapsed Shadow OR Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono elapsed shadow or count form a 2D Mono adapter Elapsed shadow or count is the number of times the shadow or output of the probe was active while the probe was armed Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The 16 bit word is an unsigned integer counting the number of times the shadow or line when active while the 2D Mono probe was armed Type Asynchronous slave event Comments This acquisition should be taken at the end of each image This provides and approximate check with the number of particles in the image buffer Acquisition Reference O 53 Type 10 2D Mono Total Shadow OR SEA Model 300 Type 10 2D Mono Total Shadow OR Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Mono total shadow or count from a 2D Mono adapter Total shadow or count is the number of times the shadow or output of the probe went active from the last time this data was acquired Parameters
303. lue If the STATE control variable is a 1 then new data is processed and a intercept value returned If the STATE control variable is a 2 this cause the last intercept value to be held Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Intercept we F100 F 1 Intercept F1000 F2000 F200 Function Reference O 302 IR In Range SEA Model 300 IR In Range Synopsis IR E LOW HIGH F 7 Formula value for an array of values 721 LOW 1 Formula for lower limit HIGH 1 Formula for upper limit Description This function is short for In Range and will return a one if the formula value is within the low and high limits inclusive Otherwise if the formula value is outside the range a zero is returned if F i gt LOW F i lt HIGH then fli 1 else f i 0 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space I 7 Example Name Units Number Result Computations InRange MEN F100 I 10 IR F101 5 100 Function Reference O 303 A LP IVar1D Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D SEA Model 300 IVar1D Inverse Velocity Acceptance Ratio 1D Synopsis IVar1 D A STROBEINDEX TOTALSTROBEINDEX CFAC INTERVAL A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag STROBEINDEX 1 Strobe count channel index integer TOTALSTROBEINDEX 1 Total strobes count index integer CFAC 1 Correction factor INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See OdIVar 1
304. lways has the size counts The second optional block has the interval counts Type Synchronous event Comments To obtain the 1D reference voltage use channel zero on the built in Analog to Digital Converter See 1D256 Analog to Digital Converter acquisition Please note that the reference voltage is internally divided by two compared to the other channels This acquisition type also writes the low word of every size channel to the BALLARD interface card The address used for data transfer is CO00 0840 Data from channel zero is skipped The last word is used as the new data counter This location increments after new data has been placed in the memory Acquisition Reference O 130 Type 65 Serial Port DC 8 DADS Data SEA Model 300 Type 65 Serial Port DC 8 DADS Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the serial port one via interrupt four Since the DC 8 DADS serial data is composed of several blocks the user can specify the identifier for the last data block Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Identifying character 0 255 2 Terminating character 0 255 3 Throttle ale Parameters The Identifying character Parameter 1 represents the first ASCII character of the last block of DC 8 DADS Serial data The Terminating character Parameter 2 represents the last ASCII character of the last block of DC 8 DADS Serial data If Parameter 1 is set to zero and Parameter 2 to non z
305. lword lword lword float float float float ubyte timingMode delay gates hits gateWidth pulseWidth pulseRepetitionTime watchdog firstGateMode phaseCorrectMode clutterFilterMode timeSeriesMode timeSeriesGate scankate pulseRate indexOfRefraction beamWidth dsp 256 PqConfig Acquisition Reference O 168 Type 101 PIRAQ Config Type Asynchronous slave event Comments None Acquisition Reference 169 SEA Model 300 Type 102 PIRAQ Status Type 102 PIRAQ Status Description This acquisition type is used to acquire status data from the PIRAQ interface Description This acquisition type is used to acquire status data from the PIRAQ interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size 76 bytes Data Format SEA Model 300 This acquisition event stores the Piraq Status data The following C structure is used to specify the data Please refer to the SEA data types section for information on the different data types used typedef struct PqStatus lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword lword newBuffer gates hits gateWidth firstGateMode phaseCorrectMode clutterFilterMode timeSeriesMode timeSeriesGate numeratorDiscriminator denominatorDiscriminator firstGateInverseMagnitude sparel spare2 spare3 spare4 status Acq
306. m 1 255 maximum number of AIMMS20 ID22 samples sentences to acquire in the M300 buffer If you look in the raw data buffer parameter 2 will have the actual number of samples acquired Since the buffer size is a limiting factor for the AIMMS20 ID22 data sometimes the number of samples acquired is less than the number requested When the buffer is full we need to terminate and start a new one Parameter 3 is set by the M300 to specify sentence id Data Size The data size is varies depending on the sentence type Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the AIMMS specification Use the AIMMSData function to retrieve individual data elements from the data block To process AIMMS data first setup a general trigger for the AIMMS data and specific board to get the different sentence id formula triggers using DirData function Then use the same trigger plus the different formula triggers for each different data block See ALMMSData AIMMS Data Access There is a sample of this in the test aimms20 project Acquisition Reference O 156 Type 82 Serial Port AIMMS Data SEA Model 300 Type Asynchronous master event Comments To perform a purge on the AAMMS ADP See AIMMS Commands Acquisition Reference 157 Type 83 Network POSAV Data SEA Model 300 Type 83 Network POSAV Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the POSAV Parameters Parameter U
307. meters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size is dependent on the bytes per sample The maximum data size is 1025 bytes Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the binary data sent by the CAS in response to the request data command check the CAS PBP manual Use the CasPbpData function to retrieve individual data elements from the CAS PBP data block Type Synchronous event Comments The CAS PBP setup parameters are controlled through the Board Table You must have an entry in the Board Table for the CAS PBP Board Acquisition Reference 153 Type 80 Ballard 708 Data Type 80 Ballard 708 Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the Ballard 708 interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size SEA Model 300 The data size is 200 bytes per sample This matches the specification for ARINC 708 Check the ARINC 708 specification for more information Data Format The data format follows the exact description of the ARINC 708 specification Use the Ballard708Data function to retrieve individual data elements from the data block Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 154 Type 81 Serial Port Tamdar Data SEA Model 300 Type 81 Serial Port Tamdar Data Description This acquisition type acquires data from the Tamdar Parameters
308. mmarizes the calculations s i Ali Bli fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Sub nn F101 F 10 F10 F11 Math Function Reference O 441 Multiply SEA Model 300 Multiply Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function returns an array of values representing the multiplication of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations s i A i B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Mul Tey F101 F 10 F10 F11 Math Function Reference 442 A KF Divide SEA Model 300 Divide Synopsis AB A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Note B should not contain any zero values or divide by zero will occur For the values which are zero this function will generate an unknown value in the result of that operation Description This function returns an array of values representing the division of the two given arrays element by element This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Div nom F101 F 10 F105
309. mp argument is optional if it is not included at the end of the command the M300 will stop and wait for the command to terminate before continuing i e it will not run in the background shutdown Exits the M300 application Following the closing of the M300 application QNX will shutdown If you decide to setup a shutdown or quit key for the M300 make sure you pick a combination that cannot be hit inadvertently WARNING You will not be prompted for a confirmation quit Closes the M300 application Any open data files are saved and closed automatically Example F10 broadcast on broadcast off CAS F12 shutdown F5 quit F10 run RawView amp Command Manager Reference O 503 Label Display Commands SEA Model 300 Label Display Commands Synopsis Ibl from to onloff from First label name number to perform operation on to Last label name number to perform operation on optional Description This command performs various operations on the M300 Label displays The M300 will perform the operation on all of the Label displays in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations onloff Changes the state of the list displays to either on or off When the state is off the display will not update Example Fl IpI 0 3 off ist 0 3 on Command Manager Reference O 504 List Display Commands SEA Model 300 List Display Commands Synop
310. mples in the formula space The SUMS1D REF1D and CMD1D functions should used to compute and retrieve the counts reference voltage and command range for the SPP100 The following table shows the possible values for the SELECT parameter and the corresponding returned data element SELECT SPP100 Data Item 0 7 Analog channels 0 7 raw counts 0x80 0x87 Analog channels 0 7 volts 8 Reject depth of field 9 Reject average transit 10 Average transit 11 FIFO Full 12 Reset Flag 13 ADC Overflow Table 10 SELECT For a description of these data items check the SPP100 manual Function Reference 385 SPP100Data SPP100 Data Retrieve SEA Model 300 The following table shows the description of each analog channel Description Channel Signal A A 0 0 Mask A A 1 1 Aux S3 A 2 Aux S A 3 Laser Reference A 4 Aux S1 A 5 Aux S2 A 6 NY WA We AIIN Internal Temperature A 7 Table 11 Analog Channels Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry Example Name Units Number Result Computations AverageTransit Heat F100 F 10 SPP100Data A100 10 Function Reference O 386 SrASCII Serial ASCII SEA Model 300 SrASCII Serial ASCII Synopsis SrASCII DATA INDEX DELIMITER COUNT MODE DATA Acquisition tag for Serial ASCII data or formula tag or formula INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer 1
311. mputes the distance in nautical miles between two points usually a reference position and an aircraft s current position ALATITUDE i LAT i REFLAT i 3 4377467x10 ALONGITUDE i LON i REFLON 3 4377467x10 cos LAT fli JALATITUDE ALONGITUDE nmi fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n min m p n s Example Name Units Number Result Computations Range nmi F300 F 1 Range F100 F101 F200 F201 Function Reference O 364 RefIDO LD Reference Voltage SEA Model 300 Ref1D 1D Reference Voltage Synopsis Ref1 D A A Acquisition tag for 1D data tag KP Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See OdRef 1D Reference Voltage Description This function retrieves the reference voltage from 1D data and converts it to volts This function can be used with 1D CAMAC 1D SPP100 SPP200 and SPP300 data types Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations 1DReferenceVoltage jie F100 F 1 Ref1D A100 Function Reference O 365 RHToDewPoint Relative Humidity to Dew Point SEA Model 300 RHToDewPoint Relative Humidity to Dew Point Synopsis RHToDewPoint RH TEMP RH 7 Formula for relative humidity 7 gt 0 TEMP 1 Formula for outside air temperature value Description This function calculates an approximation of the dewpoint based on the RH relative humidity and TEMP outside air temperature arguments passed The following fo
312. ms dry adiabats saturated adiabats and mixing ration lines There is also a vertical bar which shows a profile of wind speed and directions this is an option Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the Skew T entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer Note that multiple Skew T displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Skew T displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Skew T display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Skew T display will not affect the HVPS display Window The name of the window where the Skew T display is to be performed This window must be of Skew T type see also Window on page 527 Color Color used for Skew T display see also Color on page 528 WindColor Color used for Wind in Skew T display see also Color on page 528 Type This parameter is used to select what gets drawn once a new point is found Setup Table Reference 617 Skew T Display Table skt 300 SEA Model 300 Name Type Point 0 Line 1 Bullet 2 Line w bullet 4 Type Width Line width for the Skew T entry This is normally 1 pixel wide Lar
313. n The resulting array of values is explained via the following equation J 0 A O Mie arelsat fori 0 n 1 Result Dia Example Name Units Number Result Computations OAP260XLWCCumulative g m3 F9200 F 62 Cumulative F9050 Function Reference O 256 Date Date String SEA Model 300 Date Date String Synopsis Date A0 AO Acquisition tag for date time data tag KP Note Because the M300 now uses the M300 buffer time for data retrieval the Acquisition tag argument is no longer used It is still needed to maintain backward compatibility with the M200 Description This function converts the M300 buffer date time into an ASCII string for display purposes The string is in the form of YY YY MM DD where YYYY is the year MM is the month and DD is the days Function will return a character array string of size n containing the characters that make up the date string that was retrieved from the data The size of n is dependant on how many characters are required to represent that particular date Usually this size is 10 or 12 Result Type Space S n n 10 or 12 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DateString ett F1 S 12 Date A0 Function Reference O 257 DateTime Date Time String DateTime Date Time String Synopsis Date Time A0 SEA Model 300 AO Acquisition tag for date time data tag Note Because the M300 now uses the M300 buffer time for data retrieval the
314. n Reference Function Reference SEA Model 300 Functions are routines which perform specific operations so that they may be used over and over again Each function needs a certain number of parameters factors to act on These parameters are specified inside parenthesis separated by commas All functions return the result of the operation to the floating point stack allowing them to be used as an operand to a stack operation Parameters to functions cannot be any kind of operation or other functions Note As part of the improvement process engineers at SEA have updated and improved functions which were part of the M200 DAS One of these improvements is a new function naming conven tion For example the initials Sr prefix all new M300 serial data related functions i e Serial Ascii is now SrAscii This new convention was developed to help standardize function names however most of the older M200 functions are 100 compatible with the M300 Although not necessary for operation users are encouraged to use the new M300 functions in place of the older M200 functions Functions that have been updated with a new M300 replacement are indicated by the term Deprecated in the function Synopsis This is to indicate to the user that SEA highly recommends use of the new function a link to the new function is included in the deprecation statement The following is a list of the functions presently available
315. n and starts the accumulation process all over again Note that this function can have three different calling formats The first is fully compatible with earlier versions and it does the regular spectrum computations This calling format only supports modes 0 1 and 2 The second has one extra parameter and it uses the same computation with the exception that it does not assume square sizing pixels This later method can be useful if the TAS is greater than the maximum TAS the probe can sample at In this case the last parameter is used to specify the Y size of the pixel This size should be equal to the TAS divided by the probe clock frequency TAS FREQ where FREQ MULTFAC 50000 DIVFAC This calling format only supports modes 0 1 and 2 The third can be used to compute particle size from the total area provided by the minimum middle and maximum counts This method assumes that the particles are round and it works out the particle diameter from the total area of a circle round particle This calling format only supports modes 3 and 4 Since this function has different calling formats there is no syntax checking on the number of parameters passed to the function Care should be taken to use the appropriate number of parameters or the function will not return a spectrum array and it may affect system performance Result Type Space Dix Function Reference O 413 Sums2G 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 Example Name Units N
316. n is accomplished by replacing the EPROM Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 LORAN GPS Command 0 255 2 LORAN GPS Control Byte 0 255 3 Type 0 1 2 Parameters The Loran GPS control byte should be set up to have a value that will be compatible with the protocol of the data being received The meaning of the control byte is as follows Bit Usage Bo Parity on 1 parity off 0 B4 Parity odd 1 parity even 0 Be 2 stop bits 1 1 stop bit 0 B 8 data bits 1 7 data bits 0 By Lowest bit for baud rate control nibble B3 Next to lowest B4 Next to highest Bs Highest bit for baud rate control nibble Control Byte Meaning Acquisition Reference O 59 Type 14 Loran C GPS The baud rates supported are as follows Nibble Value Baud Rate 0000 19 200 0001 9 600 0010 7 200 0011 4 800 0100 3 600 0101 2 400 0110 2 000 0111 1 800 1000 1 200 1001 600 1010 300 1011 200 1100 150 1101 115 200 1110 57 600 1111 38 400 Baud Rates SEA Model 300 Parameter two must have the appropriate Loran GPS command byte Parameter three is used as the data type Use zero for integer one for float and two for character data types Data Size This routine acquires various data sizes depending on the command sent to the Loran GPS card Refer to the Loran GPS adapter documentation for information reg
317. n line through the given data points The STATE control variable is used to control the function operation mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the function performs a reset and computes a new value If the STATE control variable is a 1 then new data is processed and a intercept value returned If the STATE control variable is a 2 this cause the last intercept value to be held Result Type Space DL Example Name Units Number Result Computations Slope ai F100 F 1 Slope F1000 F2000 F200 Function Reference O 382 SpData SPP CDP Data SEA Model 300 SpData SPP CDP Data Synopsis SpData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for SPP100 SPP200 SPP300 CDP CDPPBP tag SELECT 1 Data select integer Description This function is used to retrieve all samples for the selected data item from the SPP100 SPP200 SPP300 CDP and CDPPBP data structure Only one data item may be returned at a time into a particular formula number Specify the number of desired samples in the formula space The OdSums 1D Sums OdRef 1D Reference Voltage and OdCmd 1D Command should used to compute and retrieve the counts reference voltage and command range for the SPP The following table shows the possible values for the SELECT parameter and the corresponding returned data element Not all SPP CDP Probes have the same data fields Please check the SPP CDP probe manual for further information on the fields that are supported by
318. n select the area bar color and line bar color Parameters Name Name for histogram display entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple Histogram displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a Histogram display does also then a command set up to change the color of the Histogram display will not affect the HVPS display Window Name of the window where the Histogram display will be performed This window must be of Histogram type see also Window on page 527 BarColor LineColor Color for the area bar and line see also Color on page 528 Frequency The frequency for the summation For example if the user specifies a frequency of 0 2 hz then the area bar will represent 5 seconds of summation The line bar is reset every 5 seconds Formula Data source representing an array of values for the bar graph see also Formula on page 528 Setup Table Reference 577 Histogram Display Table his 300 SEA Model 300 Example 7 Version 3 7 his 300 name number window barColor lineColor frequency formula CAS FWD 0 wnd21 Ox0000FF OxFF0000 0 2 F1000 CAS BAK 1 wnd23 Ox0000FF OxFF0000 0 2 F10
319. n the M300 system 1 Hz sync trigger Trigger Sync 1 None Never Ignore None 2DC Sizes F1000 F 32 PrData Pr 2dc 2 The primary trigger is set for Sync buffer 1 Hz and ignore address The secondary trigger is not a factor This basically gets the 2DC Sizes once per second and updates for F1000 Trigger 1 setup for 1 Hz sync trigger trigger 2 set for 10 Hz 2D Mono Data Trigger Sync 1 None 2D Image 10 2dc 2DC Counts F1001 F 32 MoSums Pr 2dc Aq 2DCImage 0x00 1 Here the trigger needed to be changed to handle the 2DC data into the MoSums function The MoSums function needs a 1 Hz Sync trigger to produce a result once per second It also needs the secondary trigger to fire for the 2D Image for the 2dc board The secondary trigger in this case sets a maximum of 10 Hz in other words a maximum of 10 buffers per second will be analyzed by the MoSums function Trigger 1 Hz on 2D Mono data for 2dc board Trigger 2D Image 1 2dc Never Ignore None M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 27 Trigger SEA Model 300 2DC Tas Factors m F1002 1 Aq 2DCTasFactors 2DC Elapsed Time it F1003 1 1 Aq 2DCElapsedTime 2DC Elapsed Tas un F1004 1 1 Aq 2DCElapsedTas 2DC Elapsed Shadow Or F1005 i 1 Aq 2DCElapsedShadowOr 2DC Tas Mul Fac un F1100 i 1 F1002 2DC Tas Div Fac oii F1101 i 1 F1002 16 gt gt 2DC Tas Clock In MHZ F1102 F 1 PrTasClockIn Aq 2DCTasFactors 2DC Elapsed Time het F11
320. n the probe and the data system A 1 MHZ divide factor 4 should be adequate for the majority of installations where the cable length is less than 50 feet If longer cables are used the user should try slower rates The most common symptoms of a too high a bit shift rate are image jitter or missing pixels Acquisition Reference O 117 Type 54 Novatel GPS SEA Model 300 Type 54 Novatel GPS Description This acquisition type is used to acquire raw binary data from the Novatel GPS card Use the number of samples bytes per sample and rearm parameter to control the amount of data acquired This acquisition type cannot be used multiple times in the acquisition table to acquire data from more than one interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Rearm Rate I Parameters The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which buffers will be recorded Data Size The data size varies from data block to data block and buffer to buffer Data Format The data format is as specified in the Novatel GPS manual One or more Novatel GPS data blocks exist in a data buffer Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference 118 Type 55 VAX Clock SEA Model 300 Type 55 VAX Clock Description This acquisition type is responsible for acquiring the VAX clock data Parameters Parameter U
321. nd forces the display to stay on one level of the 3x3 console array Horizontal right sets the active console to next console to the right This command forces the display to stay on one level of the 3x3 console array Horizontal up sets the active console to the next upper level in the 3x3 display array If the user is currently at the top of the display array then console switches to the bottom most console level Vertical Command Manager Reference O 511 Screen Console Commands down sets the active console to the next lower level in the 3x3 display array If the user is currently at the bottom of the console array then console switches to the top most console level Vertical next sets the active console to the next console in sequence regardless of which console level it is on If the console is currently console 8 then console 0 will become active prev sets the active console to the previous console in sequence regardless of which console level it is on If the console is currently console 0 then console 8 will become active home sets the active console to console 0 end sets the active console to console 8 last switch between current and last console Example F1 scn 0 scn 1 scn 2 F2 scn prev F3 scn next Command Manager Reference O 512 SEA Model 300 Skew T Display Commands SEA Model 300 Skew T Display Commands Synopsis skt from to clear from First entry to
322. ndividual element from an integer array It returns a integer value referenced by INDEX in the integer array referenced by E f F INDEX Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Integer Array F200 I 1 TArray F100 3 Function Reference O 292 IasP Inverse Pressure Indicated Airspeed SEA Model 300 IasP Inverse Pressure Indicated Airspeed Synopsis IasP IAS IAS 7 Formula of an array of indicated airspeed in knots 1 gt 0 Description This function computes the pitot pressure differential pressure from indicated air speed IAS L 2 1837E6 fori 0 n 1 aoe fli 1013 25 1 mb Result Type Space D n Example 7 Namne Units Number Result Computations PDitotPress mb F200 F 1 ITasP F100 Function Reference O 293 IIndex Integer Element Access SEA Model 300 IIndex Integer Element Access Synopsis IIndex F INDEX F 7 Formula for array of integers integer 7 gt 0 INDEX 1 Index of desired element from integer array integer gt 0 Description This function is used to access an individual element from an integer array It returns a integer value referenced by INDEX in the integer array referenced by F f F INDEX Result Type Space IA Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Integer Index MU F200 I 1 IIndex F100 3 Function Reference O 294 Incloud In Cloud Prediction SEA Model 300 Incloud In Cloud
323. ne a formula number name before it s used This has several advantages as you will see later on in the documentation Each computation is made up from several factors tokens Spaces are used to delimit tokens and comas are used to separate each function parameter Factors can be an integer number floating point number a string a math function a regular function probe entry etc The Formula Table fml 300 can have a Trigger entry to change the current trigger see also Trigger in M300 Miscellaneous Reference on page 19 The default trigger is one second synchronous buffer This means all computations are performed from top to bottom by default once a second Parameters Name Name for the formula entry which is used to identify the formula sort of a variable name see also Name in M300 Miscellaneous Reference on page 527 Units The units field is used to specify formula units If the formula has no units then this field can be left as a blank The formula units are useful in several ways First it helps the user keep track and document the units for each formula In the M200 this was normally part of the description field which no longer exists T he units are also used by the different display type to automatically put units up This saves the user the hassle of creating and displaying units for every desired entry The units field can have special ASCII characters such as p 2 This is the only field that allows t
324. ng latitude and longitude position Aircraft heading wind barbs are possible using the position entry There must be a map entry in the file prior to position entries Multiple position entries are possible per map entry Name The identifier for the position entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique number to identify the position entry This can be used for commands State The state variable is used to control when a position entry is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 Data for a position entry is always updated even when the display is not visible see also State on page 528 Wind Barb State The wind barb state variable is used to control when a wind barb is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 Data for a wind barb entry is always updated even when the display is not visible see also State on page 528 Color Color for display object Setup Table Reference O 600 Target Position Display Table pos 300 SEA Model 300 Type The type of object that will be displayed 16 x 16 Aircraft 24 x 24 Aircraft Name Type Type None 1 Plane 0 10 Cross 1 11 Point 2 12 X 3 13 Diamond 4 14 Box 5 15 Triangle 6 16 Circle 7 17 Type Note If you wish to display the map without a position marker use 1 for type This will generate an entry to display the track with no position marker Width The track width in pixels rang
325. nificantly larger than the maximum block rate that will be received If the throttle rate is less than or equal to the actual block rate the internal FIFO will never completely empty This will increase data latency Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of bytes in the largest serial data block The data size is automatically resized to the actual number of bytes in the serial block Data Format The data acquired corresponds to the IEEE data sent Type Asynchronous master event or synchronous event This data type provides improved flexibility over the M200 version because it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous events Ifan Asynchronous master event is used the buffer automatically resizes for the number of bytes coming in This also implies that the bytes per sample are the largest block of data to be collected This acquisition event must be the first event of an asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Acquisition Reference O 94 Type 38 Serial IEEE Data SEA Model 300 If a Synchronous event is being used the buffer size is not dynamic and must have the bytes per sample set to a user specified value large enough to collect the data This value is the maximum number of bytes that can be acquired at one time If the buffer is not filled during acquisition then all rem
326. ns will be in cc The correction factor can be used to return the resulting concentrations in different units as well as using the velocity acceptance ratio For example a correction factor of 1000 will give the result in mm3 a correction factor of 0 001 will give the result in l and a correction factor of 1 0e 6 will give the result in m3 The SAREA dD and dLOGD originate from the user specified channel files via the probe number name The BUFLIFE and SYSFREQ refer to the values entered in the system table The SYSFREQ is associated with the system frequency in the time data This comes from the frequency values in the system board entry The BUFLIFE is associated with the buffer life in the time data In the M300 system the buffer life and system frequency are the same for synchronous buffers The following formula summarizes the computation fil BUFLIFE j LY A EN SAREA i RANGE VALUE TAS SYS CFAC where i 0 n channel number if MODE 0 then VALUE 1 if MODE 1 then VALUE dD i RANGE if MODE 2 then VALUE d LOGD i RANGE Function Reference 245 Concs Concentrations SEA Model 300 Result D n n min a probe channels Example Name Units Number Result Computations Concentrations F300 F 15 CONCS F101 P1 F200 1 0 F10 1 1 Function Reference O 246 CoPCIDACDA Control PCIDAC D A Voltages SEA Model 300 CoPCIDACDA Control PCIDAC D A Voltages Synops
327. nstrument allows us to be certain that the requested action actually took place OnValue OffValue The desired on and off values for the button These fields take on several different meanings They can specify an actual values which will be used to set the formula when the button is clicked However if the formula parameter is set to 1 then these fields can be setup for a command string which will be passed to the command manager Multiple commands can be entered by separating them with the special E character Setup Table Reference O 554 SSG e aouasafay 299 dnyas Example btn 300 Version 1 name number window type state font color onColor offColor onLabel offLabel style group flag x y w h formula name number window type state font color onColor offColor onLabel offLabel style group flag x y w h formula indFormula name number window type state font color onColor offColor onLabel offLabel style group flag x y w h formula onValue offValue name number window type state font color onColor offColor onLabel offLabel style group flag x y w h formula indFormula onValue offValue Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None Range0 0 FSSPERtxt 1 1 Courierl6b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFF0000 0 0 6 FsspERRange 1 480 60 60 18 F 1 F4052 cmdld FsspER 0 0 Rangel 1 FSSPERtxt 1 1 Courierl6 b OxFFFFFF 0x00A000 OxFFO000 1 1 6 FsspERRange 0 480 82 60 18 F 1 F4052 cmdld FsspER 1 1 Range2 2 FSSPERtxt 1 1 Courierl1l
328. nt This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation Although the M300 is designed to trap most errors including user errors care should be exercised to avoid division by zero The following formula summarizes the calculations Ali fli E B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Divide MN F300 F 15 Computations Div F200 F201 Function Reference O 266 DToE Double to Float SEA Model 300 DToF Double to Float Synopsis DToF A A Acquisition tag for double data tag Description This function takes eight bytes double and converts them to a float number It will return an array of size n containing the converted double to float values where 7 is the number of samples from the directory referenced by A Acquisition tag name number The M200 system did not have support for double types This function was necessary to get the double data into a float format With the M300 system this function is not necessary You should be able to just use the tag number and get the number in double format onto the stack Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations DoubleToFloat ga F100 F 45 DToF A100 Function Reference O 267 EqQ Equal SEA Model 300 Eq Equal Synopsis Eq A B FTRUE FFALSE A 1 First value used in comparison B 1 Second value used in comparison FTRUE m Formul
329. nt a 10 hz buffer We will assume a system frequency of 200 hz To figure out the buffer life we take the system frequency and divide it by the desired buffer frequency 200 hz 10 hz 20 life for 10 hz Sync buffer So now if we want to trigger using the 10 hz Sync buffer at 10 hz we would use the following trigger Trigger Sync20 10 None Never Ignore None The Sync parameter now needs the buffer life of 20 so it can select the correct buffer for the trigger This setup would have a Sync 1 Hz buffer Life 200 and Sync 10 Hz buffer Life 20 With the Sync 10 Hz buffer you can trigger up to 10 hz but not more Sync buffer slower than 1 hz Sync 0 0666666667 Hz buffer once every 15 seconds Let s address the case for a slow sync buffer We will still use 200 hz for system frequency Suppose we want a buffer to be done once every 15 seconds So this gives us a 0 066666667 hz Sync buffer Again to figure out the buffer life we take the system frequency and divide it by the desired buffer frequency 200 hz 0 0666666667 3000 life for the 0 066666667 hz Sync buffer So now if we want to trigger using the 0 066666667 hz Sync buffer we would use the following trigger Trigger Sync3000 1 None Never Ignore None A few trigger examples Next we will be explaining how the Trigger affects computations in the formula manager with some examples Initialization trigger based on sync buffer Trigger Sync Once None Neve
330. nt interface number Parameter two is used to specify the probe control word This value specifies the number of size channels the number of aux channels and the probe range B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO aux4 aux3 aux2 aux ch1 ch0 rangel range0 Type 67 Channel Selection Values For the aux channels use a one to disable the channel or a zero to enable it The following table specifies the special case situations Maximum B7 Channel 64 channels no aux 4 82 5 1 00 32 channels no aux 5 0 01 16 channels aux 5 enabled 0 10 16 channels aux 5 disable 0 11 Special Auxiliary Settings Acquisition Reference O 137 Type 67 PMS 1058B 1D Data SEA Model 300 The upper nibble for parameter three is used as the number of sizes counts to be stored A value of zero indicates 16 channels a value of one indicates 32 channels and a value of three indicates 64 channels The lower nibble for parameter three is used as number of aux channels to be stored Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of size channels times two plus the number of aux channels times two Data Format The data acquired is composed of size 1 through size n n less than or equal 32 followed by aux 1 through aux m m less than or equal 5 The data for each channel is 16 bits wide Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 138 Ty
331. nters counter 139 Type 69 BC620AT Time 140 Type 70 DRV11 Data data type dma rearm 141 Type 71 Pressure Multiplexer id channel gain 142 Type 72 INS INI Synchro synchro 144 Type 73 INS INI Serial label card 145 Type 74 INS INI Flags 146 Type 75 SPP CDP Data interface command 147 Type 76 CAS Serial Data interface control 149 Type 77 CIP Serial Data interface 151 Acquisition Reference Continued Acquisition Reference O 39 Acquisition Reference SEA Model 300 Type Description Parameter Parameter2 Parameter3 Page Type 78 CIP Image Data DMA rearm 152 Type 79 CAS PBP Data 153 Type 80 Ballard 708 Data 154 Type 81 Serial Port Tamdar Data stx etx type 155 Type 82 Serial Port AIMMS Data type samples id 156 Type 83 Network POSAV Data 158 Type 84 Network ASCII Data block 159 Type 85 Network Binary Data match 160 Type 86 CIPGS Data 161 Type 87 CIPGS Image Data 162 Type 88 CIPGS Info Data 163 Type 89 Serial Binary match 164 Type 90 Network Binary Buffered Data expire 165 Type 100 PIRAQ I Q and P 166 Type 101 PIRAQ Config 168 Type 102 PIRAQ Status 170 Type 250 Status Info Data type sub type 172 Type 251 Command Data 174 Type 252 Error Data 175 Type 253 Telemetric Data type 176 Type 254 Secondary Acquisition type 177 Type 255 Tables Data 179 Acquisition Reference Conti
332. ntrol ATDAQ141X D A Board 236 CoCIPGSTAS Control TAS to CIPGS Probe 237 CoCIPTAS Control TAS to CIP Probe 238 CoCYDDA Control CYDDA D A 239 CoDo Control Digtal Board 240 CoDT2817 Control DT2817 digital I O 241 CoFile Controls M300 recording 242 Color Returns a color value 243 Comb Combine two formula arrays 244 Concs Compute concentrations 245 CoPCIDACDA Control PCIDAC D A voltages 247 CoPMFDA Control PMF D A voltages 248 Copy Copy data from formula 249 CoQuit Controls M300 termination 250 CoRTI802 Controls RT1802 D A voltages 251 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference 182 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page CoSeaDA Coltrols SEA D A voltages 252 CoShutDown Controls M300 System QNX Shutdown 253 CountBy Count By Bins 254 CountEdges Count Edges 255 Cumulative Cumulative 256 Date Creates a string based on the current date 257 DateTime Creates a string based on the current date and time 258 DayOfYear Returns day of year 239 Delay Delay for a formula for a specified period of time 260 Delta Delta value for a formula based on time 261 DewPointToRH Converts Dew Point temperature to Relative Humidity 262 DFault Default value 263 DIndex Double Index function 264 DirData Gets specfic data parameters from an acquisition directory 265 Div Returns the
333. ntry Setup Table Reference O 556 Buffer Table buf 300 SEA Model 300 For example to have a maximum frequency rate of 100 hz both the buffer frequency and the System Board frequency should be set at 100 In the case of asynchronous buffers the buffer frequency controls the buffer rearm frequency This means the buffer rearm frequency controls the maximum possible number of buffers you can get each second In the M200 this was usually specified in PARA 3 of the acquisition table for the master acquisition event For imaging type asynchronous acquisition buffers 2D Grey 2D Mono CIP etc this means the buffer rearm frequency controls the maximum number of buffers you can get each second Assuming the system frequency is 100 hz and the buffer rearm frequency is 25 hz this would give at most 25 buffers per second For other asynchronous acquisition types such as serial data this means the buffer rearm frequency controls the maximum number of buffers you can get per second If the data rate of the serial data is 10 hz then you should typically set the buffer rearm frequency to at least twice as much as the desired data rate So this would require a 20 hz buffer rearm frequency The system frequency set in the board table sets the maximum acquisition frequency In the case of the buffer rearm frequency the system frequency limits the number of possible buffer rearm frequencies For example a system frequency of 100 hz buffer frequ
334. nts counts interface factors 104 Type 44 1D256 Analog Input channel range gain 106 Type 45 CAMAC VOR Data slot channel 108 Type 46 1D256 Spare 0 mode low mode high 109 Type 47 1D256 Spare 1 mode low mode high 110 Type 48 1D256 House Data interface 111 Type 49 1D256 Activity 112 Type 50 1D256 Total Strobes 113 Acquisition Reference Continued Acquisition Reference O 38 Acquisition Reference SEA Model 300 Type Description Parameter Parameter2 Parameter3 Page Type 51 1D256 Total Counts 114 Type 52 SDSMT HVPS Image Data dma channel throttle 115 Type 53 SPEC HVPS Image Data interface factors rearm 116 Type 54 Novatel GPS rearm 118 Type 55 VAX Clock 119 Type 56 CAMAC 1D256 Counts counts interface slot 120 Type 57 CAMAC 1D256 Reference Voltage slot 122 Type 58 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 0 mode low mode high slot 123 Type 59 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 1 mode low mode high slot 124 Type 60 CAMAC 1D256 House Data interface slot 125 Type 61 CAMAC 1D256 Activity slot 126 Type 62 CAMAC 1D256 Total Strobes slot 127 Type 63 CAMAC 1D256 Total Counts slot 128 Type 64 1D256 Ballard Counts counts interface factors 129 Type 65 Serial Port DC 8 DADS Data identifier terminate throttle 131 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced interface dma rearm 133 Type 67 PMS 1058B 1D Data interface PCW channels 137 Type 68 9513 Cou
335. nued Acquisition Reference O 40 Type 0 Date Time Reserved SEA Model 300 Type 0 Date Time Reserved Description This is a reserved type It automatically puts the timestamp data for tag 0 Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires eighteen bytes of data per sample M300 buffers have both start and stop time for all buffers and therefor each buffer has two samples This is different from the M200 where there was only a single sample The time in the M200 was either at the start of the buffer or at the end depending on the buffer type Data Format The data acquired is in the following format Byte Offset Value 0 1 Year 2 3 Month 4 5 Day 6 7 Hour 8 9 Minute 10 11 Second 12 13 Fraction of a second 14 15 Maximum System Frequency Data format Acquisition Reference O 41 Type 0 Date Time Reserved SEA Model 300 Byte Offset Value 16 17 Buffer Life Span Data format Continued Comments This acquisition type is necessary to date time stamp the data buffer The last three elements of this data defines the time frame of data buffers The system frequency value defines the number of ticks that occur during a second This is therefore the maximum acquisition frequency The buffer life span value defines how many ticks a buffer exists for The fraction of second value defines on what tick of a se
336. o Data Format The first word contains the least significant 16 bits of the ARINC data The second word contains the most significant 8 bits of the ARINC data The most significant byte is always zero Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 145 Type 74 INS INI Flags SEA Model 300 Type 74 INS INI Flags Description This acquisition type acquires a group of eight discrete flags from the Litton LIN76 INS through the SEA Inertial Navigation Interface INI Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires 16 bits of data Two bytes should be allocated for each sample The eight flags are in the low byte with the high byte set to zero Data Format Each bit in the low byte represents a flag from the Litton LTN76 Bit zero is the pitch flag b0 bit one is the primary flag b1 bit two is the aux flag b2 bit three is the platform flag b3 bit four is the roll flag b4 bit five is the heading flag b5 bit six is the digital flag b6 bit seven is the spare flag b7 Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 146 Type 75 SPP CDP Data SEA Model 300 Type 75 SPP CDP Data Description This acquisition type acquires all the binary serial data from the Signal Processing Package for Optical Particle Counters SPP 100 SPP 200 SPP 300 CDP CDPPBP The SEA Serial Interface or Serial Port
337. o a user specified value large enough to collect the data This value is the maximum number of bytes that can be acquired at one time If the buffer is not filled during acquisition then all remaining bytes will be set to zero Comments The is a maximum of 4096 characters per block To do more you need to request a higher number from SEA Also there is a maximum 1 sentence sample per buffer This can be used with the serial port or a serial interface It can also be used in a synchronous or asynchronous buffer Acquisition Reference O 132 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced SEA Model 300 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced Description This acquisition type is used to acquire 2D Grey images form a 2D Grey probe as well as some other 2D Grey data This acquisition type uses one DMA channel and one interrupt channel per probe interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey interface 0 3 b1 b0 1 Elapsed time clock select 0 4 8 and 12 b3 b2 1 Interrupt number 10 12 b7 b6 b5 b4 2 DMA channel 5 7 lower nibble 2 Bit shift divide 0 OxF upper nibble 3 Rearm rate Hz Ie S Parameters Parameter 1 is used select the 2D Grey interface number the elapsed time clock source and the interrupt number Bits O and 1 select the interface number 0 1 2 and 3 Bits 2 and 3 select the elapsed time clock source Bits 4 5 6 and 7 select the interrupt number The valid clock sources for the elapsed time
338. o four synchro to digital converters These synchro channels can be used to acquire pitch roll and yaw or other synchro encoded information Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Synchro Channel 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The format of the acquired data is a 16 bit unsigned integer This integer represents angles in the range of 0 27 radians Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 65 Type 18 CAMAC INS ARINC Serial SEA Model 300 Type 18 CAMAC INS ARINC Serial Description This acquisition type is used to acquire INS ARINC serial data from an CAMAC INS interface card This adapter contains an on board RAM which captures the serial data transmitted from the INS system Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 2 INS ARINC Label 0 255 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires 32 bits of data Four bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The format of the acquired data is 24 bits of data followed by 8 bits of an update count The update count is zeroed at power up and it increments each time a label is updated by the INS The first three bytes of data are the 24 bits of INS data The update count is the last byte in memory Type Synchronous event Comments This interface card can be used to acquire either bina
339. od The lower nibble for the MODE parameter controls the sizing method while the upper nibble for the MODE parameter has some additional control bits shadow levels and uncorrected counts the MODE parameter is best specified in hexadecimal notation In order to come up with the correct value for the MODE parameter it is necessary to first find the desired sizing methods and then use the decimal and binary values from the tables in the next page to come up with the final value in hexadecimal to pass to the summation function For example to specify the area with edge reject sizing method using only the middle and maximum shadows You would pick 4 for the nibble from the first table Then pick 0110 binary for the upper nibble maximum and middle shadows The hexadecimal value for 0110 binary is 6 Therefore the desired value for the MODE parameter is 0x64 Mode low nibble Description 0 X Y 2 1 X TAS independent 2 Y TAS dependant 3 Area 4 Area reject particles that touch edge MODE Lower nibble Function Reference O 282 GrSums 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 Mode low nibble Description 5 X reject particles that touch edge 6 Y reject particles that touch edge 7 X Y 2 reject particles that touch edge MODE Lower nibble Continued The following table shows the valid MODE bits bits 7 6 5 and 4 of the MODE for the upper nibble binary values x means don
340. of minus one indicates that the full row or column is to be return We cant do two dimensional arrays in the M300 One index can be minus one but not both simultaneously When both row and column indexes are non negative then we are getting a single value from the lookup data To return a row you set column to minus one To return a column you set row to minus one Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations LookupGet F200 F 10 LookupGet Lo Temp 1 4 Function Reference O 314 LookupSet Lookup Set Entry Value SEA Model 300 LookupSet Lookup Set Entry Value Synopsis LookupSet LOOKUP ROW COLUMN F LOOKUP Lookup table lookup ROW 1 Row index to modify integer COLUMN 1 Column index to modify integer F 7 Formula value to modify in lookup float 721 Description This function modifies a value or an array of values depending on the index values passed to the function from the lookup data entry See Lookup Table lup 300 The row and column indexes are base 0 this means the first value has an index of zero not one An index of minus one indicates that the full row or column is to be return We cant do two dimensional arrays in the M300 One index can be minus one but not both simultaneously When both row and column indexes are non negative then we are setting a single value from the lookup data To set a row you set column to minus one and specify the values to set
341. off state respectively color changes the color of the strip chart entries based on the color string passed See Color System for listing of valid colors group turn on a group of strip chart entries lim sets the strip chart entry minimum and maximum values min sets the strip chart entry minimum value max sets the strip chart entry maximum value range sets the strip chart entry range to the current value 0 5 range If range is omitted the Strip Chart will perform auto ranging That is the limits of the Strip Chart will be changed to accommodate all points visible base sets the strip chart entry minimum to the base specified The new maximum is the new minimum current range offset changes the minimum and maximum by the offset specified The new minimum is current min offset and the new maximum is current max offset Command Manager Reference O 514 Strip Chart Display Commands SEA Model 300 Example A F10 stp 0 3 off stp 4 6 on C Fl stp 0 2 red C F2 lim 0 2 100 100 lim 0 2 1 1 Command Manager Reference O 515 Text Display Commands SEA Model 300 Text Display Commands Synopsis txt from to on off txt from to color from First text entry name number to perform operation on to Last text entry name number to perform operation on optional Description This command performs various operations on the M300 Text display entries The M300 will perform the ope
342. oint on a target area display The point will be placed at the latitude and longitude specified The point can be used to mark a particular interest area or simply display points p latdeg latmin londeg lonmin Setup Table Reference O 604 Map File tgt SEA Model 300 Line A line command places a line on a target area Lines can be used to draw roads rivers and other boundaries The first line command is used as a move to a point rather than an actual line draw The following line commands will draw lines from the previous position to the position specified by the current line command Once a line or several have been drawn that make up for example a road an end of line command must be entered Other lines sequences roads may be drawn by repeating this process l latdeg latmin londeg lonmin End Line This command must be used to finish a particular line drawing For example after a road is drawn and the user wishes to start drawing a river somewhere else the pen must be lifted and another line drawing started This is the use of the end of line command e Marker A marker command places a marker on a target area at the specified latitude and longitude The marker type can be either PLANE CROSS X DIAMOND BOX and TRIANGLE The M300 supports the M200 markers CROSS 1 and POINT 2 as well as some new marker types m latdeg latmin londeg lonmin markertype Text A text command displays text text on a target map
343. ol data accept 1 1 52 beam angle F 1 65 reflectivity data 1 512 SELECT Result Type Space For a listing of possible return type dependencies see the previous table Function Reference O 212 Arinc708Data ARINC 708 Data SEA Model 300 Example Ballard 708 Trigger Ballard 708 100 Ballard708 Never Never None Name Units Number Result Computations BeamAngle deg F1500 F 1 Arinc708Data A1000 52 Tilt deg F1510 F 1 Arinc708Data A1000 30 MaxRange nmi F1520 F 1 Arinc708Data A1000 43 Label F1530 I 1 Arinc708Data A1000 1 Gain db F1540 F 1 Arinc708Data A1000 37 Faults F1550 I 1 Arinc708Data A1000 17 DataAccept F1560 I 1 Arinc708Data A1000 50 ControlDataAccept F1570 I 1 Arinc708Data A1000 9 NumberOfBins F1581 I 1 512 FakedGateWidth F1582 1 1 500 FakedHits F1583 1 1 10 FakedClock F1584 F 1 F1520 F1581 1 26753e 5 ReflectivityData F1600 I 512 Arinc708Data A1000 65 Range m F2000 F 512 PgqRange 1 512 F1584 CPower dbm F2010 F 512 O Reflectivity dbz F2030 F 512 F1600 MinusAngle deg F2040 F 1 F1500 360 0 RelAngle deg F2042 F 1 Gt F1500 180 0 F2040 F1500 RelAngle deg F2042 F 1 F2042 1 0 PPIAngle rad F2045 F 1 F2042 F5 g Function Reference O 213 Array Array SEA Model 300 Array Array Synopsis Array E INDEX VALUE F 7 Formula of an array of 721 INDEX 1 Index of e
344. ole or vice versa 506 pause Pauses the M300 499 Table 16 Command Reference Command Manager Reference O 485 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Name Command Description Page pos Performs various operations on the Position display 509 quit Exits the M300 software 503 restart Perform a stop followed by a short delay and start 499 restore Restores the M300 Main Window to normal size 506 rewind Rewinds a playback file 499 run Runs a specified application 503 scn Performs QNX screen console operations 511 shutdown Shuts down the M300 and the QNX OS 503 skt Sends commands to a Skew T display 513 start Starts 499 stop Stops 499 stp Performs various Strip Chart data operations 514 tas2d Changes 2D True Air Speed frequency 494 tas2g Changes 2D Grey True Air Speed frequency 493 tascip Changes CIP True Air Speed frequency 497 tascipgs Changes CIPGS True Air Speed frequency 498 time Search for specific time in the data file 499 txt Sends commands to a Text display 516 wnd Performs various data display window operations 517 xvy Sends commands to an X vs Y display 519 Table 16 Command Reference Continued Command Manager Reference O 486 Command Manager Reference SEA Model 300 Command Manager Prototype Quick Reference The following table lists the command prototypes for quick reference purposes
345. olume Precipitation Spectrometer entry see also Name on page 527 Number A unique integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple HVPS displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance if an HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a HVPS display does also then a command set up to change the color of the HVPS display will not affect the HVPS display Window The window where the display will be performed for the High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer image data This window must be of the High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer type see also Window on page 527 Color The image color see also Color on page 528 Address The address for the HVPS card The M300 system will automatically find the tag number for the image data for the specified hardware see also Address on page 528 Timebars This parameter is used to turn on off the time bars for the HVPS display Setup Table Reference O 585 High Volume Particle Spectrometer Display Table hvp 300 SEA Model 300 Scale The user can scale the HVPS particles by a desired value The default scale value is 1 The larger the scale value the larger the particles will appear on the display Larger particles may mean less particles per display window Age
346. ompute Piraq Reflectivity 350 PgStatus Piraq status data access 351 PrData Extracts data from a probe table 352 ProbeData Extracts data from a probe table 353 PromoBins Compute Promo bins 354 PromoData Promo data access 355 Protect Protect value 356 PrTasClockIn Probe TAS Clock in 357 PrTasClockOut Probe TAS Clock out 358 PTas Caluclates pressure true air speed 359 RaConstant Computes radar constant 360 Rand Random number generator 361 RandData Random data generator 362 RandSeed Set random seed 363 Range Calculates aircraft range 364 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference O 186 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page Ref1DQ 1D Reference volatge 365 RHToDewPoint Converts Relative Humidity to Dew Point temperature 366 Scale Scaling function first order arrays 367 Scale2 Scaling function second order arrays 368 Scale3 Scaling function third order arrays 369 ScaleArray Scale array function first order 370 ScaleArray2 Scale array function second order 371 ScaleArray3 Scale array function third order 372 Seconds Returns seconds since Jan 1st 1970 373 SerialASCII Get Serial ASCII data 374 Serial DADS Get Serial DADS data 375 SerialIEEE Get Serial IEEE data 376 Seriallnteger Get Serial Integer data oer SrNmea Get Serial NMEA data 392
347. on of internal probe house keeping data Eight house keeping channels are recorded Each channel is 16 bits in length Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 1D Interface 0 7 upper nibble 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters Parameter two represents the 1D interface number Valid values are between zero and seven This value must be unique and assigned in one of the parameter fields in the acquisition table Parameter three represents the CAMAC slot number for the 1D interface card Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to 16 bytes Data Format The data acquired is composed of eight 16 bit integer values representing the counts for the different house channels Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 125 Type 61 CAMAC 1D256 Activity SEA Model 300 Type 61 CAMAC 1D256 Activity Description This acquisition type is used to acquire 1D probe activity data Activity data is recorded in a 16 bit counter Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 126 Type 62 CAMAC 1D256 Total Strobes SEA Model 300 Type 62 CAMAC 1D256 Tot
348. or HVPS data tag PROBE Probe name number probe MODE 1 Summation options integer FREQUENCY 1 Integration frequency INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer Description This function builds up an approximation of the HVPS spectrum using the image data and the time information Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSSums HME F100 F 64 HvSums P3 A100 1 1 0 Function Reference O 290 HvTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing SEA Model 300 HvTiming High Volume Precipitation Spectrometer Timing Synopsis HvpsTiming A TASEACTORTAG A Acquisition tag for HVPS data tag TASFACTORTAG 1 Tag for HVPS TAS factors data tag Description This function is used to retrieve the HVPS timing data first float element and the HVPS overflow data second float element from an HVPS data block Result Type Space D 2 Example Name Units Number Result Computations HVPSTiming nn F100 D 2 HvTiming A100 A101 Function Reference O 291 A KF IArray Integer Array Element Access SEA Model 300 IArray Integer Array Element Access Synopsis TArray K INDEX F 7 Formula for array of integers integer 721 INDEX 1 Index of desired element from integer array integer 0 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See IIndex Integer Element Access Description This function is used to access an i
349. or desired data integer 0 19 Description This function allows access to individual items of the Tamdar data block The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different Tamdar data fields The function will return the value of a user specified item from a Tamdar buffer Please check the Tamdar manual for further information Data Field SELECT Result Probe Serial Number 0 L 1 Day of Month 1 LEJ Latitude string 2 S 12 Latitude rad 3 F 1 Longitude string S 12 Longitude rad 5 F 1 GPS UTC Time 6 S 12 Pressure Altitude ft 7 L 1 Ambient Temperature celcius 8 F 1 Wind Direction deg 9 F 1 Wind Magnitude knots 10 Lt Wind Flag 11 L 1 RH1 12 F 1 RHI Flag 13 LE Eddy Dissipation Rate 14 L 1 Eddy Time 15 LEJ Tamdar Data SELECT Function Reference O 420 TamdarData Tamdar Data Access SEA Model 300 Data Field SELECT Result Indicated Airspeed knots 16 LH GPS Altitude ft 17 L 1 Icing Heater Flag 18 L 1 RH2 19 F 1 Tamdar Data SELECT Result Type Space See Tamdar Data SELECT table above Example Name Units Number Result Computations Latitude rad F1020 F 1 TamdarData A1000 3 Function Reference O 421 TasP Pitot Press from TAS SEA Model 300 TasP Pitot Press from TAS Synopsis TASP STEMB TAS SPRES STEMP 7 Static temperature in c m21 TAS p TAS in m s p21 S
350. or direction are in and out If the string constant in is specified the position display will zoom in use a doubling factor 2x of the current zoom value Likewise if the string constant out is specified the position display will zoom out using a halving factor x 2 of the current zoom value Command Manager Reference O 509 Position Display Commands SEA Model 300 Example Fl pos 0 clon 150 0 pos 0 clon 300 0 F2 pos 0 1 zoom 100 0 A F5 pos 0 1 zoom in A F6 pos 0 1 zoom out F10 pos 0 1 center Command Manager Reference O 510 Screen Console Commands SEA Model 300 Screen Console Commands Synopsis scn console scn operation console Console number to switch to integer operation Operation to be carried out string Description This function performs various operations on the QNX console display The following describe the different console commands that are valid World View M300 Figure 17 QNX Console World View 0 8 Switches the current console being displayed to a console specified by the integer value given The QNX desktop manager has 9 desktop consoles in a 3x3 grid with each one being independent from the other i e console 0 and console 1 have different windows on them Ifa multi monitor configuration exists one console will span all monitors The following describe the different operation commands that are valid left sets the active console to next console to the left This comma
351. ork on lookup data Parameters Name The identifier for the Lookup table entry see also Name on page 527 Number The identifier for the Lookup entry is a number This number is used in the formula table to refer to the desired lookup entry Rows The number of rows in the Lookup data file Columns The number of columns in the Lookup data file Filename The name of the Lookup data file These file names have the lup extension See Lookup Table lup 300 on page 593 Example Version 2 lup 300 Name Number Rows Columns FileName LWCREF 0 21 2 lwc ref lup Setup Table Reference 593 Lookup File lup SEA Model 300 Lookup File lup Overview Each lookup file is made up of any number of rows and columns of values This is similar to a spreadsheet with rows and columns of values The number of rows and columns must match the corresponding lookup file The lookup entry can be used with the traditional linear interpolation lookup function It can also be used to get and set calibration data into the M300 system Parameters Rows and columns of values representing the desired data See example bellow Example Lookup Files lwc_ref lup X Ys 2 92 30000 6 64 25000 4 14 22000 4 54 20000 4 91 18000 De 3 L 16000 576 14000 6 23 12000 6 74 10000 7 28 8000 7 86 6000 8 47 4000 8 79 3000 DER 2000 9 45 1000 9 81 0 Setup Table Reference 594 Moving Air Mass Display T
352. ormula used for the trigger must be of integer type Don t use formulas with floating point or string types If the formula value is a zero the trigger is not executed If the formula value is non zero then the trigger might execute based on other properties as well There is a special value for the formula number trigger 1 This can be used to skip the formula value check for the trigger Frequency The frequency is the final item that determines when a trigger gets executed or not When we look at data there are times when we want to handle all the data For example take the case of computations on 2D Mono data On the other side of the coin there are occasions where we only want to look at a few data buffers For example the 2D Mono Image display might only want to display one or two buffer per second The frequency gives the capability to select how many of the actual data buffers generate a trigger If you set the trigger frequency equal to the system frequency then you ensure you will get the maximum number of buffers possible for the trigger The frequency has three special cases Ignore 1 Once 0 and OnceOnPlay 4 The first is we can set the frequency to Ignore 1 This will cause the trigger to skip the frequency check The second special case for frequency is Once 0 This causes the trigger to execute only once Once This is a special type of trigger that can be used to initialize certain formula values There ar
353. otates the number A by B bits to the right This function will handle long integer types 4 bytes and uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations LongRotateRight mn F101 L 1 F105 4 lrotr Math Function Reference O 472 pow Power Function SEA Model 300 pow Power Function Synopsis A B pow A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Description This function raises A to the power of B This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the calculations s i 494 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations SquareFormula ren F306 I 10 F305 2 Pow Math Function Reference O 473 A LP rotl Rotate Left SEA Model 300 rotl Rotate Left Synopsis AB rotl A m Next to last operand m gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Note For long integer types use Lrotl See lrotl Long Rotate Left Description This function rotates the number A by B to the left This function uses Interpolation See Interpolation Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations RotateLeft mes F101 I i F105 4 rotl Math Function Reference 474 rotr Rotate Right SEA Model 300 rotr Rotate Right Synopsis A B rotr A m Next to last operand m gt 1
354. ould be entered as an hexadecimal number for example 0x07 Value Divide Factor Frequency MHz 0 16 0 250 1 1 4 000 2 2 2 000 3 3 1 333 4 4 1 000 5 5 0 800 6 6 0 667 7 7 0 571 8 8 0 500 9 9 0 444 OxA 10 0 400 Bit Shift Acquisition Reference O 116 Type 53 SPEC HVPS Image Data SEA Model 300 Value Divide Factor Frequency MHz OxB 11 0 364 0xC 12 0 333 0xD 13 0 307 OxE 14 0 286 OxF 15 0 267 Bit Shift Continued The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which HVPS data will be recorded Data Size This routine acquires 4096 bytes of data from the HVPS probe Data Format The data is stored in the native SPEC HVPS compressed data format Image data timing and diagnostics information are all stored under this acquisition type Type Asynchronous master event Comments The bit shift rate should not be confused with the image strobe clock The bit shift rate is the rate at which data is shifted out of the probe into the data system It is constant and is set by the upper nibble of parameter two The strobe clock controls the rate at which image slices are shifted into the probe It varies with true air speed and pixel size The strobe clock is set by the control function Co2DTAS The maximum rate that can be used for the bit shift clock depends on the length of the cable betwee
355. ous master event or synchronous event This data type provides improved flexibility over the M200 version because it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous events Ifan Asynchronous master event is used the buffer automatically resizes for the number of bytes coming in This also implies that the bytes per sample are the largest block of data to be collected This acquisition event must be the first event of an asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far Acquisition Reference O 96 Type 39 Serial Integer Data SEA Model 300 If a Synchronous event is being used the buffer size is not dynamic and must have the bytes per sample set to a user specified value large enough to collect the data This value is the maximum number of bytes that can be acquired at one time If the buffer is not filled during acquisition then all remaining bytes will be set to zero Comments None Acquisition Reference O 97 Type 40 Sonic Wind System SEA Model 300 Type 40 Sonic Wind System Description This acquisition type is used to acquire serial binary data from the Sonic Wind System This acquisition type can be used with the serial port and SEA serial interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Trigger 0 255 2 Control 0 255 3 Serial Port 0 7 lower nibble 3 Segment 0xC 0xD OxE upper nibble Table 2
356. ow Scheme Radar pwrFml refFml rngFml gtsFml htsFml agl1Fml tltFml EP PTI lt 0 PPI air CPR F4020 F4030 F4000 F4102 F4103 F1511 F1513 Setup Table Reference O 608 Probe Table prb 300 SEA Model 300 Probe Table prb 300 Overview The Probe Table is used to enter properties about the different probes used by the data system Each probe has a basic set of parameters including range number of channels and size In addition to the basic probe parameters each probe also has a table of information for each channel This table is provided via the Probe Channel Configuration file There are two ways probe data is used The first is with the PrData function in the Formula Table This function allows access to the different probe data specified via both files The second use for the probe data is direct via a probe entry in one of the tables For example in the case of the 2D Mono Display Table 2dm 300 the user can specify a probe entry for a 2D Mono probe directly in the 2D Mono display entry Parameters Name Probe name used to identify this entry Names are easier to remember that probe numbers They are both valid ways to link up to the probe entry The probe number is the traditional way so we had to provide support for it The probe name can be used in the Formula Table fml 300 as well as other tables as a link to the Probe Table entry see also Name on page 527 Number Probe number used to identify this entry Ran
357. ows Trigger PriType PriFreq PriAddress SecType SecFreq SecAddress command block command block command block Commands For a list of valid M300 Command Manager commands See Command Manager Reference Example Version 1 p Cid 300 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None cmdid fssp 1 cmdid fssp 2 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None scn 0 scn 1 scn 2 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Never None scn NEXT scn PREV Trigger Sync 0 1 None Never Never None dummy quit Setup Table Reference 622 Text Display Table txt 300 SEA Model 300 Text Display Table txt 300 Overview The simplest type of display is the text display This type of display renders alphanumeric data to a window Unlike the M200 system where text entries could be displayed in any window type in the M300 system the window must be a text window Another difference is that the M300 system has several different types of text entries These are Labels Data Table Data No Units and Table No Units entries In the M200 system the text entry consisted of a label data pair The format field is usually optional If there is no format field specified the text display manager assumes the correct default values based on the formula type The text entry will automatically display the units for a formula following the data this applies to Data and Table entry types If no units are desired then
358. oximation of the 2D spectrum using the image data and the time slice mask These images are summed up using either the slice count or the slice width and normalized using the elapsed time value The output of the function is a sums array and may be processed like the sums array from 1D data Starting with version 3 01 dated 8 21 98 the SUMS2D function no longer uses the mode as the end of a particle The end of a particle is now detected by finding one or more blank slices all ones OXFFFFEFEE In addition the upper byte of the MODE parameter 16 bit integer can be used to control the following options MODE Description XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Add zero area particles to first bin XXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Don t add zero area particles to first bin XXXXXX 1XXXXXXXXX Use x dimension method across slice XXXXXX OXXXXXXXXX Use y dimension method TAS dependent Table 12 MODE Result Type Space D n n number of channels in probe entry PROBE Example Name Units Number Result Computations 2DSums un F100 F 64 Sums2D A100 A101 0x55 P2 1 Function Reference O 411 Sums2G 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 Sums2G 2D Grey Sums Synopsis Sums2G ORTAG SLICETAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INERVAL STATE Sums2G ORTAG SLICETAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INERVAL STATE YSIZE Sums2G ORTAG MINTAG MIDTAG MAXTAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE YSIZE ORTAG Acquisition tag for 2D Grey OR slice data
359. p a project with the traditional 1 Hz sync buffer and a faster 20 Hz buffer we now have a mechanism in place to be able to select between these two types of buffers In order to perform the trigger life check you must specify a buffer type Sync 0 If you don t do the trigger type check then you cant do the buffer life check The buffer life value follows the type variable without a space In this case say we have a system frequency of 20Hz Then the buffer life for the 1 Hz sync buffer is 20 and the buffer life for the fast 20 Hz buffer is 1 So to look at the 1 Hz sync buffer you must use the Sync or Sync20 trigger type life value In order to look at the faster sync buffer we would specify Sync1 The trigger life can be set to zero to disable the trigger life check use Sync or Sync0 Address The address or board is another variable that allows us to narrow down on a particular data item Say we have a system with 2DC and 2DP probes If we use the trigger type we can get all the 2D Mono data by picking 2D Image type 5 But if we want to narrow down on just 2DC or 2DP we need to use something else to pick our final desired data item The address allows us to do just that By using the correct trigger address we can ensure that we have a trigger that looks only at 2DC or 2DP data There are situations were we might want to specify the address as a hexadecimal value or just change the board address for the de
360. pe 68 9513 Counters SEA Model 300 Type 68 9513 Counters Description This acquisition type is used to acquire one selected counter from the basic 1D interface card or CYCTM board Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Counter 1 10 2 3 Parameters Parameter one is used to select the desired counter For the 1D Board Counter 1 selects the strobe counter 2 selects aux 2 counter 3 selects aux 1 counter 4 selects spare 1 and counter five selects spare 2 Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value If you acquire more than 1 Hz data make sure you use the Sum function to add up all values Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 139 Type 69 BC620AT Time SEA Model 300 Type 69 BC620AT Time Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the current time from the BC620AT interface card Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to eight bytes Data Format The data format is the same as specified by the BC620AT operational and technical manual Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 140 Type 70 DRV11 Data SEA Model 300 Type 70 DRV11 Data Description This ac
361. perform operation on to Last entry to perform operation on optional Description This command performs various operations on the M300 Skew T display The M300 will perform the operation on all of the Skew T displays in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations clear Clears the Skew T displays Example F2 skt 3 clear Command Manager Reference O 513 Strip Chart Display Commands SEA Model 300 Strip Chart Display Commands Synopsis stp from to onloff stp from to color stp group name group stp from to base base stp from to lim minimum maximum stp from to max maximum stp from to min minimum stp from to offset offset stp from to range range from First strip entry to perform operation on to Last strip entry to perform operation on optional color Color to changes strip entry to string group name Group name string minimum Minimum to changes strip entry to float maximum Maximum to changes strip entry to float range Range to changes strip entry to float base Base to changes strip entry to float offset Offset to changes strip entry to float Description The M300 will perform the operation on all of the strip chart entries in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations on off turns the strip chart entries to the on or
362. ples Example Name Units Number Result Computations TnsBCD JE F100 F 20 InsBCD A100 Function Reference O 297 InsBin INS Binary Data SEA Model 300 InsBin INS Binary Data Synopsis InsBin A A Acquisition tag for INS Binary data tag Description This function unpacks INS binary data and returns a normalized value between 1 0 and 1 0 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations InsBin pon F100 F 20 InsBin A100 Function Reference O 298 InsBin2 INS Binary 2 Data SEA Model 300 InsBin2 INS Binary 2 Data Synopsis InsBin2 A A Acquisition tag for INS Binary data tag Description This function unpacks INS binary data format on the NOAA P3 This format contains only one sign bit as opposed the to the standard two sign bits This function returns a normalized value between 1 0 and 1 0 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations InsBin Ja F100 F 20 InsBin2 A100 Function Reference O 299 InsPos INS BCD Position SEA Model 300 InsPos INS BCD Position Synopsis InsPos A A Acquisition tag for INS BCD latitude or longitude data tag Description This function unpacks INS BCD data for the latitude or longitude labels and returns radians Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations INSPos r
363. ples of the latitude specified in degrees degrees and minutes minutes The lines may or may not be labeled with the corresponding value The label refresh labelReresh controls the frequency at witch lines will be labeled The line style lineStyle can either be solid lineStyle 0 or dashed lineStyle 1 a degrees minutes labelRefresh lineStyle Longitude Lines Longitude lines on a target map can be drawn using a simple one line command The longitude lines will be placed on multiples of the longitude specified in degrees degrees and minutes minutes The lines may or may not be labeled with the corresponding value The label refresh labelReresh controls the frequency at witch lines will be labeled The line style lineStyle can either be solid lineStyle 0 or dashed lineStyle 1 o degrees minutes JlabelRefresh lineStyle Example Map File et tgt 7b Color b BLACK 1 latdeg latmin londeg lonmin 1 41 25 728 71 48 330 m latdeg latmin londeg lonmin markertype m 42 26 735 70 48 225 CROSS Setup Table Reference O 606 Plan Position Indicator Table ppi 300 SEA Model 300 Plan Position Indicator Table ppi 300 Overview Plan Position Indicator Display shows a radar beam reflectivity moving from 60 to 60 degrees from forward looking center position This display basically duplicates a pilots aircraft forward looking radar display Parameters Name The identifier for the Plan Position Ind
364. pos from to freq auto pos from to wbarb onloff pos from to zoom direction from First position name number to perform operation on to Last position name number to perform operation on optional operation Operation to be carried out string value Value argument direction Direction to zoom string constant Description These commands perform various operations on the M300 position display The M300 will perform this operation on all of the position displays in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations auto Change the auto nautical miles to edge value for the position entry center Centers the position display on the aircraft clat Changes the Center of Latitude cLat to the given value the value is required clear Clears any wind barb or data point that has been drawn clon Changes the Center of Longitude cLon to the given value the value is required ewmiles Changes the East West Miles ewMiles to the given value the value is required freq Changes the display frequency the frequency is required nsmiles Changes the North South Miles nsMiles to the given value the value is required onloff Turn on or off the indicate entry set Set a new data point or wind bard in to memory wbarb onloff Turn on or off the wind barb for the indicated entry zoom Changes the zoom percentage to the given value The valid values f
365. psis CountBy DATA BINS DATA m Formula of an array for data values m21 BINS p Formula of an array for bins values p21 Description This function is used to count the data values into bins by count The bins must be sorted since we use a binary search to place the data into the appropriate bin Typical use of this function is for PBP data for some of the probes that support it Result Type Space Dip Example Name Units Number Result Computations CDPPBPIPTHist F3811 F 28 CountBy F3804 F3810 Function Reference O 254 CountEdges Count Edges SEA Model 300 CountEdges Count Edges Synopsis CountEdges F CountEdges F DIR F m Formula array for integer data values m21 DIR 1 Direction value Description This function is count the rising or falling edges for an array of values F The formula values must be an integer array of zeros and ones Each second the function returns the number of edges and it also remembers the previous state so it can determine the correct number of edges over time Default is to count rising edges DIR of 0 To count falling edges use DIR of 1 Result Type Space D 1 F 1 LE 101 101 110 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FlareEventCount F3811 L 1 CountEdges F3804 Function Reference 255 Cumulative Cumulative SEA Model 300 Cumulative Cumulative Synopsis Cumulative A A 7 Formula of an array of values 722 Descriptio
366. putations ArcSineHyp ON F101 I 1 1 2 asinh Math Function Reference 457 atan Inverse Tangent SEA Model 300 atan Inverse Tangent Synopsis B atan B r Last operand n gt 1 Description This function computes the inverse tangent in the range 1 2 2 2 The following formula summarizes the calculations fli atan B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations InvTangent min F101 F 1 F105 atan Math Function Reference 458 A KF atan2 Inverse Tangent determining quadrant SEA Model 300 atan2 Inverse Tangent determining quadrant Synopsis A B atan2 A m Next to last operand mm gt 1 Bip Last operand p gt 1 Note A and B cannot both equal zero or a domain error will occur Or if B is zero a division by zero error will occur Description This function computes the inverse tangent of A B using the signs of both A and B to determine the quadrant of the return value Function will return the inverse tangent in the range 7 n The following formula summarizes the calculations Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations ArcTanQuadrant Ite F101 F 1 F105 F106 atan2 Math Function Reference O 459 atanh Inverse Hyperbolic Tangent SEA Model 300 atanh Inverse Hyperbolic Tangent Synopsis B atanh B r Formula containing value or array of values n gt 1
367. qConfig A1005 2 Function Reference O 346 PqPower Piraq Power SEA Model 300 PqPower Piraq Power Synopsis PqPower A GATEWIDTH HITS SCALE OFFSET MODE A Acquisition tag for Piraq data tag GATEWIDTH 1 Gate width integer HITS 1 Hits count from Piraq config integer SCALE 1 Scale factor OFFSET 1 Offset value MODE 1 Operational mode integer O or 1 Description This function is used to compute the coherent and incoherent power for the Piraq I Q and A acquisition type The power is returned in dbm units If MODE is set to 0 Coherent power the function uses the a and b Piraq data with the following formula fli SCALE Slog a b 10log HITS 20log GATEWIDTH OFFSET 10 10 fori 0 n 1 If MODE is set to 1 Incoherent power the function uses the p Piraq data with the following formula fli SCALE 10log p 1010g HITS 20log GATEWIDTH OFFSET fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations CPower dbm F2010 F 200 PqPower F2000 F2104 F2103 1 01278 140 92 0 Function Reference 347 PqRange Piraq Range SEA Model 300 PqRange Piraq Range Synopsis PqRange GATEWIDTH GATES PqRange GATEWIDTH GATES CLOCK GATEWIDTH 1 Gate width from Piraq config integer GATES 1 Number of gates from Piraq config integer CLOCK 1 Clock period Descrip
368. quisition type is used to acquire data from the DRV11 interface Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Data type 0 3 2 DMA channel 0 3 3 Rearm rate Hz e Parameters The high nibble for parameter one is reserved and it must be zero Bit zero of the lower nibble is used to specify data type 0 integer 16 bits 1 long integer 32 bits Bit one is used to specify data swap 0 no swap 1 swap The DMA channel must match the selected DMA channel on the DRV11 interface switches This DMA channel must be unique to the DRV11 interface or a conflict will arise The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which DRV11 data buffers will be recorded Data Size The data size must match the number of bytes being transferred by the DRV11 interface Data Format Data format is variable and defined by the user Type Asynchronous master event Comments It is possible to combine long integer and floating point data since both data types have the same number of bytes Use the SERIALIEEE and SERIALINTEGER functions to unpack the data Acquisition Reference O 141 Type 71 Pressure Multiplexer SEA Model 300 Type 71 Pressure Multiplexer Description This acquisition type is used to acquire two bytes of data from the SEA Pressure Multiplexer box Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Box ID 0 255 2 Channel 0 255 3 G
369. quotient two arrays of formulas 266 DToF Converts double data to float type 267 Eq0 Boolean comparison for equality 268 Esi Vapor pressure of water with respect to ice 269 Esw Vapor pressure of water with respect to water 270 EvtStr Event String 271 EvtVal Event Value 272 FalconData Extracts Falcon Data 273 FalconDay Extracts Falcon Day data 274 FalconTime Extracts Falcon Time data 275 FArray Extracts data from a floating point type array 276 FIndex Extracts data from a floating point type array ai Ge Boolean comparison for greater than or equal to 278 Table 7 M300 Function Reference Continued Function Reference 183 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Name Function Description Page GetData Get Data 279 GrData 2D Grey access function 280 GrSums 2D Grey Sums function 282 Gt Boolean comparison for greater than 285 HSAnalog Converts an array of analog values to a floating point value 286 HvMask Get the HVPS Mask data 287 HvpsMask Get the HVPS Mask data 288 HvpsTiming Get the HVPS Timing data 289 HvSums Sums up channels of HVPS data 290 HvTiming Gets the HVPS Timing data 291 TArray Extracts data from an integer 2 bytes type array 292 IasP Inverse Pressure Indicated Airspeed function 293 Index Extracts data from an integer 2 bytes type array 294 Incloud In cloud prediction function 29
370. r Ignore None DegToRad F5 F 1 0 01745329252 RadToDeg F6 F 1 57 29577951 This is a basic trigger used to setup formulas that should be initialized once The primary trigger uses the Sync buffer Once The address is None which will cause the address to be ignored The secondary trigger is not used since we pick Never for the trigger type We don t even have to look any further at the trigger frequency nor address M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 26 Trigger SEA Model 300 1 Hz sync trigger 7 Trigger Sync 1 None Never Ignore None Time FO S 10 Time 20 Date F1 S 10 Date A0 This is the basic 1 hertz trigger on the Sync buffer The primary address is not a factor nor is the secondary trigger This trigger assumes a project with only one sync buffer 1Hz No buffer life is used Trigger on piraq data for PiragA board 1 Hz maximum 7 Trigger Piraq I Q P 1 PiragA Never Ignore None Timing Mode F2100 1 1 PqConfig A2001 0 Delay F2101 1 1 PqConfig A2001 1 Gates F2102 1 1 PqConfig A2001 2 This trigger is a bit more interesting The trigger type is on the Piraq I Q amp P data We have a 1 Hz frequency The address board is PiragA So this trigger will fire at most once per second on Piraq I Q amp P data for the PiragA board only The secondary trigger is not a factor Here is another example which shows how to handle 2DC data i
371. r Note that multiple X vs Y displays can have the same integer used to identify this display to the M300 If the user has multiple X vs Y displays they can assign different and or the same integers to each display based on the intended usage of the M300 command manager Note that these integers are unique to the display type only they are not global to the M300 For instance ifan HVPS display has a one assigned to it and a X vs Y display does also then a command set up to change the color of the X vs Y display will not affect the HVPS display Window Each entry in the X vs Y display table needs to belong to a window This parameter is the name of the window where the X vs Y display will be done The type of the window must be X vs Y display For example xvy see also Window on page 527 Color The user selectable color for the X vs Y entry see also Color on page 528 Type This parameter is used to select what gets drawn once a new point is found Name Type Point 0 Line 1 Bullet 2 Line with Bullet 3 Type Setup Table Reference O 633 X vs Y Display Table xvy 300 SEA Model 300 Width Line width for the X vs Y entry This is normally 1 pixel wide Larger value for line width will require more drawing and slow down the display You should keep this in mind when changing the line width State The state variable is used to control when a X vs Y entry is visible and active 1 or not
372. r Result Computations VAXTimeDifference re F100 F 1 VAXTimeDiff A100 Function Reference O 431 VectorAngle Vector Angle SEA Model 300 VectorAngle Vector Angle Synopsis VectorAngle X Y X m Magnitude in the X direction m21 Y p Magnitude in the Y direction p21 Description This function is used to return the angle for a vector whose Cartesian coordinates are X Y fli atan ZEI rad if fli lt 0 then fli f i 2 x r Result Type Space D n n min m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations VectorAngle rad F300 F 15 VectorAngle F100 F101 Function Reference O 432 VectorLen Vector Length SEA Model 300 VectorLen Vector Length Synopsis VectorLen X Y X m Magnitude in the X direction m21 Y p Magnitude in the Y direction p21 Description This function is used to return the length of a vector whose Cartesian coordinates are X Y fli dei YUP Result Type Space D n n min m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations VectorLen nm F200 F 1 VectorLen F100 F101 Function Reference O 433 A LP Vols Volumes SEA Model 300 Vols Volumes Synopsis Vols PROBE E CFAC TAS Vols E PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL PROBE Probe name number probe F Function for the sums of channel samples m21 RANGE 1 Range used in probe configuration file integer CFAC 1 Correction factor TAS 1 True
373. r X Y W H Index Formula Format TasClk 1 text 1 1u20 OxX7FFC 209 45 10 20 1 F1102 0x331 Type 2 Table Name Num Wndw Type Font Color x Y W H Rows Columns Formula Sizes 0 text 2 cour14 OxBDFFBE 42 281 42 15 16 4 F1000 Name Num Wndw Type Font Color X Y W H Rows Columns Formula Format Counts 2 text 2 courl4 OxXFEFEBD 10 5 42 15 16 4 F1001 54 1f Setup Table Reference O 625 Window Table wnd 300 SEA Model 300 Window Table wnd 300 Overview The Window Table is one of the most important tables in the M300 system It keeps track of all the current windows for the project Each window is identified by a window name and type The window name is used in other displays tables to pick where the displays will be performed The window type selects what type of display will be performed for each window In the M200 system all window properties where specified in the window table The M300 system has a window table wnd 300 and for each window in a project a window configuration file See Window Table Configuration File wnd on page 629 The window configuration file keeps all the properties for the specific window The user doesnt need to edit any of the window properties via the project files All properties can be modified via the configuration dialogs in the M300 software Parameters Filename This doubles as the window name and the name of the file where the window configuration properties will be stored The M3
374. r can be used to select the appropriate voltage range For the RT1802 board valid values are zero for 10 to 10 range and one for 0 to 10 range Upon successful completion function returns an integer containing the computed analog output voltage otherwise 1 Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Channel03 fen F203 F 1 CoRTI802 Bd RTIB802 F103 3 0 Function Reference O 251 CoSeaDA Control Sea Voltage SEA Model 300 CoSeaDA Control Sea Voltage Synopsis CoSeaDA BOARD VOLTAGE BOARD Board name for SEADA board board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage Description This function is used to control the analog output voltage for the SEA D A board Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations SeaDA my F4000 F 1 CoSeaDA Bd SeaDA 1 35 Function Reference O 252 CoShutdown Control Shutdown SEA Model 300 CoShutdown Control Shutdown Synopsis CoShutdown STATE STATE 1 State option integer 0 1 Description This function is used to automate the shutdown of the M300 DAS If STATE is non zero the M300 will terminate and force the entire system to shutdown including the Photon GUI and QNX 0 Do nothing 1 Shutdown QNX4 Photon Result Type Space IA Example Name Units Number Result Computations Shutdown mN F4000 TELI CoShutdown F101 Function Reference O 253 CountBy Count by SEA Model 300 CountBy Count by Syno
375. r instance they may only be placed immediately before function key entries and command block separators see below Function Key Entry This is the key mapping that the M300 will look for to execute the associated command block entry The function can have the following syntax C A S functionKey All function key definitions should be prefixed with a period prior to any modifiers and or function keys The c A and S arguments are for the Control Alt and Shift keys respectively These modifier keys are optional Some all or none may be used Valid funct ionKey values are keys such as F1 F2 F12 This is to minimize keystrokes interfering with pre existing QNX shortcut definitions Using combinations of the modifiers described with the function keys F1 F2 F12 gives a total of 96 different possible command definitions This should satisfy any user requirements Command Entry Block The command block is a series of commands to be executed when the preceding defined function key entry is pressed The command block may contain a single command entry or a series of commands that will be carried out in sequence The number of command entries in a single command block can contain 1 to n commands where z is limited only by memory constraints The command blocks are carried out in the following manner C A S functionKey command arg arg arg command argg arg arg Setup Table Reference
376. r other count modes consult with SEA for the appropriate values for these parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 123 Type 59 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 1 SEA Model 300 Type 59 CAMAC 1D256 Spare 1 Description This acquisition type is for the second of two spare 16 bit counter channels on the CAMAC 1D256 interface The maximum counting rate is 7 MHZ It can be used independently of the probe sizing functions Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Mode low byte 0x00 OxFF 2 Mode high byte 0x00 OxFF 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 Parameters The values for parameter one and two are used to program the mode register for the counter chip For the regular count mode use 0x28 for parameter one and 0x04 for parameter two For other count modes consult with SEA for the appropriate values for these parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 124 Type 60 CAMAC 1D256 House Data SEA Model 300 Type 60 CAMAC 1D256 House Data Description This acquisition type controls the acquisiti
377. r type unsigned char parametel unsigned char parameter2 unsigned char parameter3 unsigned int address typedef DataDir KP Note unsigned int is a sixteen bit unsigned number and unsigned char is an eight bit unsigned number M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 15 Data Format SEA Model 300 Reserved Tag Numbers Tag Type Tag Number Time 0 Next 999 Reserved 65000 65529 File Name 65530 FileData 65531 Command 65532 Error 65533 Same 65534 Last 65535 Tabled Reserved Tag Nubes Directory Fields The following is a description of all the fields in the directory entry Tag Number Each directory entry and its associated data is given a unique tag number This tag number is specified by the user and may be a value in the range of 0 to 65535 0 999 65534 and 65535 are reserved by the system and must not be used as general purpose tag numbers The tag number must be used when searching for a particular data item Other data fields may be used to double check directory and data integrity Data Offset The data offset field is used to get a pointer to the data This value specifies the number of bytes from the beginning of the buffer where the data is located To get a pointer to a particular data item first find its directory entry and then add the corresponding offset to the beginning of the buffer The data offset of the next directory points to the first directory of the next data buff
378. rParameters STRING DELIMETER 400 StrPrt FORMAT VALUE 401 StrSel VALUE SELECT STRING 402 StrToD STRING 403 StrToD STRING OFFSET Strtok STRING TOKENS 404 StrToL STRING 405 StrToL STRING OFFSET StrToL STRING OFFSET BASE StrToL STRING OFFSET BASE STRLEN STRCOUNT StrToUL STRING 406 StrToUL STRING OFFSET StrToUL STRING OFFSET BASE StrToUL STRING OFFSET BASE STRLEN STRCOUNT StrXmlProtect STRING 407 Sub A B 408 Sum F 409 Sums1D A INTERVAL STATE SKIP 410 Sums2D 2D ELAPSED MODE PROBE INTERVAL 411 Function Prototype Quick Reference Continued Function Reference O 198 Function Reference SEA Model 300 Function Prototype Page Sums2G ORTAG SLICETAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INERVAL STATE 412 Sums2G ORTAG SLICETAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INERVAL STATE cea MINTAG MIDTAG MAXTAG ELAPSEDTAG MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE YSIZE Sums2GAdv TAG MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE YSIZE 415 SumsHVPS A PROBE INTERVAL 418 System SELECT 419 TamdarData A SELECT 420 TasP STEMP TAS SPRES 422 Test P Po P 423 Time A0 424 Timer DELAY ON OFE 425 TTemp STEMP PPRES SPRES RECOVERY 426 Unfold V1 V2 427 Units X TO FROM 428 VaxTime A 430 Vax TimeDiff A 431 VectorAngle X Y 432 VectorLen X Y 433 Vols PROBE E CFAC TAS 434 Vols E PROBE RANGE CFAC TAS INTERVAL Volts A 435 Function Prototype
379. ration on all of the Text display entries in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations color changes the color of the text entries based on the color string passed See Color System for listing of valid colors on off turns the text entries to the on or off state respectively Example F5 txt 52 61 dgreen txt 52 61 dred F6 txt 0 98 off txt 0 98 on Command Manager Reference O 516 Display Window Commands SEA Model 300 Display Window Commands Synopsis wnd from to close wnd from to open wnd from to front wnd from to back wnd from to minimize wnd from to restore wnd from to print wnd from to bmp filename wnd from to jpg filename wnd from to tif filename wnd move to to to to to wnd from to maximize to to to to to wnd next wnd prev wnd from to lock unlock wnd from to pause unpause wnd primary secondary wnd onloff from First window to perform operation on to Last window to perform operation on optional filename File name optional Description This command performs various operations on the M300 data display windows Some operations can be performed on multiple windows while certain operations can only be performed on one window at a time which is usually the current window that has focus If no M300 window has the focus then the operation would
380. rb n a Probe Table 609 chn prb n a n a Probe Channel Files 611 prj 300 n a n a Project Table 613 rdr 300 n a n a Radar Table 614 saq 300 n a n a Secondary Acquisition Table 616 skt 300 n a n a Skew T Display Table 617 stp 300 n a n a Strip Chart Display Table 619 tic 300 n a n a Triggered Command Table 621 txt 300 n a n a Text Display Table 623 wnd 300 wnd n a Window Table 626 wnd n a n a Window Config Files 629 xvy 300 n a n a X vs Y Display Table 633 In addition to backing up the setup files mentioned above raw binary M300 data files sea should be backed up and or transferred to another medium or system This will ensure the safety of the configuration and data files Setup Table Reference O 525 Setup Table Reference SEA Model 300 Setup Table Reference O 526 Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files SEA Model 300 Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files String identifiers are allocated a total of 32 characters internally Since we use C as the programming language strings are terminated with the 0 or null character This means that string identifiers can have a maximum of 31 characters 32 1 Identifiers in the M300 system are case sensitive This mean that if you define an acquisition event DewPoint and then you want to use it in the formula table fml 300 you should use Aq DewPoint and not Aq dewpoint Most identifiers can have spaces in their nam
381. re used to specify which data values to output The user can format the data and specify the delimiter character as well as line termination Parameters Name The name is the identifier for the ASCII configuration entry see also Name on page 527 Type The type is used to control the output placement of the samples in the ASCH Binary output file The user can specify RA to have all samples in the same line Use CA instead to have each sample in a different line The order of the character in the type is not important The following are valid values for type Type Usage Row Row ASCII Column Column ASCII R Row ASCII C Column ASCII RA Row ASCII CA Column ASCH RB Row Binary CB Column Binary V Valid Counts Index The index of the desired entry from the formula 0 for the first element The formula must be an array of values and the index must be valid For no index use a 1 Formula Formula number name for the data to be output see also Formula on page 528 Setup Table Reference 540 ASCII Output Table Configuration File asc SEA Model 300 Format This parameter is used to format the output data Since we use the printf function from C to output the data this follows that standard Special care must be taken not to use an invalid format for the type of the formula Invalid format fields can cause the M300 to crash or at the very least provide data that doesn t make sense
382. rea reject particles that touch edge 5 X reject particles that touch edge 6 Y reject particles that touch edge 7 X Y 2 reject particles that touch edge Table 14 MODE lower nibble The following table shows the valid MODE bits bits 7 6 5 and 4 of the MODE for the upper nibble binary values x means don t care and a description of what they do to control the sizing methods MODE upper nibble Description xxx Minimum shadow bit selector xxlx Middle shadow bit selector xlxx Maximum shadow bit selector lxxx Raw uncorrected counts bit selector Table 15 MODE Sizing bits As you can see bit 7 of the MODE parameter can be set to return raw uncorrected counts or in 0x80 hexadecimal for all sizing methods no normalization using elapsed time For both Area sizing methods lower nibble 3 and 4 for the MODE you can use the upper nibble for the MODE parameter to control which shadow levels are added minimum middle maximum A shadow level is added to the total area calculation by setting the corresponding bit Bit 4 is used for minimum shadow bit 5 for middle shadow and bit 6 for maximum shadow If the minimum middle and maximum bits of the MODE parameter are all zero this indicates an invalid mode and all bits are assumed on default mode A particle is found to touch the edge by having either the first or the last pixel set in any color minimum middle or maximum This test
383. resents the signed digital value of the analog signal The 16 bit word is stored as a signed integer 0x7FFF 32767 full scale 0x0000 0 Zero 0x8000 32767 full scale Data Format Type Synchronous event Comments This is a 12 bit twos complement number Acquisition Reference O 57 Type 13 DT2801 Digital Events SEA Model 300 Type 13 DT2801 Digital Events Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a digital event port from the DT2801 adapter There are 8 events per digital port Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Port 0 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample The low byte has the event data while the high byte is zero high byte used for even pad Data Format The data acquired is in a simple bit per event format There are 8 events per port byte where DO corresponds to the first event and D7 corresponds to the last event Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 58 Type 14 Loran C GPS SEA Model 300 Type 14 Loran C GPS Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from a Loran GPS adapter mounted in the back plane The Loran GPS adapter is a microprocessor controlled data preprocessor for RS232C Loran GPS data streams The on board preprocessor program can be changed to handle different Loran GPS output formats This modificatio
384. rform a mathematical operation on the given formula name number with the original formula value as the first operand and the given value as the second operand Currently the valid mathematical operations that can be passed as the operation argument are addition subtraction division multiplication Boolean AND AND or amp Boolean OR OR or and Boolean Exclusive OR XOR or Example gt E5 fml F1001 auto A F1 fml F200 10 15 5 auto C F5 fml F200 0 5 fml F200 auto A F2 fml F101 10 auto Command Manager Reference O 501 Formula Watch and Alter Display Commands SEA Model 300 Formula Watch and Alter Display Commands Synopsis fwa new Description This command can be used to change various settings of the Formula Watch and Alter display new Creates a new Formula Watch and Alter window on the current console Example Fl fwa new Command Manager Reference O 502 General Commands SEA Model 300 General Commands Synopsis broadcast on off run command amp shutdown quit command The command that is to be run by the M300 string Description broadcast Starts or stops broadcasting across the network using UDP Valid values for operation are on or off The broadcast button in the M300 main window will change according to this value as well This is the same as click on the broadcast button run Runs the specified command in the background Note that although the a
385. rial ASCII data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer 1 2 3 4 DELIMITER 1 ASCII byte value used as data delimiter between ASCII data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values to be returned starting from this index integer MODE 1 Mode option for data type integer O or 1 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See SrASCII Serial ASCII Description This function gets the data at the index specified in the ASCII data block The MODE parameter is used to specify decimal zero or hexadecimal one data for integer and long types Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SerialASCII HRM F100 I 5 SerialASCIT A100 10 44 5 O Function Reference 374 SerialDADS Serial DADS SEA Model 300 SerialDADS Serial DADS Synopsis SerialDADS A INDEX IDENTIFIER A Acquisition tag for Serial DC 8 DADS ASCII data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer IDENTIFIER 1 ASCII byte value for identifier between ASCII data blocks integer Note Deprecated M300 function replacement See SrDADS Serial DADS Description This function is used to retrieve specific data fields from a block of DC 8 DADS ASCII data Different data fields are separated with spaces The identifier for each block needs to be specified in order to retrieve data from the appropriate data block Result Type Space D n n starting at INDEX unt
386. rmat This 16 bit word is an unsigned integer containing the count of the number of pixels at the middle level Type Asynchronous slave event Comments It is possible to approximate the particle area by adding the minimum middle and maximum shadow Acquisition Reference O 75 Type 26 2D Grey Maximum Count SEA Model 300 Type 26 2D Grey Maximum Count Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the number of pixels that where shaded at the maximum level in a 2D Grey image This count is generated while the image is being shifted in from the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format This 16 bit word is an unsigned integer containing the count of the number of pixels at the maximum level Type Asynchronous slave event Comments It is possible to approximate the particle area by adding the minimum middle and maximum shadow Acquisition Reference O 76 Type 27 2D Grey OR Slice SEA Model 300 Type 27 2D Grey OR Slice Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Grey scale or slice from a 2D Grey adapter This slice is the bit wise or of all the slices in an image This produces an quick approximation to the horizontal dimension of a particle This also allows for a quick check of whether or not the particle touc
387. rmulas demonstrate the calculations performed fili 1 0 01 RAT i fli TEMP 14 55 0 114 TEMP f Li 2 5 0 007 TEMP f i 15 9 0 117 TEMP f 111 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations DewPoint en F4007 F 1 RHToDewPoint F3007 F3006 Function Reference O 366 Scale First Order Scaling Scale First Order Scaling SEA Model 300 Synopsis Scale X A B X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of gain values p21 B r Formula of an array of offset value 721 Description This function returns an array of values or single value representing the linear scale This function uses interpolation See Interpolation The following formula summarizes the computations fli Ali X B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example Name Units Number Result Computations Scale Ney F200 F 10 Scale F100 F101 F102 Function Reference O 367 Scale2 Second Order Scaling Scale2 Second Order Scaling Synopsis Scale2 X A B C X m Formula of an array of elements to be scaled m21 Alp Formula of an array of second order coefficients p21 B r Formula of an array of first order coefficients 721 Cls Formula of an array of offset values s21 Description SEA Model 300 This function returns an array of values representing the s
388. rometer SEA Model 300 Byte Offset Value 28 29 size 15 count Data Format Continued Type Synchronous event Comments The Hail interface card provides fifteen sixteen bit counter channels These fifteen counter channels could be used to count pulsed from any TTL source The twenty four single bit events can be used to acquire TTL events Acquisition Reference O 83 Type 32 Hail Events SEA Model 300 Type 32 Hail Events Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the hail event data from a Hail interface card This single slot interface adapter card has fifteen sixteen bit counter channels and twenty four single bit events This acquisition routine acquires the twenty four event bit data Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires four bytes of data for each sample and four bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is in the following format Bye Offset Value 0 Event bits 0 7 1 Event bits 8 15 2 Event bits 16 23 3 byte pad Data Format Type Synchronous event Acquisition Reference O 84 Type 32 Hail Events SEA Model 300 Comments The Hail interface card provides fifteen sixteen bit counter channels These fifteen counter channels could be used to count pulsed from any TTL source The twenty four single bit events can be used to acquire any T
389. ronous master event Comments The first slice contains a repeated 16 bit particle count value This value is shifted so that it corresponds with the low byte high byte convention of the Intel data format For each image slice the first bit shifted in is stored in the lowest bit of the 128 bit slice and the last bit shifted in is stored in the highest bit of the 128 bit slice This cause an order inversion of the shadow bit pairs 00 none 10 min 01 mid 11 max The bit shift rate should not be confused with the image strobe clock The bit shift rate is the rate at which data is shifted out of the probe into the data system It is constant and is set by the upper nibble of parameter two The strobe clock controls the rate at which image slices are shifted into the probe It varies with true air speed and pixel size The strobe clock is set by the control function Co2GTAS Acquisition Reference O 69 Type 20 2D Grey Image SEA Model 300 The maximum rate that can be used for the bit shift clock depends on the length of the cable between the probe and the data system A 1 MHz divide factor of 4 should be adequate for the majority of installations where the cable length is less than 50 feet If longer cables are used the user should try slower rates The most common symptoms of too high a bit shift rate are image jitter or missing pixels Acquisition Reference e 70 Type 21 2D Grey TAS Factors SEA Model 300 Type 21 2D Grey TAS Facto
390. rpolation fli ALBI fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations Multiply IN F300 F 15 Mul F100 F101 Function Reference O 332 Nmea NMEA Sentence SEA Model 300 Nmea NMEA Sentence Synopsis Nmea F IDSTR SELSTR Fl Formula string to tag for NMEA data m21 IDSTR p String used for sentence ID p21 string SELSTR q String used to pick data from NMEA Sentence 921 string Description This function retrieves data from a GPS NMEA Sentence The IDSTR can be or NULL to have the function search for data in ALL sentences less efficient however this might generate jitter in certain data such as latitude This is caused by the M300 looking for data in all sentences and the data having different values precision in certain sentences This fix is to use the IDSTR to pick the data from the correct NMEA sentence The SELSTR value is responsible for picking the type of data desired For an alternate function for getting NMEA data See SrNmea NMEA Sentence SELECTOR Type Return Type SENTENCEID DAT GPS Date S GPZDA GPRMC LAT Latitude rad D 1 GPGLL GPRMC GPGGA LON Longitude rad D 1 GPGLL GPRMC GPGGA Gr Ground Track deg F 1 GPVTG GPRMC GSP Ground Speed kts F 1 GPVTG GPRMC TIM GPS Time GI GPRMC GPGGA Sra Status LJ GPGGA
391. rs Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Grey TAS factors from a 2D Grey adapter These factors are the multiply and divide factors used to generate the TAS clock need to strobe the 2D Grey probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires two 16 bit words the multiply and divide factors respectively Therefore 4 bytes should be reserved for each sample Data Format Each of the 16 bit factors are stored in two successive word locations The first being the multiply factor followed by the divide factor Type Asynchronous slave event Comments The true air speed clock frequency is evaluated by the multiply factor times 50 KHz divided by the divide factor For certain applications the actual TAS may be higher than the maximum TAS the probe can sample at In these cases the TAS out to the probe should be limited to the maximum The actual particle sizes can be approximated by taking the actual TAS and divide it by the true air speed clock frequency Acquisition Reference O 71 Type 22 2D Grey Elapsed Time SEA Model 300 Type 22 2D Grey Elapsed Time Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Grey elapsed time value from a 2D Grey adapter Elapsed time is the number of 25 ps ticks that have passed since the time the probe was armed and when the particle image was recorded
392. rs are shown Scale The user can scale the 2D Grey particles by a desired value The default scale value is 1 The larger the scale value the larger the particles will appear on the display Larger particles may mean less particles per display window AgeLimit The ageLimit is used to hash out an old display Once the current 2D Grey display is older than the specified ageLimit then the display gets hashed out as an indication of old data This parameter is specified in seconds The window must have the secondary trigger set to expire once per second on the synchronous buffer Probe This is the probe name from the probe table See Probe Table prb 300 on page 609 This is used to associate a probe table entry with a 2D Grey display entry see also Probe on page 528 Example Version 3 2dg 300 Name Number Window Color25 Color50 Color75 Address Timebars Scale AgeLimit Probe 2DG 0 2DG red blue green 2DG 1 2 10 2dg Setup Table Reference 532 2D Mono Probe Display Table 2dm 300 SEA Model 300 2D Mono Probe Display Table 2dm 300 Overview This display is used to display particle image data of 2D Mono type The user can select a color for the images This display has the capability of hashing out old images via a user selectable age limit The image data is identified via the board address for the 2D Mono data The image may be scaled The 2D Mono display has an age counter which keeps track of how many se
393. rt 3 There are three valid ports Each port is purged separatly The M300 waits 4 seconds before sending the next purge command When specifying a purge Time this doesn t change the purge time in the AIMMS board entry The purge is used to send the default purge command with purge time from the board table for AIMMS ADP The on keyword instructs the AIMMS ADP to turn on all purge ports port 0 if supported The off keyword instructs the AUMMS ADP to turn off all purge ports port 255 if supported The auto keyword instructs the AIMMS ADP to perform the purge sequence port 4 if supported Change the low temperature threshold value for the AIMMS 20 with the heatontemp command Example A F1 cmdaimms Aimms20 purge Command Manager Reference O 495 ASCII Commands SEA Model 300 ASCII Commands Synopsis asc onloff asc from to onloff asc from to close asc from to create asc name create filename asc from to fire asc name send data data from First ASCII name number to perform operation on to Last ASCII name number to perform operation on optional name Name of ASCII entry filename Name of ASCII file to create optional data data Data string to be transmitted on serial output Description The ASCII commands are used to control the ASCII manager entries onloff Changes the state of the ASCII output to either on or off When the state is off the ASCII will not update onloff When u
394. rting element integer gt 0 ELEMENTS 1 Number of elements to copy integer Description This function can be used to copy data from one formula array to another The starting and ending position can be specified via the starting index and the number of elements to copy fli F INDEX i where i 0 ELEMENTS 1 Result Type Space Diz n ELEMENTS Example Name Units Number Result Computations CopyArray wm F201 F 10 Copy F200 5 10 Function Reference O 249 CoQuit Control Quit SEA Model 300 CoQuit Control Quit Synopsis CoQuit STATE STATE 1 State option integer 0 or 1 Description This function is used to automate the termination of the M300 software If the STATE is zero this function will do nothing If the STATE is non zero 1 the M300 will close all open files stop the acquisition process and close 0 Do nothing 1 Quit Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations QuitM300 ial F1000 I i CoQuit F2005 Function Reference 250 CoRTI802 Control RTI802 SEA Model 300 CoRTI802 Control RTI802 Synopsis CoRTI802 BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL MODE BOARD Board name for RT1802 interface board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage CHANNEL 1 Output channel integer 0 7 MODE 1 Specified voltage range integer 0 or 1 Description This function is used to control the analog voltage value output for a specific channel The mode paramete
395. ry or BCD serial streams Two interface card can be used to acquire both streams If the update counter does not change between acquisitions then the data returned was not updated by the INS during the time between the two acquisitions If the update counter changes by more than one between acquisitions then some data was updated more than once between acquisitions Acquisition Reference O 66 Type 19 CAMAC INS Synchro Type 19 CAMAC INS Synchro Description This acquisition type is used to acquire an INS synchro channel in the CAMAC INS interface card This interface supports up to four synchro to digital converters These synchro channels can be used to acquire pitch roll and yaw information Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 2 Synchro Channel 0 3 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The format of the acquired data is a 16 bit unsigned integer This integer represents angles from 0 27 radians Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 67 SEA Model 300 Type 20 2D Grey Image SEA Model 300 Type 20 2D Grey Image Description This acquisition type is used to acquire a 2D Grey image form a 2D Grey adapter This interface card is a high performance 16 bit DMA interface using demand mode DMA This design maximizes DMA performance while minimizing system ban
396. s we are done If the formula is set to ignore 1 we skip formula checking COGN BS Ge If formula value is false zero we are done 9 If frequency set to ignore 1 we skip frequency checking 10 If the time has expired we fire the trigger 11 Otherwise we will not fire the trigger Trigger Operation Flowchart M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 29 Trigger SEA Model 300 Trigger Properties lt gt gt ED type life No address formula frequency Yes Special Cases type 3 Always type 2 Never type 1 Ignore life 0 Ignore No address 1 Ignore t1 type type No formula 1 Ignore ve 3P frequency 0 Once Yes frequency 1 Never Yes frequency 4 OnceOnPlay No Ye S t1 life life No Yes t1 address 1 Yes No Yes t1 formula No value Yes Time Expired No M300 Figure 1 Primary Trigger Operation Flowchart M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 30 Trigger SEA Model 300 Yes E lo Yes ind Tag wit Address Yes a No Yes t2 formula N o value Yes Time Expired M300 Figure 2 Secondary Trigger Operation Flowchart M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 31 Reverse Polish Notation SEA Model 300 Reverse Polish Notation What is RPN Reverse polish notation RPN also known as Postfix is a system of mathematical notation that eliminates the need for brackets to identify evaluation order This method of
397. s SrData A OFFSET COUNT MODE SWAP A Acquisition tag for Serial data tag OFFSET 1 Byte offset into data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values to be returned integer MODE 1 Mode selector integer SWAP 1 Swap buffers selector integer 0 or 1 Description This function is used to access specific binary data from a raw data block The OFFSET parameter selects the start of the data The COUNT parameter selects the number of data values to be returned The data can be swapped in necessary The MODE parameter is used to select the data type MODE Data Type Bytes 2 Char 1 3 Unsigned Char 1 4 Integer 2 5 Unsigned Integer 2 6 Long 7 Unsigned Long 4 8 Float 4 9 Double Float 8 MODE Result Type Space D n n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations StaticPress mb F100 F 5 SrData A100 100 5 8 0 Function Reference O 389 SrlEEE Serial IEEE SEA Model 300 SrIEEE Serial IEEE Synopsis SrIEEE A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for Serial IEEE data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Description This function gets IEEE data at the index specified in the data block It works with data from either serial IEEE data type or the DRV11 data type Make sure that parameter one in the acquisition table for these types indicates the appropriate data swap option for different machine
398. s State NonAcgState DMA BitShift AIMMS 0x0700 1 0 0 0x3300 RA OHH OOOH 0x2300 0x1700 AUO Setup Table Reference O 545 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd Port Address State Baud Data Stop Parity PurgeTime LowTempThreshold Arinc429 Address State NonAcgState ReceiveSpeed TransmitSpeed Arinc561 Address State NonAcgState Atdagl41x Address State NonAcgState Type Mode Range VoltageReference 7 Ballard708 Address 0xE100 State 1 NonAcgState 0 CAMACI1D Address State NonAcgState Command Slot CAMAC1D256 Address State NonAcgState Command SizeChannels StrobeChannels SourceFrequency DivideFactor Slot dev ser2 OxFO02 i 19200 8 ne 0 5000 100 0 0x6700 ORO 0x6 700 10 000000 10 000000 0x0309 ROO 0x0309 HHK OHO Setup Table Reference 546 SEA Model 300 Board Table Configuration File brd CAMACANALOG Address State NonAcgState Slot CAS Address State NonAcgState Port Baud Data Stop Parity Channels ClockDivider LaserAttenuation FileName CASPBP Address State NonAcgState Port Baud Data Stop Parity CIP Address State NonAcgState DMA Port Baud Data Stop Parity TASSource SmallParticleReject NValue DepthofFieldReject EndDiodeReject UseRealParticleWidth RecoveryCoefficient CIPGS Address 0x7302 State 1 NonAcgState 0
399. s to indicate that they are mutually exclusive Make sure you dont specify other groups with the same name or you might get a undesired effect For independent buttons just use for the group name in other words an empty string Flag The flag is used to select the initial state of a button To select the on state use a one To select the off state use a zero For buttons in a group only one button can be selected on at a time X Y W H The basic coordinates and dimensions for the button This along with the window name selects where the button will be placed The button should be placed in an area which will not interfere with other objects in the M300 system Formula Setup Table Reference 553 Button Table btn 300 SEA Model 300 The formula whose value will be changed by the button click Ifa Toggle button is used then the formula value is overridden If the button is not a Toggle type then the formula value is momentarily changed and then the formula is set to auto compute This formula can be set to 1 to disable the control formula this is usually required when sending out a command is desired instead IndFormula The indicator formula This formula is used to provide feedback on indicator status buttons For example in the case of the FSSP range When the user changes the range to the probe it takes a few seconds for the probe to change range Having a way to control the range and checking the feed back from the i
400. sage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size This acquisition type requires four bytes Data Format The data acquired is an unsigned 32 bit integer which represents time in milliseconds since mid night Type Synchronous event Comments This clock value can be used to synchronize the Model 200 clock with the external VAX clock Additional setup must be performed in the board table Acquisition Reference O 119 Type 56 CAMAC 1D256 Counts SEA Model 300 Type 56 CAMAC 1D256 Counts Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the CAMAC 1D256 advanced interface card This card is capable of interfacing with all 1D types of probes It provides a maximum of 256 channels of particle size information and a maximum of 256 channels of particle spacing information All counters are 32 bits in length Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Size Counts 0 OxF lower nibble 1 Strobe Counts 0 OxF upper nibble p Probe Command 0 0xF lower nibble 2 1D Interface 0 7 upper nibble 3 CAMAC Slot 1 23 lower 7 bits 3 Strobes bit seven Parameters The acquisition parameters for the 1D256 Counts are not set up by the user The system will copy the parameter information from the associated board table See Board Table Configuration File bra We do this to document the way the board probe is set up and to keep with M200 compatibility The lower nibble for parameter one is used to set t
401. sage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size Varies depending on the data The largest size supported is 1024 This is limited by the MTU size of about 1500 bytes Data Format The data format follows the exact description of group 1 for the POSAV data Use the PosAvData function to get the data Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference 158 Type 84 Network ASCII Data SEA Model 300 Type 84 Network ASCII Data Description This acquisition type acquires ASCII data from a socket Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 block 0 255 2 3 Parameters Data Size Varies depending on the data The largest size supported is 1024 This is limited by the MTU size of about 1500 bytes Data Format Varies depending on the data Use the appropriate trigger to get the data in the formula table Also use the serial ASCII data functions to get the data Type Asynchronous master event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 159 Type 85 Network Binary Data SEA Model 300 Type 85 Network Binary Data Description This acquisition type acquires binary data from a socket Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 match 0 1 2 3 Parameters Parameter 1 is used to match value of 1 the size of the data If the data read matches the data size the data is accepted Otherwise the data is ignored If match is zero then all data read is returned
402. sing a list of ASCII entries to change the state this command controls the active state of individual entries close Close the file name for the specified entries create Automatically create an ASCII output file for the specified entries The file extension is csv for command separated values create Ifa file name given for a specific ASCII entry then a file will be created with the given name fire Run an ASCII entry one time only The entry must be in the off state in order to run send This will send data to a serial type device The termination character must not be 0 Example A F1 asc off F1 asc 0 create gps csv F2 asc 0 close Command Manager Reference O 496 Cloud Imaging Probe CIP Commands SEA Model 300 Cloud Imaging Probe CIP Commands Synopsis tascip board frequency tascip board auto board CIP Board name string frequency Frequency to be sent float Description This command can be used to change the CIP probe true air speed frequency The frequency should be specified in MHz The value specified will override the control function in the formula table fml 300 The board name specifies a unique CIP interface card as defined in the board table The use of auto in place of frequency is used to restore control of the CIP probe true air speed frequency to the control functions Example A F1 tascip cip 2 5 A F5 tascip cip auto Command Manager Reference O 497 Cloud Imagin
403. sired board We can use the M300 for example to look at data from the M200 system Even though the M200 data format has some features missing it is still possible to get the desired data using the trigger mechanism If you the RawView utility it will help you identify what to look for in the data to make the correct trigger There is a special value for address 1 which will disable the address check feature for the trigger Formula The need for the formula trigger is less obvious but the formula trigger is one of the most advanced features of the trigger mechanism Until now we have been able to trigger on a particular data type and this works great for a large number of cases But if you have a situation where you need to separate or validate the incoming data before using it for display purposes the formula trigger is just the thing For example take the case of dropsonde data All the data comes in the same serial port data channel We can setup a basic data trigger to get this data Once we have the data the situation is a bit different We need to be able to determine if the data is valid and separate the data into different drops We can do this using several formula computations and generate a trigger formula value for different drops These formulas can in turn be used in a List or Skew T displays to trigger the displays only when we have the correct valid data points M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 24 Trigger SEA Model 300 The f
404. sis Ist from to onlof Ist from to clear Ist from to fire from First list entry to perform operation on to Last list entry to perform operation on optional Description This command performs various operations on the M300 List display The M300 will perform the operation on all of the List displays in the entry list that lie between and including from and to Currently the M300 supports the following operations onloff Changes the state of the list displays to either on or off When the state is off the display will not update clear Clears the list displays fire Run an list entry one time only The entry must be in the off state in order to run Example Fl lst 0 7 state off lst 0 7 state on F2 lst 0 7 clear Command Manager Reference O 505 Main Window Commands SEA Model 300 Main Window Commands Synopsis front back restore minimize clear error open current Description front Brings the M300 Main Window to the foreground in front of all other windows back Puts the M300 Main Window behind all other open windows restore Restores the M300 Window to a normal state This will work only ifthe M300 has been previously minimized or maximized minimize Minimizes the M300 main window to the QNX taskbar clear error Clears the last error message displayed in the M300 Main Window Error Message open Automatically opens and switches the console to where the M300 Main Window is
405. sition type is for the second of two spare 16 bit counter channels on the 1D256 interface also known as 1D Advanced The maximum counting rate is 7 MHZ It can be used independently of the probe sizing functions Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Mode low byte 0x00 OxFF 2 Mode high byte 0x00 0xFF 3 Parameters The values for parameter one and two are used to program the mode register for the counter chip For the regular count mode use 0x28 for parameter one and 0x04 for parameter two For other count modes consult with SEA for the appropriate values for these parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference 110 Type 48 1D256 House Data SEA Model 300 Type 48 1D256 House Data Description This acquisition type controls the acquisition of internal probe house keeping data Eight house keeping channels are recorded Each channel is 16 bits in length Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 1D Interface 0 7 upper nibble 3 Parameters The upper nibble for parameter two is used as the 1D interface card number Valid values for 1D interface cards are between zero and seven This number must be unique and it is assigned in one of the parameter fields of the acq
406. sm M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 14 Data Format SEA Model 300 Data Format Description The basic structure in the Model 300 data is composed of two sections The first part of the Model 300 data is called the Directory area It contains information about the data recorded The second part of the Model 300 data is called the Data area It contains the actual data values Any number of these structures Model 300 Data Buffers can be linked together to compose an entire data file The directory area is composed of one or more directory structures Each directory structure represents a data type The number of directory entries can change and therefore so can the size of the directory area The data area size is not static The data area size changes depending on the number of different data types that compose it the number of data samples and the number of bytes per sample M300 Directory Structure The Model 300 directory entry is composed of several elements that identify the data The directory is 16 bytes 16 8 bits long Each directory contains a Tag Number Data Offset Number of Bytes Number of Samples Bytes per Sample Data Type Parameter One Parameter Two Parameter Three and Interface Address In C the data structure for a data directory entry is as follows struct datadir unsigned int tagNumber unsigned int dataOffset unsigned int numberBytes unsigned int samples unsigned int bytesPerSample unsigned cha
407. splay Table mam 300 0 cee cece eee 595 Probe Distribution Display Table pdi 300 0 0 les nurnerr 597 Target Position Display Table pos 300 aces da A AAA 599 Map File A O 604 Plan Position Indicator Table ppi 300 da A AN 607 Probe Table pro Wisin tes 609 Probe Channel File pal ca ia ts 611 Project Table PO e e Rs O A ES 613 Radar Table rae DO sa is SA tia 614 Secondary Acquisition Table sq 300 cta a dea 616 Skew T Display Table skt 300 cocoa brain da 617 Strip Chart Display Table stp 300 2 AA aa 619 Triggered Command Table tic 300 100 cit a a di A A iS 621 Text Display Table xt 300 odect Leese ci a ed de Guba eeu 623 Window Table wod 300 eironi ea Go read Oak oe OA ie ae AL ao als AU A Ae 626 Window Table Configuration File wnd tl a atau gag ee ve tek deat eee 629 Mase X Display Table vy G00 so oes Gaeta eh arsle dele ele e Pes 633 Table of Contents x M300 Miscellaneous Reference SEA Model 300 Miscellaneous Reference There are a number of aspects to the M300 that are quite technical and require a thorough understanding before the user is able to use the M300 software to it s maximum capability This book describes many of these technical aspects to give the user a firm understanding of these concepts and technical aspects Reference Description Page Data Buffers Explains the purpose of the M300 Data Buffers 12 Data Format Explains the use of each variable of t
408. string into it s double representation The function recognizes STRING containing an optional white space followed by an optional sign a sequence of digits containing an optional decimal point and an optional e or E exponent followed by a sequence of digits For example the user may need to perform a computation on a value that is currently in a string form Prior to this computation the string must be converted into a real numerical data form for the CPU OFFSET is used to skip a certain number of characters in the string If OFFSET is not specified it is assumed to be zero The function returns the converted value or zero if the value cannot be converted Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations StringtoDouble Manr F100 D 1 StrToD F105 4 Function Reference O 403 StrTok Parse String Token SEA Model 300 StrTok Parse String Token Synopsis StrTok STRING TOKENS STRING 1 String for parsing string TOKENS 1 Token List string Description This function compares given TOKENS to values within the STRING and allows the user to break up the data into a separate strings that can go into different formulas The first time the function is called you must pass the formula number of the string data After this you must call this function with the NULL parameter to continue parsing the string This is to use the data in memory and try to parse out the desired tokens to r
409. synchronous and all our un timed events in another buffer asynchronous M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 12 Data Buffer SEA Model 300 Why do we need more than one asynchronous buffer type Again if we put all our un timed data into one buffer we will run into several problems for a real time data acquisition system Just think of the implications of having serial data and 2D data in the same buffer When do we terminate the buffer When the serial block is acquired or when the 2D probe is done sending the data It s very difficult to work out a solution to such an approach This is why we need different types of asynchronous buffers We must keep data of the same type together in manner that makes sense for the real time data acquisition scheme Understanding buffer types The synchronous buffer has type 0 In the M300 system the current synchronous buffer is 1 hz It is possible to have other synchronous buffers in the system at a frequency other than 1 hz although this is not in use at the moment Asynchronous buffers have buffer types other than 0 The asynchronous buffers get their type from the data type for the master acquisition event in the asynchronous buffer For example in the case of 2D data the master acquisition event is the 2D Mono Image type 5 So the asynchronous buffer type for this buffer is type 5 Why are buffer types important Let s say we want to display the 2D Mono Image data Do we send every buffer to the
410. t The last 5 elements of the result space would be left alone only the first 5 are used We copy every element from the stack to the corresponding elements from the result 0 1 2 3 4 The user must take special care not to define use the same formula more than once using different types You can use the same formula as many times as necessary as long as the type is kept the same The following table shows the data types used by the Formula Manager for the M300 system Type Letter Size Bytes Type Min Max S s 1 String 0 255 c 1 Unsigned Char 0 255 C 1 Signed Char 107 128 i 2 Unsigned Integer 0 65535 I 2 Signed Integer 32768 32767 l 4 Unsigned Long 0 4294967295 L 4 Signed Long 2147483648 2147483647 Ef 4 Float 1 175494e 38 3 402823 e38 D d 8 Double 2 2250738585072e 308 1 79769313426232e308 Formula Result Data Types Computations Computations are made up of series of factors operands operators functions and parameters The formula manager breaks up the computations into two major types Stack based operations and functions When a function is encountered the formula manager calls the function with the given parameters Once the function is done the result is put on the stack When a function is computed the parameters for the function never go on the stack just the result of the function Otherwise the formula manager pushes factors operands on the stack until i
411. t 1 Forward Link 2 Reserved 1 3 Elapsed Time SOI Since Start of Image 4 Elapsed Time SOB Since Start of Buffer 5 Image Slice Count 6 Multiply TAS Factor 7 Divide TAS Factor 8 Minimum Pixels 9 Middle Pixels 10 Maximum Pixels 11 Reserved 2 12 Reserved 3 14 2DGREY Data SELECT Options Function Reference O 280 GrData Grey Data Access Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations ElapsedTime ms F300 F 1 GrData A2000 Function Reference O 281 4 SEA Model 300 GrSums 2D Grey Sums SEA Model 300 GrSums 2D Grey Sums Synopsis GrSums PROBE A MODE FREQUENCY GrSums A MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE PIXELSIZE PROBE Probe name number probe A Acquisition tag for 2D Grey Advanced data tag MODE 1 Function sizing mode integer STATE 1 Function control variable integer FREQUENCY 1 Frequency of integration INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer PIXELSIZE 1 Pixel dimension Description This function builds up an approximation for the 2D Grey advanced spectrum using the particle dimensions and enclosed time of the 2D Grey scaled images These particles can be summed up using several different modes and normalized using the elapsed time value if desired The output of the function is an array and may be processed like the arrays from the 1D and 2D data Using the MODE parameter it is possible to control the sizing meth
412. t Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Formulas CharacterIndex ws F200 Cli CIndex F2012 5 Function Reference 225 CIPData CIP Data Access SEA Model 300 CIPData CIP Data Access Synopsis CIPData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for CIP data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 25 Description This function allows access to individual items of the CIP data block including house data The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different CIP data fields The function will returns the value of a user specified item from a CIP buffer Please check the CIP manual for further information To get the size spectrum for the CIP probe use OdSums 1D Sums Data fields with the notation a m indicate analog data where m is its position in the analog data array Data Field SELECT Byte Count 0 Oversize Reject Count 1 DOF Reject Count 2 End Reject Count 3 Particle Counter 4 Seconds Milliseconds 5 Hours Minutes 6 Host Sync Counter 7 Reset Flag 8 Diode 1 Vol a 0 10 Diode 64 Vol a 1 11 Diode 32 Vol a 2 12 Pitot Press a 3 13 Static Press a 4 14 LWC How Wire Signal a 5 15 CIP Data SELECT Options Function Reference O 226 CIPData CIP Data Access Data Field SELECT LWC Slave Monitor a 6 16 CIP DSP Board Temp a 7 17 Spare a 8 18 Spare a 9 19 Optional Temp 1 a 10
413. t care and a description of what they do to control the sizing methods Mode upper nibble Description xxx Minimum shadow bit selector xxlx Middle shadow bit selector xlxx Maximum shadow bit selector lxxx Raw uncorrected counts bit selector MODE Upper nibble As you can see bit 7 of the MODE parameter can be set to return raw uncorrected counts or in 0x8 hexadecimal for all sizing methods no normalization using elapsed time For both area sizing methods lower nibble 3 and 4 for the MODE you can use the upper nibble for the MODE parameter to control which shadow levels are added minimum middle maximum A shadow level is added to the total area calculation by setting the corresponding bit Bit 4 is used for minimum shadow bit 5 for middle shadow and bit 6 for maximum shadow If the minimum middle and maximum bits of the MODE parameter are all zero this indicates an invalid mode and all bits are assumed on default mode A particle is found to touch the edge by having either the first of the last pixel set in any color minimum middle or maximum This test is done by this function for all particle slices For the edge reject modes the elapsed times for all particles rejected or not are counted up and used in the final correction The X size of a particle is computed by adding all the set bits in a particular slice From slice to slice in a given particle the X size only changes if it was gr
414. t finds a math function operator The operator takes the appropriate number of arguments from the stack and replaces them with the result of the operation Setup Table Reference 568 Formula Table fml 300 SEA Model 300 When all computations have been performed the formula manager takes the first element from the stack and copies it to the formula result This way the value from the computation gets passed to a formula variable Please note that we use the first element from the stack and not the top of the stack This means that it is up to the user to ensure that when all computations are done there is only one element on the stack This would make the top of the stack the first element on the stack There are several basic factors that can make up a computation Here is a list of the permitted factors for computations Factor Sample Sample Constant PI C Formula F100 Fo Temperature Acquisition A100 Aq Fssp Long 12 0x80 Double 1 25e 7 343 78 String On Ready Board Bd 2dc Bd Fssp Probe Pr Fssp PO Lookup Lo RK24 K1 Radar Ra CPR Math sin Function Sum Volts Factors The following table shows the constant type factors possible for the M300 system Name Description 2PI 2 Pl C Speed of light COMMA Comma 44 or 0x2C CR Carriage Return 13 or 0xD DEGTORAD 180 PI LF Line Feed 10 or OxA Constant Factors Setup Table
415. t interface adapter card is capable of interfacing to FSSP ASASP 1D C 1D P and IPC probes Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 1D Interface 0 7 2 Probe Command 0 15 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires forty two bytes of data for each sample and 42 bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format The data acquired is in the following format Byte Offset Value 0 1 Size 1 count 23 Size2count 4 5 Size 3 count 28 29 Size 15 count 30 31 Strobe count 32 33 Spare 1 total strobes Data Format Acquisition Reference 80 Type 30 1D Counts Byte Offset Value 34 35 Spare 2 activity 36 37 Spare 3 38 39 Spare 40 Range command value 41 Reference voltage value Data Format Continued Type Synchronous event Comments SEA Model 300 The 1D interface card provides twenty sixteen bit counter channels The first fifteen counter channels are used to record the fifteen sizes generated by the probes The sixteenth channel is used to record the number of strobes The remaining four channels may be used to count other events such as total strobe total resets and or activity Please note that not all 1D probes have total strobes and activity in the order given above You should check the 1D probe manual for information on which signals are available and where To control the probe command probe range or pump on off use
416. ta acquired consists of one or two blocks of 32 bit integer data The first block always has the size counts The second optional block has the interval counts Type Synchronous event Comments To obtain the 1D reference voltage use channel zero on the built in Analog to Digital Converter See 1D256 Analog to Digital Converter acquisition Please note that the reference voltage is internally divided by two compared to the other channels Acquisition Reference e 105 A Type 44 1D256 Analog Input SEA Model 300 Type 44 1D256 Analog Input Description This acquisition type is used to acquire analog data from the 1D256 interface card also known as 1D Advanced There are eight 12 bit analog channels Channel zero is reserved for the probe reference voltage Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Channel 0 7 2 Range l2 3 Gain 0 2 Table 5 Parameters Parameter one is used as the channel number It can be a value from zero to seven Parameter two is used as the voltage range A value of zero specifies 5 to 5 voltage range while a value of one specifies 10 to 10 voltage range Parameter three is used as the gain A value of zero specifies a gain of one a value of one specifies a gain of 10 and a value of two specifies 100 Note That both the range and gain are set in the 1D256 board by jumpers The values specified here are used by the data conversion utilities to obtain the right voltage v
417. table describes possible sizing modes If the MODE is 0 the average of the X and Y dimensions are used for sizing If the MODE is a l only the X dimension is used for sizing If the MODE is 2 the Y dimension is used for sizing If the MODE is a 3 or 4 the particle is assumed round and the particle dimension is obtained by finding the diameter from the total particle area The difference between MODE 3 and 4 is that MODE 3 counts all particle no edge reject and MODE 4 only counts the particles that do not touch the edges edge reject For the modes that compute particle diameter from total particle area modes 3 and 4 the upper nibble for the MODE parameter is used to control which shadow levels are added minimum middle maximum A shadow level is added to the total area calculation by setting the corresponding bit Bit 4 is used for minimum shadow bit 5 for middle shadow and bit 6 for maximum shadow Normally by default all shadow levels are used to compute the total particle area upper nibble for MODE parameter is zero The STATE control variable is also used to control the function operational mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the summation is done every interval If the STATE control variable is a 1 then the sums are accumulated If the STATE control variable is a 2 this causes the last summation value to be held Any other transition in the control variable clears the internal summatio
418. ter in mb from temperature in degrees celsius The following computation is performed for each temperature passed esw 10 7 90298 373 16 1 273 15 1 5 02808 LOG10 373 16 1 273 15 0 00000013816 10 11 344 1 T 273 15 373 16 1 0 0081328 10 3 49149 373 16 T 273 15 1 LOG10 1013 246 Result Dix Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations ESW mb F130 F 1 Esw F199 Function Reference 270 EvtStr Event String SEA Model 300 EvtStr Event String Synopsis EvtStr EVENT BIT STRO STR1 EVENT Acquisition tag or formula number for event tag BIT 1 Event bit number integer 0 31 STRO Zero 0 false value string m21 string STR1 p One 1 true value string p21 string Description This function converts the state of one digital event bit into one of two string values This is normally done to obtain a string that can be displayed in the text table If the specified bit is a zero false STRO is returned If the specified bit is a one true STR1 is returned The returned character array is of size n containing either STRO or STR1 where s 7 is the maximum size between STRO and STR1 Result Type Space S n n max m p Example Name Units Number Result Computations EventString IEN F122 C 9 EvtStr F121 1 ARMED DISARMED Function Reference 271 EvtVal Event Value SEA Model 300 EvtVal Event Value Synopsis EvtVal EVENT BIT STATE
419. the Col DCmd function Acquisition Reference O 81 Type 31 Hail Spectrometer SEA Model 300 Type 31 Hail Spectrometer Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the hail spectral data from the Hail interface card This single slot interface adapter card has fifteen sixteen bit counter channels and twenty four single bit events This acquisition routine acquires the fifteen counter channel data Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Counters 8 14 Ox7F 2 Counter 0 7 OxFF 3 Parameters This routine uses the first two parameters to control the reset mode for each counter As shown above each counter is controlled by a single bit in parameter one or two If the control bit for a counter is zero the counter will be reset to zero each time the counter value is acquired The acquired count will represent the number of counts that occurred since the last acquisition If the control bit for a counter is a one the counter will not be reset during data acquisition The count will then represent the total number of counts that have occurred since the system was started Their control bits are assigned as follows Data Size This routine acquires thirty bytes of data for each sample and 30 bytes should be allocated for each sample Data Format Byte Offset Value 0 1 Size 1 count 2 3 Size 2 count 4 5 Size 3 count Data Format Acquisition Reference O 82 Type 31 Hail Spect
420. the Command Table cmd 300 tables For commands that the user executes based on predefined keystrokes see Command Table cmd 300 For commands that will execute on predefined triggers see Triggered Command Table tic 300 The user may also enter commands from the M300 command line check the M300 User s guide for more information on the command line The following is a list of the commands presently available Note M300 Command Manager commands are not case sensitive Command Name Command Description Page asc Control ASCII manager 496 back Sends the M300 Main Window to the back of display 506 broadcast Toggles the M300 broadcast 503 clear error Clears the M300 Main Window Error box 506 cmdld Control the command byte for a 1D Board 492 cmd2g Control the command byte for a 2D Grey Board 493 cmdaimms Control the AIMMS purge 495 end Jumps to the end of a playback file 499 file Starts and stops M300 record 500 fml Performs various M300 formula operations 501 front Brings the M300 Main Window to the front of display 506 fwa Sends commands to a Formula Watch and Alter display 502 Ibl Sends commands to a Label display 504 Ist Sends commands to a List display 505 mam Sends commands to a Moving Air Mass display 508 minimize Minimizes the M300 Main Window 506 next Skips to the next buffer of a playback file 499 open Opens the M300 to the current cons
421. this display to the M300 The number can be used for commands State The state variable is used to control when a map entry is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 see also State on page 528 Window The window where the target position map display will be performed see also Window on page 527 Setup Table Reference 599 Target Position Display Table pos 300 SEA Model 300 cLat cLon These fields specify the center latitude and center longitude of the position display These fields are to be specified in degrees and fractions of a degree The M300 will convert these into radians internally nsMiles ewMiles These fields specify the distance north south and east west of the center point These values are specified in nautical miles Scale The scale to be used for map display Normally the scale is a 1 0 The scale can be less than 1 0 or greater than 1 0 The scale must be greater than 0 0 AutoPercent Controls whether or not the position display will redraw the map to fit the current position in the plot It is based on the width and height of the window 1 100 Typical values are 1 to 10 percent A negative value disables this feature i e 1 FileName The map file name tgt If no map is desired then provide an empty map file The map file supports the M200 format and there are some new additional commands for the M300 system Position Entry The position entry shows aircraft track alo
422. tion This function computes the range in meters from the given Piraq configuration data Note that the CLOCK value must be the period 1 frequency not the frequency f CLOCK 2 99792458x10 0 5 i 0 5 GATEWIDTH fori 0 n 1 KP Note If the CLOCK argument is omitted a period constant of 1 25x107 8 MHz is used Also the constant 2 99792458x108 is for the speed of light Result Type Space Dia n GATES Example Name Units Number Result Computations PiragRange mm F2000 F 200 PqRange F2102 F2102 F1310 Function Reference O 348 PqRaw Piraq Raw Data SEA Model 300 PqRaw Piraq Raw Data Synopsis PqRaw A SELECT A Acquisition tag for Piraq data tag SELECT 1 Data select integer Description This function is used to access the Piraq I Q amp A raw data See Type 100 PIRAQ I Q and P The function will return either a b or p data based on the SELECT argument SELECT Type 0 a 1 b 2 p SELECT Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations a Hor F2001 F 200 PqRaw A2000 0 par un F2002 F 200 PqRaw A2000 1 MoN per F2003 F 200 PqRaw A2000 2 Function Reference O 349 PqReflectivity Piraq Reflectivity SEA Model 300 PqReflectivity Piraq Reflectivity Synopsis PqReflectivity POWER RANGE RADARCONST POWER Formula for Piraq power m21 RANGE p Formula for Piraq range
423. to frequency convertor built into the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Mono Interface 0 3 2 3 Probe Type 0 1 Parameters Parameter three is used to select house data for the 2D Mono probes zero or the HVPS probes one Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The array of eight 16 bit words represents the counts of the output of an eight channel voltage to frequency converter Type Synchronous event Comments This is an synchronous acquisition and should be acquired at regular intervals At every acquisition the house is advanced and the data for the next channel is recorded Eight housekeeping channels are acquired in succession and stored in an array in memory The acquisition returns this array The values returned represent the most recent data for that channel The data will be between 1 and 8 sample intervals old Acquisition Reference O 56 Type 12 DT2801 Analog SEA Model 300 Type 12 DT2801 Analog Description This acquisition type is used to acquire an analog channel from a DT2801 analog to digital converter adapter Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Analog Channel 0 7 2 Gain 0 3 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format The data acquired is in two s complement integer coding and rep
424. trol function computes and updates the multiply and divide factors used by digital frequency space generator on the 2D Grey interface this control is necessary to keep the 2D Grey images from being distorted This frequency generates the TAS clock that strobes the 2D Grey data Upon successful completion this function returns the board frequency specified in the function otherwise it will return zero Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Control2GTAS MHz F101 F 1 Co2GTas Bd 2dg 0 800 Function Reference 235 CoATDAQ141X Control ATDAQ141X SEA Model 300 CoATDAQ141X Control ATDAQ141X Synopsis CoATDAQ141X BOARD VOLTAGE CHANNEL BOARD Board name for ATDAQ141X interface board VOLTAGE 1 Analog output voltage in volts CHANNEL 1 Output channel integer 0 1 Description Controls the output voltages for the ATDAQ141X Board This function is used to control the analog voltage value output for a specific channel The function returns an integer containing the calculated analog output voltage Check the ATDAQ141X manual for further details Result Type Space I 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations ControlATDAQ141X un F501 IT 1 CoATDAQ141X Bd ATDAQ141X 2 1 Function Reference O 236 CoCIPGSTAS Control CIPGS TAS SEA Model 300 CoCIPGSTAS Control CIPGS TAS Synopsis CoCIPGSTAS BOARD FREQUENCY BOARD Board name for CIPGS Interface board FREQUENCY
425. trol function computes and updates the multiply and divide factors used by digital frequency space generator on the 2D Mono interface this control is necessary to keep the 2D Mono images from being distorted This frequency generates the TAS clock that strobes the 2D Mono data Upon successful completion this function returns the board frequency specified in the function otherwise it will return zero Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Control2DTAS MHz F101 F 1 Co2DTas Bd 2dc 0 800 Function Reference O 233 Co2GCmd Control 2D Grey Command SEA Model 300 Co2GCmd Control 2D Grey Command Synopsis Co2GCmd BOARD COMMAND BOARD Board name for 2D Grey interface board COMMAND 1 2D Grey command integer Description This function sends the 2D Grey Command byte for the user specified board Check the 2D Grey probe manual for the specified values that can be use for the commands out to the probe Upon successful completion this function returns the user specified COMMAND otherwise it returns Zero Result Type Space 1 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations Co2GCmd ut F2001 IT 1 Co2GCmd Bd 2dg 0x01 Function Reference 234 Co2GTAS Control 2D Grey TAS SEA Model 300 Co2GTAS Control 2D Grey TAS Synopsis Co2GTAS BOARD FREQUENCY BOARD Board name for 2D Grey Interface board FREQUENCY 1 Board frequency in MHz Description Control 2G TAS This con
426. try If the name has spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes The name can be a maximum of 31 characters and it must be unique Window This parameter is the name of the window where the display will be performed The window name represents also a window configuration file and therefore cant contain any spaces The window can have a maximum of 31 characters There must be a valid window name specified in the window table See Window Table wnd 300 The type for the window entry must match the desired display There must also be a window configuration file See Window Table Configuration File wnd for the specified window Setup Table Reference 527 Standard conventions for parameters in setup project files SEA Model 300 Color The color parameter can be used to specify the desired color for a particular entry or for a specify feature of an entry Each color value represents a 24 bit RGB value OxRRGGBB The red green and blue values can go between 0 and 255 0 OxFF Normally the user doesnt need to know the specific RGB values for a color to be able to select the desired color The colors are normally picked through a color dialog picker and then save to the file when the project is saved Examples of color values are 0x000000 for black OxFFFFFF for white 0xOOFF0000 red Ox00FED0O for green 0x0000FF for blue In addition to color values in RGB the user can also specify color names such as red blue green etc For
427. tude deg F1252 D 1 Units F1202 deg rad Altitude ft F1253 F 1 Units F1203 ft m GroundSpeed knots F1254 F 1 Units F1204 knots m s GroundTrack deg F1255 F 1 Units F1205 deg rad 7 NavModeStatusByte F1260 I 1 F1208 Ox1F amp InitRequired F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 0 Init Required Initialized F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 1 Initialized iy 3DNavSolution F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 2 3D Nav Solution 1 2DNavSolution F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 3 2D Nav Solution by 3DDiffCorrSol F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 4 3D Diff Corrected 2DDiffCorrSol F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 5 2D Diff Corrected DeadReckoning F1261 S 20 StrSel F1260 6 Dead Reckoning 1 SolutionConfidenceLevel F1262 S 20 EvtStr F1208 5 Normal High GPSTimeAlignmentMode F1263 S 20 EvtStr F1208 7 Enabled Disabled LatitudeStr F1291 S 12 LatStr F1201 Function Reference O 206 AIMMSData AIMMS Data Access SEA Model 300 LongitudeStr F1292 S 12 LonStr F1202 ID2Aimms20Count F1299 L 1 F1099 Function Reference O 207 Alarm Alarm SEA Model 300 Alarm Alarm Synopsis Alarm HOUR MINUTE SECOND OFFSET DURATION HOUR 1 Hours to synchronize to integer MINUTE 1 Minutes to synchronize to integer SECOND 1 Seconds to synchronize to integer OFFSET 1 Offset from specified time in seconds long DURATION 1 Duration of high v
428. types An index value of 1 represents the first value in the data index base 1 not base 0 Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SrIEEE ee F100 F 5 SrIEEE A100 10 5 Function Reference O 390 SrInteger Serial Integer SEA Model 300 SrInteger Serial Integer Synopsis SrInteger A INDEX COUNT A Acquisition tag for Serial Integer data tag INDEX 1 Index of value in serial data integer COUNT 1 Number of data values for this index integer Description This function is used to retrieve specific data values from a block of integer data This function can be used in a data block from either the serial integer data type or the DRV11 data type Make sure that parameter one in the acquisition table for these types indicates the appropriate integer type 16 bit or 32 bit integer and data swap options Result Type Space Diz n COUNT Example Name Units Number Result Computations SrInteger qn F100 F 5 SrInteger A100 10 5 Function Reference O 391 SrNmea NMEA Sentence SEA Model 300 SrNmea NMEA Sentence Synopsis SrNmea F IDSTR INDEX COUNT MODE SrNmea F IDSTR INDEX COUNT MODE HEX F 7n Formula string to tag for NMEA data m21 IDSTR p String used for sentence ID p21 string INDEX 1 Index into serial data integer COUNTI 1 Number of data entries to get integer MODE 1 Mode selector integer HEX 1 Hexadecimal numb
429. u can convert elapsed TAS 256 to a time by using the following formula DivideFactor 3 X5 12 1 AT RawCounts x Maa a x 5 12 x 10 s Acquisition Reference O 73 Type 24 2D Grey Minimum Count SEA Model 300 Type 24 2D Grey Minimum Count Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the number of pixels that where shaded at the minimum level in a 2D Grey image This count is generated while the image is being shifted in from the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Format This 16 bit word is an unsigned integer containing the count of the number of pixels at the minimum level Type Asynchronous slave event Comments It is possible to approximate the particle area by adding the minimum middle and maximum shadow Acquisition Reference O 74 Type 25 2D Grey Middle Count SEA Model 300 Type 25 2D Grey Middle Count Description This acquisition type is used to acquire the number of pixels that where shaded at the middle level in a 2D Grey image This count is generated while the image is being shifted in from the probe Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2D Grey Interface 0 3 2 3 Parameters Data Size This routine acquires a 16 bit word Two bytes should be allocated for this sample Data Fo
430. uble Precision Float 8 bytes 2 22x10308 1 79x 19308 Parameter 1 Acquisition Reference O 177 Type 254 Secondary Acquisition SEA Model 300 Data Size The data size varies depending on the data source The bytes per sample is eight bytes for doubles four bytes for floats four bytes for long integers two bytes for integers and one byte for characters Data Format The data format varies accordingly with the data source float integer long character Type Asynchronous event Not used in the acquisition table Comments To get the correct data you must look at Parameter 1 and cast the data appropriately Acquisition Reference O 178 Type 255 Tables Data SEA Model 300 Type 255 Tables Data Description This acquisition type is reserved for the storage of all M300 configuration tables into the acquisition data file Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size varies as the length of the M300 tables vary Data Format ASCII data terminated by zeroes C style Type Asynchronous event Not used in the acquisition table Comments This acquisition type describes the tables data format This cannot be used in the acquisition table To turn table storage on or off turn the table buffer buffer 255 on or off respectively Acquisition Reference O 179 Type 255 Tables Data SEA Model 300 Acquisition Reference 180 Functio
431. uency MHz 0 16 0 250 1 1 4 000 2 2 2 000 3 3 1 333 4 4 1 000 5 5 0 800 6 6 0 667 7 7 0 571 8 8 0 500 9 9 0 444 OxA 10 0 400 OxB 11 0 364 0xC 12 0 333 0xD 13 0 307 OxE 14 0 286 OxF 15 0 267 Bit Shift The rearm rate should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which 2D Grey images will be recorded Acquisition Reference O 134 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced SEA Model 300 Data Size This routine acquires a variable length block of images The user can select the maximum size of each image by providing the number of bytes per sample desired The samples field will select the minimum number of images The final data size will not be larger than the number of samples times the bytes per sample The total number of images acquired may or may not be larger than the minimum number of images asked for This depends on the data coming from the probe Data Format The 2D Grey advanced data is formed by one or more header image blocks Slices are 128 bits wide The header is two slices long The image data follows each header The first slice of each image has the 16 bit particle count repeated 8 times The image data follows the repeated particle count Each image header is composed of a 16 bit forward link a 16 bit reserved field a 32 bit elapsed time since start of image a 32 bit elapsed time since start of buffer a 16 bit slice count a 16 bit multiply TAS factor a 16 bit divide TAS factor
432. uisition Reference e 170 Type 102 PIRAQ Status lword pulseWidth lword dataFormat PqStatus Type Asynchronous slave event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 171 SEA Model 300 SEA Model 300 Type 250 Status Info Data Type 250 Status Info Data Description This acquisition type is reserved for storing any internal data values from the M300 These are usually for used for testing Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 type 0 255 2 sub type 0 255 3 Parameters Description Type Sub Type irq monitor 0 0 irq latency 0 25 1 ps 1 0 irq duration 0 25 1 ys 2 0 proxy latency 0 25 1 ps 3 0 proxy duration 0 25 1 ps 4 0 M300 Time s 16 0 M300 Time ns 16 1 QNX Time s 17 0 QNX Time ns 17 1 BC635 BC637 Time s 18 0 BC635 BC637 Time ns 18 1 Select Data Acquisition Reference O 172 Type 250 Status Info Data SEA Model 300 Data Size The data size is four bytes Data Format See the data type select table above Type Synchronous event Comments This acquisition events must be added under the system board Acquisition Reference O 173 Type 251 Command Data SEA Model 300 Type 251 Command Data Description This acquisition type is reserved for storing any command input to the M300 during the acquisition process When a user inputs a command using the command manager the M300 will then act on
433. uisition event must be the first event of an asynchronous buffer in the acquisition table The buffer number should be the next non zero integer increment of the highest buffer number used so far If a Synchronous event is being used the buffer size is not dynamic and must have the bytes per sample set to a user specified value large enough to collect the data This value is the maximum Acquisition Reference O 92 Type 37 Serial ASCH Data SEA Model 300 number of bytes that can be acquired at one time If the buffer is not filled during acquisition then all remaining bytes will be set to zero Comments None Acquisition Reference O 93 Type 38 Serial IEEE Data SEA Model 300 Type 38 Serial IEEE Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire serial IEEE floating point data from the SEA serial interface card or any serial port including boards which add serial ports to the system The serial data should be blocked by a non number IEEE value followed by the word OxFF55 i e FEFFFFFFFFF55 Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Swap bytes 0 1 2 3 Throttle oe Parameters The high nibble for parameter one is reserved and should be 0 Bit one of the lower nibble is used to specify data swap 0 no swap 1 swap The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which IEEE data blocks may be recorded per second It should be sig
434. uisition table Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to 16 bytes Data Format The data acquired is composed of eight 16 bit integer values representing the counts for the different house channels Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 111 Type 49 1D256 Activity SEA Model 300 Type 49 1D256 Activity Description This acquisition type is used to acquire 1D probe activity data Activity data is recorded in a 16 bit counter Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to two bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 16 bit integer value representing the counter value Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 112 Type 50 1D256 Total Strobes SEA Model 300 Type 50 1D256 Total Strobes Description This acquisition type records 1D probe total strobe data Total strobe data is recorded in a 32 bit counter Total strobe data is the sum of all particles that passed through the beam of the probe regardless of whether or not the probe actually used all particles in the sizing Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to four bytes Data Format The data acquired is a 32 bit integer value
435. ult Computations LongitudeString F200 S 12 Lonstr F100 Function Reference O 312 Lookup Lookup Interpolation SEA Model 300 Lookup Lookup Interpolation Synopsis Lookup F LOOKUP F 7 Formula value float 721 LOOKUP Lookup table lookup Description This function computes the linear interpolation of the value s given an X and Y array of data provided via the lookup table See Lookup Table lup 300 If the X value is less than the domain of the X values in the table then lowest Y value will be returned On the other hand if the X value is greater than the domain of X values then the highest Y value will be returned The formula passed to this function must be of the float type and can represent a single value or an array of values Result Type Space DIn Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations Lookup a F200 F 10 Lookup F100 Lo Temp Function Reference O 313 LookupGet Lookup Entry Get Value SEA Model 300 LookupGet Lookup Entry Get Value Synopsis LookupGet LOOKUP ROW COLUMN LOOKUP Lookup table lookup ROW 1 Row index to return integer COLUMN 1 Column index to return integer Description This function returns a value or an array of values depending on the index values passed to the function from the lookup data entry See Lookup Table lup 300 The row and column indexes are base 0 this means the first value has an index of zero not one An index
436. um 01 middle 11 maximum The bit shift rate should not be confused with the image strobe clock The bit shift rate is the rate at which data is shifted out of the probe into the data system It is constant and is set by the upper nibble of parameter two Acquisition Reference 135 Type 66 2D Grey Advanced SEA Model 300 The strobe clock controls the rate at which image slices are shifted into the probe It varies with true air speed and pixel size The strobe clock is set by the control function Co2GTAS The maximum rate that can be used for the bit shift clock depends on the length of the cable between the probe and the data system A 1 MHZ Divide factor 4 should be adequate for the majority of installations where the cable length is less than 50 feet If longer cables are used the user should try slower rates The most common symptoms of too high a bit shift rate are image jitter or missing pixels Acquisition Reference O 136 Type 67 PMS 1058B 1D Data SEA Model 300 Type 67 PMS 1058B 1D Data Description This acquisition type is used to acquire data from the PMS 1058B 1D interface card Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 1D interface 0 7 2 Probe control word 0 OxFF 3 Size counts 0 1 3 upper nibble 3 Auxiliary counts 0 5 lower nibble Parameters Parameter one is used to set the 1D interface Valid values are between zero and seven Each 1D acquisition type must have a differe
437. umber Result Computations 2GSums mon F100 F 64 SUMS2G A100 A101 A101 0 P3 1 1 Function Reference O 414 Sums2GAdv 2D Grey Advanced Sums SEA Model 300 Sums2GAdv 2D Grey Advanced Sums Synopsis Sums2GAdv A MODE PROBE INTERVAL STATE YSIZE A Acquisition tag for 2D Grey data tag MODE 1 Function sizing mode integer PROBE Probe definition probe INTERVAL 1 Integration interval integer STATE 1 Function control variable integer YSIZE 1 Pixel dimension float Note Deprecated M300 Function replacement See GrSums 2D Grey Sums Description This function builds up an approximation of the 2D Grey advanced spectrum using the particle dimensions and elapsed time of the 2D Grey scaled images These particles can be summed up using several different modes and normalized using the elapsed time value if desired The output of the function is an array and may be processed like the arrays from 1D and 2D data The STATE control variable is also used to control the function operational mode If the STATE control variable is a 0 then the summation is done every interval If the STATE control variable is a 1 then the sums are accumulated If the STATE control variable is a 2 this causes the last summation value to be held Any other transition in the control variable clears the internal summation and starts the accumulation process all over again The PIXELSIZE should be equal to the probe pi
438. umber of strobe interval channels to be acquired The number of strobe interval channels is the value specified in the upper nibble plus one and multiplied by 16 If no interval channels are desired use a value of 255 for parameter three Use parameter three to control the strobe interval frequency The lower nibble for parameter two is used to store the probe command value The upper nibble for parameter two is used as the 1D interface card number Valid values for 1D interface cards are between zero and seven This number must be unique and it is assigned in one of Acquisition Reference O 104 Type 43 1D256 Counts SEA Model 300 the parameter fields of the acquisition table The lower nibble for parameter three is used as the source frequency for the strobe interval counter The range of frequency values to be selected are follows Parameter 3 Frequency 0 4 0 MHZ 1 400 KHz 2 40 KHz 3 4 KHz 4 400 Hz Parameters 3 The upper nibble for parameter three is used as the divide factor for the strobe interval counter A value of zero divides the selected frequency by 16 while all other values divide the frequency by the actual values specified Use a value of 255 for parameter three to skip acquisition of interval data Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of size channels times four plus the number of interval channels times four Data Format The da
439. umidity Synopsis DewPointToRH DP TEMP DP 7 Formula for dewpoint 2 gt 0 TEMP 1 Formula for outside air temperature value Description This function calculates an approximation of the relative humidity based on the DP dewpoint and TEMP outside air temperature arguments passed The following formulas demonstrate the calculations performed 7 567DP1 i sn l g es 7 567 TEMP fs l Ta fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example 7 Name Units Number Result Computations RH ng F4008 F 1 DewPointToRH F3005 F3006 Function Reference O 262 Dfault Default Value SEA Model 300 Dfault Default Value Synopsis Dfault F LOW HIGH DEFAULT F 7 Formula of an array of values 721 LOW 1 Lower limit value HIGH 1 Upper limit value DEFAULT 1 Default value Description This function is used to check limits on an array of values and return the default value if the input values are outside specified limits if F 1 lt LOW A F i gt HIGH then fli DEFAULT else f 1 F i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Diax Example Name Units Number Result Computations Default Man F100 I 10 Dfault F100 1 100 0 Function Reference O 263 DIndex Double Element Access SEA Model 300 DIndex Double Element Access Synopsis DIndex F INDEX F 7 Formula of an array of values double 721 INDEX 1 Index number of element being referenced integer gt 0 Description Uses t
440. ummation value to be held Any other transition in the control variable clears the internal summation and starts the accumulation process all over again The FIRST parameter can be used to avoid returning the summation value for channel zero this may be desired with the advanced 1D256 interface Use a value of 0 to return all counts Use a value of 1 to skip the counts for channel zero Result Type Space D n n number of data samples Example Name Units Number Result Computations FSSPCounts edt F100 F 15 OdSums A1001 0 1 Function Reference O 339 PAIt Pressure Altitude SEA Model 300 PAIt Pressure Altitude Synopsis PAlt SPRES SPRES 7 Formula of an array of values containing static pressures in mb 7 gt 1 Description This function computes pressure altitude from static pressure SPRESI cal 1013 25 fori 0 n 1 fli 1 4545x10 x 1 A Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations PressureAltitude my oe F200 F 1 PAIt F100 Function Reference O 340 Plas Pressure Indicated Airspeed SEA Model 300 Plas Pressure Indicated Airspeed Synopsis Plas PPRES PPRES 7 Formula of an array of pitot pressure values in mb 7 gt 0 Description This function computes pressure indicated air speed from pitot pressure differential pressure 1013 25 fori 0 n 1 fli Jessah Tean ae 1 knots Result Type Space D n Example
441. unction performs a reset and computes a new value If the STATE control variable is a 1 then new data is processed and a standard deviation value returned If the STATE control variable is a 2 this cause the last standard deviation value to be held Result Type Space D Z Example Name Units Number Result Computations StDev sen F100 F 1 StDev F2000 F200 Function Reference 395 STemp Static Temperature SEA Model 300 STemp Static Temperature Synopsis STemp TTEMP PPRES SPRES RECOVERY TTEMP n Total Temperatures in C m21 PPRES p Pitot Pressures in mb p21 SPREST r Static Pressures in mb 721 RECOVERY 1 Recovery factors Description This function computes static temperature from total temperature pitot pressure static pressure and an installation specific recovery constant The recovery constant varies between 0 0 and 1 0 This function uses interpolation See Interpolation TTEMP i 273 15 fli wre eee RECOVERY x 1 PERESL SPRES i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n n max m p r Example Name Units Number Result Computations StaticTemperature non F200 F 20 STemp F100 F101 F102 1 0 Function Reference O 396 StrCat String Concatenate SEA Model 300 StrCat String Concatenate Synopsis StrCat STRING1 STRING2 StrCat STRING1 STRING2 LENGTH STRING mm String for compare m21 string STRING2 p String for compare p21 string
442. used to change range on the FSSP probes or turn the pump on off on the PCASP probes The auto is used to restore control of the 1D probe control to the control functions Example A F1 cmdid fssp 1 Command Manager Reference O 492 2D Grey Commands SEA Model 300 2D Grey Commands Synopsis cmd2g board command andlor cmd2g board auto tas2g board frequency tas2g board auto board 2D Grey Board name board command Command to be sent byte 0 255 frequency Frequency to be sent float Description 2D Grey Byte Command This command is used to change the command byte for the 2D Grey probe The board is the name defined in the M300 setup for the 2D Grey card to be changed The and or or operations are optional These operations are used to turn on or or off and individual bits to the probe command see example below command Current command value auto Restore control of the 2D Grey probe command to the control functions 2D Grey True Air Speed Command This command can be used to change the 2D Grey probe true air speed frequency The value specified will override the control function in the formula table fml 300 board The board name specifies a unique 2D Grey interface card as defined in the board table frequency The desired fequency value in MHz auto Restore control of the 2D Grey probe true air speed frequency to the control functions Example A F1 emd2g 2dg 0x01 A F2 cmd2g9 2dg 0x02 OR
443. used to decode the time data from the falcon data buffer and return the current day The falcon day returned by this function can then be used by the text table for display of the falcon day value Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FalconDay ma F100 I 1 FalconDay A100 5 Function Reference 274 FalconTime Falcon Time SEA Model 300 FalconTime Falcon Time Synopsis FalconTime A OFFSET A Acquisition tag for Falcon data tag OFFSET 1 Offset for the time data in the falcon buffer block integer Description This function is used to get the falcon time into a string format The time string has the following format HH MM SS FFF where HH represents hours MM minutes SS seconds and FFF fractions of second This time string data can be used in the text table to display falcon time Result Type Space S 14 Example Name Units Number Result Computations FalconTime my F100 S 14 FalconTime A100 5 Function Reference 275 FArray Float Array Element Access SEA Model 300 FArray Float Array Element Access Synopsis FArray E INDEX F 7 Formula number of an array of values 721 INDEX 1 Index of desired float in array integer gt 0 KP Note Deprecated M300 function replacement See FIndex Float Element Access Description This function is used to access individual elements in a float array f F INDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example 7 Nam
444. used to specify the clock source for the Model 200 System A value of zero will use only the Model 200 internal clock A value of one will only use the external Falcon word rate as the clock A value of two will cause the Model 200 internal clock to be used until the Falcon data begins arriving and will then switch to the Falcon word rate for the clock signal The clock divider is used to divide the Falcon word clock down to match the system clock frequency in the system table i e system frequency equals 100 Hz Falcon data rate 3500 words second divider equals 35 equals Falcon data rate divided by system frequency The throttle byte should be a non zero multiple of the system frequency It represents the maximum rate at which Falcon data blocks may be recorded per second It should be significantly larger than the maximum block rate that will be received If the throttle rate is less than or equal to the actual block rate the internal FIFO will never completely empty This will increase data latency Data Size The data size specified in the acquisition table should be equal to the number of bytes in the largest data block times the sample frequency This is normally 7000 bytes 350 words 2 bytes per word 10 samples The data size is automatically resized to the actual number of bytes in the acquisition table or the number of bytes taken which ever is less Data Format The data acquired corresponds to a block of data as specified by t
445. user should pick colors that will be highly visible versus the window background The desired colors should be different enough from other colors to avoid confusion see also Color on page 528 Type Plot type for strip charts Use 0 for points Use 1 for lines default Width Line width for the Strip Chart entry This is normally 1 pixel wide Larger values for line width will require more drawing and slow down the display You should keep this in mind when changing the line width State Setup Table Reference O 619 Strip Chart Display Table stp 300 SEA Model 300 The state variable is used to control when a strip chart entry is visible and active 1 or not visible but active 0 Data for a strip chart entry is always updated even when the display is not visible see also State on page 528 Decimate This field is used to control the number of data points to be displayed A value of selects every nth data point for display Group Strip chart entries can be placed in groups This field is a string with the strip chart group name When running the M300 the user can easily select different groups of strip chart entries for display Index Index of the formula value to display Use 1 for no index Formula Link to formula which is to be used in the Strip Chart entry The data value from this formula will be used to update the Strip Chart display see also Formula on page 528 yMin This specifies the m
446. value as the magnitude Coupled with the FROM field the returned value will be F TO multiplier units For example to go from 12 inches to 1 foot you would call the function as such e Units 12 ft in The following table shows which units may be converted TO and FROM This function is bi directional meaning that any member of a Unit category may be used in either TO or FROM Unit of Measure TO FROM Length km Kilometers m Meters dm Decimeters cm Centimeters mm Millimeters nmi Nautical miles mi Miles ft Feet yd Yards in Inches Area m2 Sq Meters cm2 Sq Centimeters mm2 Sq Millimeters ft2 Sq Feet yd2 Sq Yards in2 Sq Inches Velocity m s Meters per second cm s Centimeters per second ft s Feet per second km h Kilometers per hour m min Meters per minute ft min Feet per minute mi h Miles per hour knots Knots Volume m3 Cubic meters cm3 Cubic centimeters dm3 Cubic decame ters Liters ft3 Cubic feet in3 Cubic inches Mass kg Kilograms g Grams mg Milligrams lb U S Pounds Pressure Pa Pascals kPa Kilo Pascals N m2 Newtons per sq meter bar Bars atm Atmospheres mbar Millibars psi Pounds per sq inch mmHg Millimeters of mercury inHg Inches of mercury Angular deg Degrees rad Radians TO FROM Possible Conversion Arguments Function Reference 428 Units Unit
447. ve kept the same configuration values as the M200 system Setup Table Reference O 536 Acquisition Event Table acq 300 SEA Model 300 Board Each acquisition event must belong to a board This field links the acquisition event to the correct board It is very important to have the correct acquisition events associated with the correct board For example it makes no sense to do a serial acquisition type from a 1D type board as it doesn t make any sense to do the 1D acquisition from a serial type board The M300 acquisition dialog setup ensures that only the valid acquisition types are presented for each board The user must take special care when doing this manually SampleOffset The sample offset select in which acquisition tick the acquisition event gets acquired In the past all synchronous acquisition events got done in the first tick This can overloaded the first tick Usually the duration in the proxy was longest for the first acquisition tick We can balance the acquisition load over several ticks allowing us to do more This is only applies to synchronous acquisition events Example Version 2 acq 300 Name Tag Freq State Size Type Paral Para2 Para3 Board SampleOffset Latitude 1000 T 1 4 16 0xC8 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 Longitude 1001 1 1 4 16 OxC9 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 True Heading 1002 1 1 4 16 OxCC 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 Magnetic Heading 1003 1 1 4 16 OxDO 0x00 0x00 Arinc429 0 Pitch 1004 1 1 4 16 OxD4 0x0
448. verse hyperbolic sine of last number B asinh 457 Arc Tangent Atan Inverse tangent of last number B atan 458 Arc Tangent 2 Atan2 Inverse tangent determining the quadrant BAatan2 459 Hyperbolic Arc Tan Atanh Inverse hyperbolic tangent of the last number B atanh 460 Ceiling Ceil Integer ceiling of last number B ceil 461 Change Sign Chs Change sign of last number B 462 Cosine Cos Cosine of last number B cos 463 Hyperbolic Cosine Cosh Hyperbolic cosine of last number B cosh 464 Exponential Exp Natural antilog of last number B exp 465 Floor Floor Integer floor of last number B floor 466 Hypotenuse Hypot Length of hypotenuse or right triangle with sides A and B A B hypot 467 Natural Logarithm Ln Natural log of last number Bln 468 Logarithm Log Logarithm base 10 of last number B log 469 Logarithm 2 Log2 Logarithm base 2 of last number B log2 470 Long Rotate Left Lrotl Rotates a unsigned long integer A to the left by B bits AB lrotl 471 Long Rotate Right Lrotr Rotates a unsigned long integer A to the right by B bits ABlrotr 472 Power Pow Raises the next to last number to last power A B Pow 473 Rotate Left Rotl Rotates an integer A to the left by B bits A B rotl 474 Rotate Right Rotr Rotates an integer A to the right by B bits A B rotr 475 Sine Sin Sine of last number B sin 476 Hyperbolic Sine Sinh Hyperbolic sine of last number B sinh 477 Square Root Sqrt Square root of last number B sqrt 478 Swap 2 Bytes Swap2
449. west bit of the 16 bit word b0 while event 15 16th event occupies the highest bit of 16 bit word b15 Type Synchronous event Comments None Acquisition Reference O 46 Type 4 CAMAC Loran C GPS SEA Model 300 Type 4 CAMAC Loran C GPS Description This acquisition type is used to acquire Loran GPS data from a CAMAC Loran C GPS interface card mounted in a CAMAC crate The CAMAC Loran C GPS interface card is a microprocessor controlled data preprocessor for serial RS232C Loran GPS data streams The on board preprocessor program can be changed to handle different Loran GPS output formats This modification is accomplished by replacing an EPROM Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 CAMAC Slot 1 23 2 Loran GPS Command 0 255 3 Type 1 2 Parameters Parameter one is used to specify the CAMAC slot number Parameter two must have the appropriate Loran GPS command byte Parameter three is used as the data type Use zero for integer one for float and two for character data types Data Size This routine acquires various data sizes depending on the command sent to the Loran GPS card Refer to the Loran GPS documentation for information regarding data sizes Data Format The format of acquired data is dependent on the command sent to the Loran GPS card For data format information refer to the Loran GPS documentation Type Synchronous event Comments This interface card converts incoming dat
450. writing arithmetic expressions is particularly suited to computerized methods of evaluation because the computer can evaluate an equation from left to right without waiting for operators RPN accomplishes this because it uses a stack based method for performing operations on data This stack based system is further explained in the next section How does RPN work In RPN the numbers and operators are listed one after another and an operator always acts on the most recent numbers in the list The numbers can be thought of as forming a stack like a pile of plates The most recent number goes on the top of the stack An operator takes the appropriate number of arguments from the top of the stack and replaces them by the result of the operation A simple expression such as 3 5 x 7 2 would be written as 3 5 7 2 x The computer evaluates the expression from left to right as follows 1 Push 3 onto the stack Push 5 onto the stack The stack now contains 3 5 3 Apply the operation take the top two numbers off the stack add them together and put the result back on the stack The stack now contains just the number 8 4 Push 7 onto the stack 5 Push 2 onto the stack It now contains 8 7 2 6 Apply the operation take the top two numbers off the stack subtract the top one from the one below and put the result back on the stack The stack now contains 8 5 7 Apply the operation take the top two numbers off the stack
451. xadecimal numeric values RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name FOF8FF aliceblue FFFAFO floralwhite 48D1CC mediumturquoise FAEBD7 antiquewhite 228B22 forestgreen C71585 mediumvioletred 7FFFD4 aquamarine DCDCDC gainsboro 191970 midnightblue FOFFFF azure F8F8FF ghostwhite F5FFFA mintcream F5P5DC beige FFD700 gold FFE4E1 mistyrose FFE4C4 bisque DAA520 goldenrod FFE4B5 moccasin 000000 black A9A9A9 gray BA55D3 morchid FFEBCD blanchedalmond 00A000 green 9370DB mpurple 0000FF blue ADFF2F greenyellow 3CB371 mseagreen 8A2BE2 blueviolet FOFFFO honeydew 7B68EE mslateblue A52A2A brown FF69B4 hotpink OOFAIA mspringgreen DEB887 burlywood CD5C5C indianred 48D1CC mturquoise SF9IEAO cadetblue 4B0082 indigo C71585 mvioletred 7FFFOO chartreuse FFFFFO ivory FFDEAD navajowhite D2691E chocolate FOE68C khaki 000080 navy M300 Colors M300 Miscellaneous Reference O 33 Color System SEA Model 300 RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name RGB Hex Name FF7F50 coral EGEGFA lavender FDF5E6 oldlace 6495ED cornflowerblue FFFOF5 lavenderblush 808000 olive FFF8DC cornsilk 7CFCOO lawngreen 6B8E23 olivedrab DC143C crimson ADD8E6 Iblue FFA500 orange OOFFFF cyan F08080 Icoral FF4500 orangered 00008B darkblue EOFFFF Icyan DA70D6 orchid 008B8B darkcyan FFFACD lemonchiffon EEE8AA palegoldenrod B8860B darkgoldenrod FAFAD2 lgoldenrodyellow
452. xel size for TAS less than the maximum TAS the probe can sample at For higher TAS the PIXELSIZE should be equal to the TAS FREQ where FREQ MULTFAC 50000 DIVFAC Using the MODE parameter it is possible to control the sizing method The lower nibble for the MODE parameter controls the sizing method while the upper nibble for the MODE parameter has some additional control bits shadow levels and uncorrected counts The MODE parameter is best specified in hexadecimal notation In order to come up with the correct value for the MODE parameter it is necessary to first find the desired sizing method and then use the decimal and binary values from the tables in the next page to come up with the final value in hexadecimal to pass to the summation function For example to specify the area with edge reject sizing method using only the middle and maximum shadows You would pick 4 for the lower nibble from the first table Then pick 0110 binary for the upper nibble maximum and middle shadows The hexadecimal value for 0110 binary is 6 Therefore the desired value for the MODE parameter is 0x64 Function Reference O 415 Sums2GAdv 2D Grey Advanced Sums SEA Model 300 The following table shows the valid MODE values for the lower nibble decimal values and a description of what they do to compute the particle size MODE low nibble Description 0 X Y 2 1 X TAS independent 2 Y TAS dependent 3 Area 4 A
453. y file for writing Use with extreme caution if file already exists it will be overwritten If no file name is given for the create then the file name is automatically generated by the M300 In either case the sea extension is added to the file name Example Fl file On file Off i F2 file create F3 file close Command Manager Reference O 500 Formula Commands SEA Model 300 Formula Commands Synopsis fml name number auto fml name number hold fml name number index value auto fml name number operation value auto name number Formula name or number index Index value in formula optional integer operation Math operation to be performed optional string value Value argument auto Restore auto control string constant Description The formula commands have various meanings Prototype 1 above is used to restore control of all the given formula name number to the formula manager Prototype 2 is used to hold the current formula value The formula value will be overridden with the current value until is set in auto mode or a new value is specified Prototype 3 above is used to override the given formula name number with the given value If index is given element index will be overwritten else element 0 will be overwritten If auto is passed the value is retained for one cycle after which it will return to the auto state else the formula value will remain overwritten Prototype 4 above is used to pe
454. y must be corrected for proper operation Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 2 3 Parameters Data Size The data size varies depending on the length of the command Commands are terminated with one or two zeroes depending on which number makes the length even Data Format ASCII data terminated by zeroes C style Type Asynchronous event Not used in the acquisition table Comments This acquisition type describes the error data format This cannot be used in the acquisition table To turn error storage on or off turn the error buffer buffer 252 on or off respectively Acquisition Reference O 175 Type 253 Telemetric Data SEA Model 300 Type 253 Telemetric Data Description This acquisition type is reserved for the telemetric data Telemetric data is similar to secondary acquisition data Telemetric data is acquired via a remote machine connected to the data acquisition system The format for telemetric data is the same as for secondary acquisition data Parameters Parameter Usage Limits 1 Type 0 1 2 2 3 Parameters Parameter one is used to specify the data type For integer and long integer data the type is zero For float data the type is one For character data the type is two Data Size The data size varies depending on the data source The bytes per sample is four bytes for floats four bytes for long integers two bytes for integers and one byte for charact
455. ype Space D 1 F 1 Example Name Units Number Result Computations DeltaTime gs F300 D 1 BufferTime 2 Function Reference O 219 A KF CArray Character Array Element Access SEA Model 300 CArray Character Array Element Access Synopsis CArray F INDEX F 7 Formula of an array of characters string 721 INDEX 1 Index of desired element in character array integer 0 Note Deprecated M300 Replacement function See CIndex Character Element Access Description This function allows access to individual elements of a character array Returns a character referenced by INDEX in the string referenced by the formula E f F INDEX Result Type Space D 1 Example Name Units Number Result Formulas CharacterArray trar F200 C 1 Carray F2012 5 Function Reference O 220 CASData CAS Data Access SEA Model 300 CASData CAS Data Access Synopsis CASData A SELECT A Acquisition tag for CAS data tag SELECT 1 Selector for desired data integer 0 40 Description This function allows access to individual items of the CAS data block including house data The following table shows the different SELECT values for the different CAS data fields Please check the CAS manual for further information To get the size spectrum for the CAS probe use OdSums 1D Sums Data fields with hd 7 next to the description indicate house keeping data where m is it s index in the house keeping data
456. ze parameter one parameter two and parameter three must be setup correctly as per the acquisition type reference manual Some of the parameter values may not be necessary to setup in the M300 system as compared to the same acquisition types in the M200 system This is a direct result of the fact that we now have entries for every board The board entry is responsible to configure and setup the board This task was done in part by the acquisition events in the early M200 days We have tried to make it easier to understand the board configuration by removing the parameter settings from the acquisition events Some acquisition events still need to have settings entered via the parameters Here are some general guidelines to follow when editing the acquisition table Each acquisition event can have a frequency up to the maximum system frequency specified in the system board entry which must be defined The tag number must not be a reserved tag number link to reserved tag numbers In fact no duplicate tag numbers can be used with other acquisition events Once you determine the acquisition event type that you require you should check the acquisition type reference for that event See Acquisition Reference on page 37 For acquisition events to be complete they must belong to a board as mentioned before but they must also be associated with a data buffer Each acquisition event in the acquisition table must also have an entry in the buffer ta
457. zes the calculations s i cos B i fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Cosine UEN F1104 F 2 F300 cos Math Function Reference O 463 cosh Hyperbolic Cosine SEA Model 300 cosh Hyperbolic Cosine Synopsis B cosh R B 7 Last operand n gt 1 KP Note If any values in B are too large a range error will occur Description This function computes the hyperbolic cosine of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s i cosh B 1 fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space D n Example Name Units Number Result Computations HypCosine n F101 F 1 F105 cosh Math Function Reference 464 exp Exponential SEA Model 300 exp Exponential Synopsis B exp a B r Last operand n gt 1 LP Note If any values in B are too large a range error may occur Description This function computes the natural exponential function of B The following formula summarizes the calculations s 1 PU fori 0 n 1 Result Type Space Dix Example Name Units Number Result Computations Exponential oe F101 F 10 F13 exp Math Function Reference 465 floor Floor SEA Model 300 floor Floor Synopsis B floor B r Last formula containing value or array of values n gt 1 Description This function computes the smallest integer that is not less than B Floor The following formula summarizes the calculations s i

M300 Reference Guide - Science Engineering Associates, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents